Screen Reader/2 User's Guide: Difference between revisions

From OS2World.Com Wiki
Jump to navigation Jump to search
Created page with "By IBM '''“Reprint Courtesy of International Business Machines Corporation, © International Business Machines Corporation”''' FIRST EDITION (MARCH 1994) You will f..."
 
Jugbogdan (talk | contribs)
mNo edit summary
 
(9 intermediate revisions by 3 users not shown)
Line 1: Line 1:
By [[IBM]]
{{IBM-Reprint}}


'''“Reprint Courtesy of International Business Machines Corporation, © International Business Machines Corporation”'''
==Introducing Screen Reader/2==
Screen Reader/2 is a computer-access system which enables blind and visually impaired people to use OS/2, Windows, and DOS applications, all running under OS/2 2.1. It is the first computer-access system to automatically read the title, selector, and other system information
presented by the graphical user interface in both OS/2 and Windows applications.


FIRST EDITION (MARCH 1994)
==Enhancements to Screen Reader/DOS and Screen Reader/2 1.0==
Screen Reader/2, version 1.1, is similar to Screen Reader/DOS but works with OS/2, version 2.1. Most of the basic Screen Reader/2 key sequences are similar to those of Screen Reader/DOS and Screen Reader/2, version 1.0; however, new autospeaks, profiles, and key sequences have been added for Screen Reader/2 to support the OS/2 2.1 environment.


You will find the license information and other legal materials in Appendix A, "Legal Information" on page 61. For your convenience,
Screen Reader/2, version 1.1, has these additional enhancements to the Screen Reader product:
this information is also included on the Screen Magnifier/2 audio
*Key definitions have been changed to allow more forms of keypad key sequences. Screen Reader/2 uses a concept known as chords to extend its capabilities. A chord is a combination of two keys that are pressed simultaneously.
cassette.
*The way you install, start, modify, and view books for Screen Reader/2 is similar to other OS/2 2.1 applications.
*Screen Reader/2 is so flexible, you can even use it with a laptop computer. You can assign the keypad key sequences to your keyboard.
*Screen Reader/2 provides profiles that enable you to work with most of the applications included with OS/2 2.1. It also includes profiles for many popular software programs that work with OS/2, DOS, and Windows 3.1. These profiles are loaded automatically.
*Screen Reader/2 can announce mouse movements and you can use the keypad to simulate mouse functions.
:(1) OS/2 is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation.
:(2) Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.


(C) Copyright 1994
You can now use multiple serial output devices, like a Braille display and a synthesizer.


Copyright International Business Machines Corporation. All rights
In addition, if you have Screen Reader/2, Version 1.0, you will notice that there are additional profiles and "seamless" Windows support in Screen Reader/2, Version 1.1.
reserved.


Note to U.S. Government Users -- Documentation related to restricted
If you are a DOS user, you will find we have added new profiles for WordPerfect 5.1, Quicken 6.0, Lotus 1-2-3, and BookManager/Read.
rights -- Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.


==Introducing Screen Magnifier/2==
==Screen Reader/2 Documentation==
Screen Magnifier(*) /2 Version 1.2 is an IBM(*) software product that
The documentation that accompanies Screen Reader/2 includes a printed book, online books, cassettes, and two Reference Cards printed in Braille.
magnifies applications running on the OS/2(*) 2.1 Desktop.  Screen
Magnifier/2 requires no special hardware and can be used with software
applications that run in OS/2, DOS, and Win-OS/2 windows (but not full-screen
sessions).


Here are some Screen Magnifier/2 features:
Getting Started provides step-by-step instructions for installing Screen Reader/2. In addition, Getting Started contains the Screen Reader/2 tutorial.


    Screen Magnifier/2 magnifies the OS/2 Desktop (and applications running
The tutorial teaches you the basic keypad key sequences as well as how to use Screen Reader/2 with your OS/2 Desktop. You learn how to find the Independence Series and Screen Reader/2 folders on your desktop and you learn how to use the Screen Reader/2 online books. Be sure to complete the tutorial before proceeding with the User's Guide.
on the Desktop) from 2 times normal size to 32 times.


    Focus tracking makes the mouse pointer automatically move to the current
Getting Started is available in print and on cassettes.
area of interest.


    You can reverse screen colors for better contrast.
The User's Guide builds on the functions you learned in the tutorial and describes Screen Reader/2's advanced features. You learn about:
* Views, viewports, and column viewer.
* Autospeaks for application profiles.
* Edit functions.
* Pop-up keypad.
* Profile tiers.
* Key sequences.
In addition to the above, you also learn how to customize Screen Reader/2 to suit your environment and your preferences.


    Screen Magnifier/2 provides two ways of showing what area of the Desktop
The User's Guide is only available as an online book.
is magnified.
There is also a Reference Card in Braille that contains a complete listing of all Screen Reader/2 key sequences and their functions.


    You can turn dithering on and off to make viewing the screen at higher
The PAL Reference explains the syntax of the Profile Access Language (PAL) for those who want to modify Screen Reader/2 profiles. Refer to the PAL Reference for information that helps you write your own application-specific profiles or change the profiles included in the package. The PAL Reference is available only as an online book.
magnifications easier.


    You can turn off magnification temporarily.
The online OS/2 Keys book lists all the OS/2 keys you can use to navigate the OS/2 system, windows, help, and online books. It is also provided as a Reference Card printed in Braille.


    Screen Magnifier/2 provides a reading function.
==OS/2 Desktop==
The OS/2 Desktop contains graphical representations of the objects you use to perform your computer tasks. For most applications running under OS/2, the Desktop remains in the background. Unlike other applications you encounter, the default OS/2 Desktop does not contain a title, cannot be minimized or maximized, and, because it is in the background, it can be covered up by other active windows.


==Screen Magnifier/2 Terminology==
When you install Screen Reader/2, however, it changes the appearance of the Desktop so that it looks like other application folders. (It now has a title and can be maximized and minimized.) Screen Reader/2 also makes it easier for blind or visually impaired users to navigate OS/2.  When OS/2 is installed, the icons are not arranged in any particular order. When you install Screen Reader/2, it changes the OS/2 Desktop to the flowed-icon format. This means that the icons are arranged so that the Home key moves the selector to the first object, the End key moves it to the last object, and the arrow keys move it in the corresponding directions.


Here are some terms that are used frequently with Screen Magnifier/2.
RESTORING THE ORIGINAL DESKTOP:


FOCUS                    The area where the current interest is on the
If you prefer to use the Desktop that was installed with OS/2, follow these steps:
Desktop.  For example, if you are editing a file,
#At an OS/2 command prompt, type cd \srd22 and press ENTER to switch to the Screen Reader/2 subdirectory.
the focus is on the window containing the text for
#Type os2desk and press ENTER.
that file; if a dialog box is displayed, the focus
#Use CHORD 7 8 THEN C to display the Desktop pop-up menu, then select Shut down.
changes to a control (such as a pushbutton or a menu
#Reboot your computer.
item) in the dialog box.


FOCUS TRACKING          The ability of Screen Magnifier/2 to follow the
NOTE: If you have a non-IBM computer, this procedure may not work for you. You should use the Window List to open the Desktop. Then press CTRL + \ to make sure no object is selected. Press SHIFT + F10 to display the Desktop pop-up menu, then select Shut down.
focus on the Desktop. When the focus changes,
Screen Magnifier/2 changes the magnified view to the
new area of interest.


VIEW                    The magnified area with which you are currently
When you start your computer again, the OS/2 Desktop will be restored and will be in the background, full-screen, and without a title. However, it will remain in a flowed format.
working.  When you use the mouse to move around on
the Desktop, the view moves with the mouse pointer.
(Sometimes referred to as Screen Magnifier/2 view or
magnified view.)


DITHERING                The process by which a computer creates colors it
RESTORING THE SCREEN READER/2 DESKTOP:
cannot ordinarily display.  For example, most
computers cannot display pink; therefore, pink is
created by alternating red and white pixels.


RELATIVE-POSITION MARKER A flashing, reverse-video box that indicates where
Having tried the original OS/2 Desktop, you may decide that Screen Reader/2's desktop is better after all. To restore it, follow these steps:
the current area of focus is in relation to the
#At an OS/2 command prompt, type cd \srd22 and press ENTER.
Desktop as a whole.
#Type srd2desk and press ENTER.
#Use CHORD 7 8 THEN C to display the Desktop pop-up menu, then select Shut down.
#Reboot your computer.


(*) Trademark of International
NOTE: If you have a non-IBM computer, this procedure may not work for you. You should use the Window List to open the Desktop. Then press CTRL + \ to make sure no object is selected. Press SHIFT + F10 to display the Desktop pop-up menu, then select Shut down.
Business Machines Corporation


==Installing Screen Magnifier/2==
When you start your computer again, the Screen Reader/2 desktop will be displayed.
This section contains information on the following topics:


    Pre-installation considerations
USING PRESENTATION MANAGER


    Installation instructions
Presentation Manager (PM) is the visual component of OS/2 that presents, in windows, a graphics-based interface to programs installed and running in OS/2.


    Screen Magnifier/2 startup procedure
Whenever the Presentation Manager active window changes, the Screen Reader/2 view changes and Screen Reader/2 announces the new window title, selector, or static text.
Static text is text associated with a control (such as an entry field) or a group of controls. If a selector, or highlighted item, moves, Screen Reader/2 announces the contents of the new selector. When Screen Reader/2 detects other Presentation Manager focus changes, it
announces them. For example, Screen Reader/2 reads an entry field and its prompt, whether a check box is checked or not, and any changes in spin button values.


    Calibration information
PRESENTATION MANAGER KEY SEQUENCES:


You should read this section thoroughly before beginning the Screen
NOTE: Below, and throughout the entire library of online Screen Reader/2 books, each key sequence presented in a list is ended by a period. This is done to force the synthesizer to pause after the key sequence is spoken. Disregard this period if you hear it.
Magnifier/2 installation procedure.


==Pre-Installation Considerations==
CHORD 7 8 THEN 8. The "Where Am I?" key sequence.
Announces the window title and the program name. You hear the following:
#The title that is on the title bar of the application window.
#The name of the program that is running.
#The type of application that is running:
#:P M (for Presentation Manager).
#:DOS full screen (for DOS).
#:OS/2 full screen (for OS/2).
#:Text window (for OS/2 and DOS windows).
#:Seamless (Windows program running on the Desktop).


Before installing Screen Magnifier/2, there are several things that you
For example, if you are running the system editor, you would hear:
should consider:


1. Screen Magnifier/2 cannot be installed on a LAN drive or on removable
"System editor E.EXE Presentation Manager."
media.
CHORD 7 9 THEN N. Sets up the Screen Reader/2 switch list by associating the current window with keypad key n. This is useful when you work with a particular window frequently and want to use an "accelerator" to switch to that window quickly.


2.  You must be running OS/2 Version 2.1.  If not, install it now.  Select
NOTE: n can be any keypad key except
VGA as your display mode.
Stop and Help. CHORD 7 9 THEN
STOP cancels the switch; CHORD
7 9 THEN HELP clears all entries in the current switch list.


3.  Your computer must be set to VGA mode.  If it is not, you need to run
From this point on, for the sake of brevity, the STOP key will be referred to as the S key and the HELP key will be referred to as the H key.
Selective Install, switch the display to VGA mode, (even if the display
is an XGA, SVGA, or 8514 display), then restart your system.


To run Selective Install:
:CHORD 7 9 THEN H. Clears the switch list. You are asked to confirm that you want to clear the entries.
:CHORD 8 9 THEN H. Announces the switch-list entries and their assigned keys.
:CHORD 8 9 THEN N. Makes window n the foreground window.
:CHORD 8 9 THEN N is used to switch to the window established by CHORD 7 9 THEN N.
:CHORD 7 8 THEN 7. Announces the window type and type of control at the current Screen Reader/2 pointer position.
:C THEN C.        Announces the cursor line or selector.
:CHORD 7 8 THEN S. Reads static text (text associated with a control or group of controls).
:CHORD 7 8 THEN 9. Displays a list of windows in the current application.
:CHORD 1 2 THEN 4. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the Desktop.
:CHORD 1 2 THEN 5. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the view.
:CHORD 1 2 THEN 6. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the viewport.
:CHORD 1 2 THEN 7. Changes the view up one level to the parent window or the Desktop.
:CHORD 1 2 THEN 8. Resets the view to the focus window.
:CHORD 1 2 THEN 9. Changes the view down one level to a child window.
:CHORD 1 2 THEN C. Changes the view to the next sibling window.
:CHORD 1 2 THEN *. Changes the view to the next OS/2 text window.


aOpen the OS/2 System folder.
:CHORD 1 2 THEN A. Announces vertical scroll-bar information. The scroll-bar information that you hear depends on the program you are usingFor example, for some programs Screen Reader/2 announces the percentage of the scroll bar that remains to be scrolled.
:CHORD 1 2 THEN B. Announces horizontal scroll-bar information.
:CHORD 1 2 THEN H. Reads the description for the highlighted setting in the DOS Settings or Win-OS/2 Settings Notebook.
:CHORD 7 8 THEN D. Toggles drawing noise On or Off.
(Drawing noise is heard when activity is taking place on the screen, such as when a window is being maximized or minimized.) The default is Off.
:CHORD 7 8 THEN C. Displays the Desktop context menu.


b.  Open the System Setup folder.
Autospeaks in the Presentation Manager profile:


c.  Open the Selective Install folder.  You will be prompted to insert
Announce the new title, plus static text or the system menu title, when a view changes.
the appropriate OS/2 diskettes.


If Screen Reader/2 version 1.2 was installed before you ran Selective
Announce when the selector changes.
Install, you must (after running Selective Install) change to the SRD22
directory and enter:


  SRD2SYS d
Announce, in menus, format shortcut keys and if there is a submenu associated with the menu item (indicated by a right arrow). When a menu item is not selectable, you will hear a beep.


Substitute the drive on which Screen Reader/2 version 1.2 is installed
Speak the entry field and prompt.
for "d".


NOTE:  Do not type a colon (:) after the drive letter.
Announce whether check boxes or radio buttons are checked or not.


Before starting the installation procedure for Screen Magnifier/2, you
Announce changes in the entry field of a spin button.
should shut down and reboot your system.


4.  If you are a Screen Reader/2 user, you must use Screen Reader/2 version
Announce changes in the entry field of a combo box.
1.2.  Any earlier version of Screen Reader/2 will cause an installation
error. To avoid this situation, you should obtain the Screen Reader/2
version 1.2 update diskette by calling one of the following numbers:


    1-800-725-7830 - US
Read the description of the highlighted setting in the DOS Settings or Win-OS/2 Settings Notebook.
    1-800-947-5198 - TDD in US
    1-800-465-1234 - Canada
    1-905-316-4095 - TDD in Canada


Install Screen Reader/2 by following the instructions in the package.
When you are using a menu and Screen Reader/2 is set for quiet talking level, Screen Reader/2 does not announce shortcut keys information for menu items. Shortcut keys information is announced for chatty and moderate talking levels. In addition, when a selector is highlighted
while in chatty mode, you will hear three beeps. If the selector is not highlighted, no beeps will be heard.


5.  If you are a Screen Reader/2 user, make sure that Screen Reader/2 is
NOTE: If you are a user of the previous version of Screen Reader/2, you should refer to "Changes to Screen Reader/2, Version 1.0".
running during the Screen Magnifier/2 installation procedure and whenever
you are using Screen Magnifier/2.


NOTE:  For more information about Screen Reader/2, refer to "Using Screen
WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT
Magnifier/2 with Screen Reader/2 Version 1.2" on page 52.


==Installation Instructions==
With OS/2 2.1, you can run OS/2, DOS, and Windows programs on the same desktop, without being concerned about what type of application it is or how it is being accessed.


To install Screen Magnifier/2, do the following:
OS/2 2.1 enables you to run Windows applications on the OS/2 Desktop or on a separate desktop. This ability to run Windows programs alongside OS/2 and DOS windowed programs on the same desktop is known as "seamless Windows."


1. Open an OS/2 full-screen session.
Screen Reader/2 provides access to Windows applications that are running seamlessly on the OS/2 Desktop. In the Windows environment, as in the OS/2 environment, Screen Reader/2 reads entry fields, selectors, action bars, highlights, pushbuttons, menus, and screen prompts
automatically.


2.  Insert the Screen Magnifier/2 diskette into drive A.
Windows applications can be accessed by Screen Reader/2 in the following ways:


3. At the OS/2 prompt, type
1. You can run one Windows program at a time by entering start /win program name at the command prompt in an OS/2 window or full-screen command prompt. Don't forget to substitute the real program name for program name.


a:
NOTE: This method works only if no other Windows programs are running.


Press ENTER to change your default drive to drive A.
2. Within Windows Program Manager, you can select Run, then type in the drive and filename of the program. This method enables you to run more than one Windows program at a time. (If you use Windows regularly, you might prefer this method.)


4Type
3You can migrate your applications to the Windows Programs folder or the WIN-OS/2 Groups folder. Windows applications can be migrated either when you install OS/2 or after installation. This method also enables you to open more than one Windows application at a time.


install d
NOTES:
 
1.  The procedure for migrating Windows applications is described below.
 
2.  Screen Reader/2 does not provide access to Windows programs in a WIN-OS/2 full screen.
 
MIGRATING WINDOWS APPLICATIONS
 
You can migrate your Windows applications to the OS/2 Desktop and launch them from there so that Screen Reader/2 is able to read the applications.
 
NOTE: Screen Reader/2 has no access to Win-OS/2 Full Screen sessions. Do not start your Windows programs using a Win-OS/2 Full Screen session.
 
The OS/2 Migrate Applications utility searches your computer drives for all Windows applications. It then creates a Desktop object which you can select to start your Windows application.
 
If your Windows programs are part of either the Windows Main or Windows Accessories group, OS/2 will migrate them to the Windows Accessories folder. If they are in the Windows Program Manager or any other Windows application, OS/2 will migrate them to the Windows Programs folder on
the OS/2 Desktop.
 
To migrate your Windows applications, do the following:
 
1.  Select the OS/2 System icon.
2.  Select the System Setup icon.
3.  Select the Migrate Applications icon. The Find Programs menu is displayed. This menu appears with the Windows programs option already selected. (The menu can also have DOS and OS/2 applications selected; you might want to deselect these two, using the SPACEBAR, if you do not need them.)
4.  Select the Find button. The Migrate Programs window appears. This window contains all of the Windows applications that OS/2 found.
5.  Using the SPACEBAR, deselect any program that you don't want to migrate.
6.  Select the Migrate button. OS/2 migrates the applications to the OS/2 Desktop in a folder called Windows programs.
 
You can now select any of your Windows applications from this folder.
 
NOTE: Do not change the system colors through the windows control panel because you might impact Screen Reader/2's ability to recognize what it is supposed to read.
 
AUTOSPEAKS, VIEWPORTS, AND COLUMN VIEWER
 
In the tutorial, you learned how to use autospeaks to tell Screen Reader/2 to monitor areas of a text-based, full-screen or windowed session, and to announce when a change in that area occurs.
 
The tutorial also introduced you to viewports. You learned that a viewport is a specific part of a Screen Reader/2 view within which the program confines its reading. The viewport can be, for example, the entire screen or a portion of the screen. You can specify that the viewport be read automatically when you start using it.
 
Column viewer is another important Screen Reader/2 feature. The column-viewer facility enables you to read text or data in columnar format with one key sequence. Column viewer makes it easy to use spreadsheets and other applications that contain a lot of columnar information.
 
The viewport concept is similar to the column-viewer concept in that both enable you to set boundaries within which Screen Reader/2 confines its reading. However, there are two major differences between viewports and the column viewer. First, a viewport uses specific row and
column coordinates as its boundaries, whereas column-viewer boundaries are determined by character strings (the default is two spaces). Second, a viewport restricts all reading commands to the limits of the viewport boundaries, whereas a column view is read with a
special set of key sequences and does not prevent you from reading information outside of the column view with other Screen Reader/2 key sequences.
 
Once you have set up a column, the column viewer automatically sets the boundaries of the column. A set of simple key sequences enables you to read and navigate the column and move from one column to another.
 
The following sections provide additional information about using viewports, autospeaks, and column viewer.
 
AUTOSPEAKS AND VIEWPORTS FOR TEXT SCREENS
 
In a text-based session, you can define viewports using key sequences that start with B. You can use the viewports and autospeaks that you define any time during the session in which you defined them.
 
To use the definitions in future sessions, use key sequence B THEN * to save them.
 
NOTE: You may want to reuse viewport and autospeak numbers in order to discard old ones and create new ones.
 
VIEWAUTO KEY SEQUENCES:
:B THEN A.        Defines viewport 1 through 9.
:B THEN B THEN N.  Makes viewport n the active viewport (n can be any number from 1 to 9).
:B THEN B THEN B.  Sets the viewport to the full view.
:B THEN C.        Sets the bottom-right corner of the viewport.
:B THEN 0.        Defines autospeaks 1 through 9.
:B THEN # THEN N.  Announces the screen coordinates of viewport n or autospeak n.
:B THEN *.        Saves all viewport definitions and autospeak definitions.
:B THEN D THEN N.  Toggles user-defined autospeak n On or Off (n can be any number from 1 to 9).
:B THEN D THEN B.  Turns off all active autospeaks.
 
COLUMN VIEWER
 
It is easy to define columns and read them using the column-viewer feature. To start reading columns with the column viewer, move the pointer or cursor to any data in the column you want to read and press CHORD B A. The column viewer looks on either side of this data for the
edges of the column. It defines the edge of a column as either the edge of the screen or as two blank spaces.
The default of two blanks can be changed to any character string you like, using the Customization menu.
 
In manual mode, the vertical boundaries of the column are defined simply as the top and bottom of the screen.
However, it is fairly difficult for the column viewer to define the top and bottom of a column in automatic mode.
There are two methods for determining these boundaries in automatic mode.
 
METHOD 1
 
If non-blank characters are used for the left and right
boundaries, the column viewer looks for the first row
that does not have those characters in the same
horizontal positions as the starting row.  The column
viewer stops just before the row that does not contain
the boundary characters in those horizontal positions or
at the edge of the screen, whichever comes first.  You
can move beyond this point with CHORD B 2 or CHORD B 8,
but the column viewer beeps as you do so.  You can adjust
the edge positions to the new boundary conditions with
CHORD B A.
 
METHOD 2
 
If blanks are used as the left and right boundary
markers, it is much harder for the column viewer to
determine when it has reached the top or bottom of a
column.  It tries to divide blocks of information on a
page into separate columns, based on an "appropriate"
amount of blank space around the information.  There
might be times when the column viewer is not accurate,
but these errors will be on the conservative side,
meaning that the column viewer will stop short rather
than go too far.
 
MOVING AROUND IN COLUMNS
 
The only column-viewer reading functions that stop at the
vertical boundaries of a column are:  read from top, go
to top, read to bottom, and go to bottom.  You can move
the column viewer past the top boundary with CHORD B 2
and below the bottom boundary with CHORD B 8.  When you
move the column viewer past a boundary, it will beep at
you.  If the left and right boundary characters are
non-blanks, you can move back into the column view with
CHORD B 2 or CHORD B 8 and it will stop beeping at you.
 
However, if you move beyond a vertical boundary and the
horizontal boundary characters are blanks, the column
viewer will only beep when you first cross the boundary
because it will redefine the vertical boundaries based on
the new position.  In this case, CHORD B 2 or CHORD B 8
may not take you back to where you were.  CHORD B * is
provided to help you retrace your steps if you want to
return to the previous column view.
 
As you move around the screen, up and down the columns
and from one column to another, you will hear beeps that
help you understand how much the column viewer is moving.
If you are in pointer mode, the pointer follows the
column viewer as you navigate through the columns.
 
NOTE:  The column-viewer feature only works in
full-screen or window text sessions; you cannot
use it with Presentation Manager or Windows
applications.
 
COLUMN-VIEWER KEY SEQUENCES
 
The column viewer uses the following key sequences:
 
B THEN 8.              Announces the location of the
column viewer and how many columns
there are.
B THEN 7.              Announces the position of the left
edge of the column viewer.
B THEN 9.              Announces the position of the
right edge of the column viewer.
 
CHORD B A.            Defines a column and says the
current entry.
CHORD B 0.            Brings up the Customization menu.
CHORD B 1.            Reads from the top of the column
to the current column-viewer
position.
CHORD B 5.            Reads the current column entry.
CHORD B 7.            Reads from the current
column-viewer position down to the
bottom of the column.
CHORD B 2.            Moves the column viewer up one
line and reads the column entry.
CHORD B 8.            Moves the column viewer down one
line and reads the column entry.
CHORD B 4.            Moves the column viewer left one
column and reads the column entry,
or sets the left edge manually,
depending on auto/manual mode
setting.
CHORD B 6.            Moves the column viewer right one
column and reads the column entry,
or sets the right edge manually,
depending on auto/manual mode
setting.
CHORD B 3.            Moves the column viewer to the top
of the column.
CHORD B 9.            Moves the column viewer to the
bottom of the column.
CHORD B *.            Moves the column viewer to the
previous position.  Press this
chord twice to go back 2
positions.
B THEN CHORD B 1.      Moves to column 1.
B THEN CHORD B 2.      Moves to column 2.
B THEN CHORD B 3.      Moves to column 3.
B THEN CHORD B 4.      Moves to column 4.
B THEN CHORD B 5.      Moves to column 5.
B THEN CHORD B 6.      Moves to column 6.
B THEN CHORD B 7.      Moves to column 7.
B THEN CHORD B 8.      Moves to column 8.
B THEN CHORD B 9.      Moves to column 9.
B THEN CHORD B A N.    Reassigns a column number.  For
example, if you find that you
frequently use the eleventh column
on a screen, you might find it
convenient to assign the eleventh
column to B THEN CHORD B 6 for
ease of use.  To reassign this
column, move the pointer to any
word in the eleventh text column
and press B THEN CHORD B A.  You
will be prompted to press a number
between 1 and 9.  Press 6.  You
can now use B THEN CHORD B 6 to
jump to column 11.
 
NOTE:  Key sequences B THEN CHORD
B 1 through B THEN CHORD B
9 are the go-to keys.  If
you want to reset the go-to
keys to their default
functions, use CHORD B 0 to
hear the Customization
menu, then choose option 4.
 
CUSTOMIZATION MENU
 
When you are working with complex screen formats, you
might not be satisfied with the columns established
automatically with the column viewer.  Therefore, the
column viewer provides a manual mode that enables you to
define the left and right edges of your column view at
specific positions.
 
Press CHORD B 0 to use the Customization menu.  This menu
has four options:
 
1.  Cycle auto and manual modes.
2.  Define left and right edge strings.
3.  Report the status of options 1 and 2.
4.  Reset the go-to keys to their defaults.
 
When you are in manual mode, CHORD B A is the only key
sequence that automatically selects column boundaries.
When you press CHORD B A in manual mode, a prompt asks if
you want to use the current edge-string definitions.  If
you press key 2 for "No," you are prompted to define the
characters on the left and right edges.  In manual mode,
CHORD B 4 and CHORD B 6 are used to define the left and
right edges, respectively.  (In automatic mode, these
chords are used to move the column viewer left and
right.)
 
The position of these edges will not change under any
circumstance while moving the column view up and down.
Also, you cannot move the column view left or right in
manual mode.
 
The top and bottom of the screen define the top and
bottom of the column while in manual mode.
 
The last option on the Customization menu is used to
reset all of the column assignments you made with key
sequence B THEN CHORD B A.
 
NOTE:  For detailed information on the column-viewer
feature, refer to the "User Interface" section of
the SMARTCOL.KPD file in the \SRD22 directory.
 
EDIT FACILITY
 
The edit facility enables Screen Reader/2 to announce
text automatically, based on cursor movements.  It has
two main functions, browsing and echoing, each with
several modes.  In addition, there are several related
options and switches.
 
Browsing is used primarily for reading.  The browse
modes, Line Browse and Column Browse, enable you to hear
the character, word, or line at the cursor, depending on
how the cursor has moved and which mode is active.  Only
one browse mode may be active at a time.
 
Echoing is used primarily for writing.  The echo modes
announce what you just typed, character by character, one
word at a time, or line by line.  Multiple echo modes may
be active simultaneously.
 
NOTE:  Only Character Echo is available while typing or
moving the cursor outside the viewport; all other
browse and echo modes remain inactive until the
cursor returns inside the viewport.
 
Several edit switches and options are also available.
These options enable you to do the following:
 
1.  Stop unwanted verbalization.
 
2.  Add margin alerts.
 
3.  Modify the response to the BACKSPACE and DELETE keys.
 
4.  Modify the delete look-ahead feature.
 
5.  Turn function-key processing On or Off.
 
6.  Set the browse talking level.
 
7.  Disable or enable the edit facility for individual
controls.
 
8.  Hear the current selection of active edit functions.
 
9.  Toggle the current edit selection On or Off.
 
10. Turn on edit defaults.
 
All edit facility functions start with the D key or with
a chord containing the D key.
 
NOTE:  The edit facility is not available in DOS
full-screen sessions.
 
BROWSES
 
This section discusses the Line Browse and Column Browse
key sequences and functions.
 
LINE BROWSE
 
D THEN *. Toggles Line Browse On or Off.
 
Each time you move the cursor when Line Browse
is on, Screen Reader/2 reads the character, the
word, or the line at the cursor, depending on
which direction you move the cursor.
 
If you move the cursor horizontally character
by character, Screen Reader/2 reads the new
character at the cursor after each movement.
 
If an application allows you to move
horizontally a word at a time (for example,
using CTRL+RIGHT ARROW or CTRL+LEFT ARROW),
Screen Reader/2 reads the new word at the
cursor after each movement.
 
If you move the cursor vertically or
diagonally, Screen Reader/2 reads the new
cursor line after each movement.  If the cursor
movement causes the text to scroll vertically,
you may experience a slight delay before Line
Browse reads the new line to you.
 
Line Browse responds also to character
deletions using the BACKSPACE and DELETE keys.
 
NOTE:  When Line Browse is activated, Column
Browse is automatically turned off.
 
COLUMN BROWSE
 
D THEN 0. Toggles Column Browse On or Off.
 
Column Browse is almost identical to Line
Browse except that if you move vertically or
diagonally, instead of reading lines, it reads
the word or the partial word, starting at the
cursor position.  This feature was designed
primarily for text that is formatted in
columns.  Column Browse works best with
monospaced fonts.
 
If the cursor movement causes the text to
scroll vertically, you may experience a slight
delay before Column Browse reads the new word
to you.
 
NOTE:  When Column Browse is activated, Line
Browse is automatically turned off.
 
ECHOES
 
This section discusses the echo functions: Character,
Word, and Line.
 
CHARACTER ECHO
 
D THEN 7. Toggles Character Echo On or Off.
 
With Character Echo On, Screen Reader/2
announces each printable character immediately
after you type it.  Screen Reader/2 does not
announce non-printable characters such as TAB
or ENTER.
 
Character Echo also responds to character
deletions using the BACKSPACE and DELETE keys.
 
WORD ECHO
 
D THEN 8. Toggles Word Echo On or Off.
 
With Word Echo On, Screen Reader/2 announces a
complete word.  Screen Reader/2 uses a press of
any of these keys: SPACEBAR, TAB, ENTER or any
of the directional arrow keys to delimit a
word.
 
Word Echo also responds to character deletions
using the BACKSPACE and DELETE keys.
 
LINE ECHO
 
D THEN 9. Toggles Line Echo On or Off.
 
With Line Echo On, Screen Reader/2 reads the
line just typed as soon as the cursor moves to
a different line.
 
EDIT SWITCHES AND OPTIONS
 
This section discusses the switches and options available
with the edit facility:
 
Flush.
Edit Status.
Edit Selection.
Edit Defaults.
Margin Alerts.
 
Edit Status.
Character-Deletion Feedback.
Function Keys On or Off.
Toggle Edit for Controls.
Browse Talking Level.
 
FLUSH
 
D THEN B. Toggles Flush On or Off.
 
When you move the cursor with Flush On, the
text being spoken is stopped as soon as the
movement is complete and immediately before
Screen Reader/2 verbalizes the text at the new
position.  Flush is active only when a browse
or echo mode is turned on.
 
For example, if you are browsing a document for
a certain line, you may peruse the text line by
line, using the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys
with Line Browse turned on.  When Flush is Off,
each time you move down one line, you must
listen to the entire line before you can listen
to the next one.  With Flush On, when you
recognize that the line is not the one you
want, you can move the cursor to the next line.
Screen Reader/2 immediately stops reading the
previous line so you may hear the current line
without delay.  The default is Flush Off.
 
EDIT STATUS
 
D THEN C. Announces the currently active browse and echo
modes, as well as the status of related
switches.
 
EDIT SELECTION ON OR OFF
 
D THEN #. Toggles current selections.
 
Turns On or Off all current browse and echo
modes.
 
EDIT DEFAULTS
 
D THEN D. Switches to the default edit facility, turning
Line Browse On, echoes Off, and Flush On.
 
MARGIN ALERTS
 
You can monitor the progress of the cursor across the
text-editing area with a variety of edit facility beeps
and verbal cues.  This section discusses how to select a
margin alert and how to set the boundary or starting
position.
 
NOTE:  This feature is available only if browse mode or
echo mode is turned on.
 
Alert Types
 
CHORD D 8.  Cycles through alert types:
 
Simple alert: A single beep when the
threshold position is crossed.
 
Multiple alerts: A beep when the
threshold position is crossed and every
five characters to the right of it.
Beeps are more frequent if there are less
than twenty characters left from the
threshold position to the end of the
line.  The edit facility will attempt to
beep at least five times per line.
 
Composite alerts: A beep and a verbal cue
when the threshold position is crossed
and every five characters to the right of
it.  The verbal cue announces the current
cursor position.  Alerts are more
frequent if there are less than twenty
characters left from the margin to the
end of the line.  The edit facility will
attempt to issue an alert at least five
times per line.
 
No alerts.
 
NOTE:  The default is no alerts.  The default alert
margin is at the 60th character position.
 
Move Margin Alert to the Left
 
CHORD D 7.  Shifts the margin alert to the left by one character. For example, if the margin alert is at its default setting of the 60th character, pressing this key sequence resets
it to the 59th character.
 
Move Margin Alert to the Right
 
CHORD D 9.  Shifts the margin alert to the right by one character.  For example, if the margin alert is at its default setting of the 60th character, pressing this key sequence resets
it to the 61st character.
 
CHARACTER-DELETION FEEDBACK
 
Echo modes respond to character deletions by echoing characters, partial words, or complete words. This section discusses how to use and customize this feature.
 
Deletion-Feedback Types
 
CHORD D C THEN 7.  Cycles through deletion-feedback types.
 
When you use the DELETE key or the destructive BACKSPACE key in conjunction with echoes, you can choose one of the following three types of feedback:
 
The DELETE key echoes the new character at the cursor position.
The destructive BACKSPACE key echoes the character being removed.
 
The DELETE key echoes a partial word starting at the cursor position. The destructive BACKSPACE key echoes the character being removed.
 
The DELETE and destructive BACKSPACE keys echo the whole word at the cursor.
 
The default is for the DELETE key to echo the new character at the cursor and for the destructive BACKSPACE key to echo the character being removed.
 
NOTE:  Deletion feedback is not available if Line Echo is the only active echo mode and no
browses are active.
 
Cycle Length of Deletion Look-Ahead
 
CHORD D C THEN 9.  Cycles through lengths of the deletion look-ahead (3 through 20).
 
If a line contains repeating characters and you delete several, Screen Reader/2 may not be able to detect that characters were deleted, because the character at the cursor position does not change. For example, if a line contains nine asterisks and you delete five, the character at the cursor position is still an asterisk. However, Screen Reader/2 provides a deletion
look-ahead feature. You can set the number of characters that you want Screen Reader/2 to look ahead. This number can be from 3 to 20; the default length of the deletion look-ahead is 3.  When you set the look-ahead size, Screen Reader/2 looks ahead that number of characters to see if text has changed. Thus, it can detect that characters were deleted.
 
Announce Length of Deletion Look-Ahead
 
CHORD D C THEN 8.  Announces the length of the deletion look-ahead.
 
FUNCTION KEYS ON OR OFF
 
CHORD D C THEN C.  Toggles function-keys processing On or Off.
 
By using this feature, you can decide whether browse modes ignore function-key combinations or process them like other keys. When function-keys processing is turned Off, the edit facility ignores cursor movements caused by function-key combinations. When it is on, the edit facility processes cursor movements caused by function-key presses. Screen Reader/2 will speak according to the rules of echo and browse modes. The default is Off.
 
TOGGLE EDIT FOR CONTROLS
 
CHORD D C THEN O.  Enables and disables the edit facility for controls.
 
If you are navigating menus, notebooks, and other controls with a browse mode turned on, you might encounter a situation in which both the Presentation Manager profile and the edit facility are talking at the same time. To avoid this, place the cursor at the location where the duplicate verbalization is occurring and press CHORD D C THEN 0. This toggles the edit facility off for that control only.
 
If, on the other hand, you find that the edit facility is quiet when you would expect it to work, place the cursor on the control in question and press CHORD D C THEN 0. This activates the edit facility for that control and the control will now be read whenever the cursor travels over it.
 
You can have a maximum of 128 controls active at one time. If you try to add more than that, Screen Reader/2 announces that the list is full, removes the last control from the list, and adds the current one.
 
BROWSE TALKING LEVEL
 
CHORD D C THEN D.  Toggles the browse talking level.
 
There are two talking levels available in browse modes: moderate and chatty. Moderate is the default.
 
When the browse talking level is set to moderate, Screen Reader/2 reads text only when a cursor movement is directly caused by a key press. As a result, when a single key press causes a series of cursor movements, Screen Reader/2 might not read the line the cursor is on at the end of the process. For example, when you press ENTER in a 3270 terminal-emulation session, the
cursor can move through a number of screen refreshes before it finally comes to rest.  In the moderate browse talking level, Screen Reader/2 will read the result of the first cursor movement, which may be a blank, but nothing after that.
 
When the browse talking level is set
to chatty, verbalization is triggered
by all cursor movements, even when
these are not directly caused by a
key press.  You may find chatty
browse level especially helpful in a
3270 terminal-emulation session.
 
SAVING YOUR SETTINGS
 
You can use the edit facility settings that you define
any time during the session in which you defined them.
However, if you end the session or turn off your
computer, the definitions are erased.
 
To save your edit facility settings for use at another
time, use key sequence B THEN *.  Refer to the section
"Saving Your Screen Reader/2 Settings" for more
information on this topic.
 
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
 
Screen Reader/2 provides you with many convenient and
helpful features.  The tutorial introduced you to the
primary functions; the following sections discuss
functions that will help you to work more productively.
You may not need these functions when you first start
using Screen Reader/2, but they can be useful as you
become more proficient in using the system.
 
ADVANCED READING KEY SEQUENCES
 
The following sections discuss key sequences that make Screen Reader/2 read the screen for you:
 
Characters.
First, Middle, and Last Word.
Rest of a Word.
Rest of a Line.
Sentences.
Current Paragraph.
Read Fields.
Format Shortcuts.
 
CHARACTERS
 
0 THEN 7. Reads the character in the line above the current cursor or pointer location.
0 THEN 9. Reads the character in the line below the current cursor or pointer location.
 
FIRST, MIDDLE, AND LAST WORD
 
B THEN 1. Reads the first word of the current line.
B THEN 2. Reads the middle word of the current line.
B THEN 3. Reads the last word of the current line.
 
THE REST OF A WORD
 
Screen Reader/2 enables you to read the rest of the
current word, as well as the rest of the word directly
above and below it.  This function is useful when you
work with columns of information.
 
B THEN 4. Reads the rest of the word above the current
cursor or pointer location.
B THEN 5. Reads the rest of the word at the current
cursor or pointer location.
 
B THEN 6. Reads the rest of the word below the current
cursor or pointer location.
 
THE REST OF A LINE
 
0 THEN C. Reads from the current cursor or pointer
location to the end of the line.
 
SENTENCES
 
You can read complete sentences with Screen Reader/2.
The definition of a Screen Reader/2 sentence is:
 
It ends with a period, question mark, or exclamation
mark, and can be preceded and followed by a single or
double quote.
 
It must be preceded by another complete sentence, a
blank line, or the top of the viewport.  It also must
be followed by another sentence, a blank line, or the
bottom of the viewport.
 
Its ending punctuation is followed by either one or
two spaces, as defined with key sequence CHORD D 2.
(Screen Reader/2 treats multiple spaces in
Presentation Manager applications as single spaces).
 
D THEN 1.  Reads the previous sentence.
D THEN 2.  Reads the current sentence.
D THEN 3.  Reads the next sentence.
CHORD D 2.  Toggles between one and two spaces as part of
the definition of the end of a sentence.  The
default is two spaces.
 
NOTE:  A blank line, the screen top, or the screen bottom
also signal the beginning or ending of a sentence.
 
CURRENT PARAGRAPH
 
A paragraph is any text between two blank lines or
between a window boundary (top or bottom) and a blank
line.
 
D THEN A. Reads the current paragraph.
 
READ FIELDS
 
A field is a contiguous area of the display with the same attributes. An attribute determines how an item appears on the screen, such as color, font, underlining, blinking, and so forth.  Therefore, a field can be one character, several characters, a line, several lines, or an entire screen.
 
Using Screen Reader/2, you can read the previous, current, and next fields, and the rest of the current field. You can also specify the characteristics that Screen Reader/2 uses to determine a field. The first four key sequences, * THEN 1, * THEN 2, * THEN 3, and * THEN A, are useful, for example, for reading menus that ask for input into highlighted fields.
 
Use key sequences * THEN H and CHORD * H to change the way Screen Reader/2 defines a field.  You can specify that Screen Reader/2 uses only the background color, only the foreground color, both foreground and background colors, or no color when it determines a field. (You
should specify no color if you only want to use font information.)
 
For example, if an application has a menu on which the choices all appear with the same background color, but the first letter of each choice is a different color, you can set the field definition to background. In this case, Screen Reader/2 reads the entire word as a field
rather than considering the first letter and the rest of the word as separate fields.
 
You can also ask Screen Reader/2 to include font changes in the field definition. A font is the style of letters used to display information. Usually, a document will be displayed all in one font, such as Helvetica, Courier, or Bookman. A different font might be used within a
document to draw attention to a particular character or word.
 
The default field definition is the mixture of attributes (foreground and background) with font changes ignored.
 
The previous, current, and next fields are relative to the cursor or pointer location for the following key sequences:
* THEN 1.  Reads the previous field.
* THEN 2.  Reads the current field.
* THEN 3.  Reads the next field.
* THEN A.  Reads the rest of the current field.
* THEN H.  Cycles through the field definitions:
foreground, background, both, or neither.
CHORD * A.  Announces the font definition of the current
character.
CHORD * H.  Toggles between font changes not defining a
new field (the default) and defining a new
field.
 
FORMAT SHORTCUTS
 
The following key sequences are reading shortcuts. They save time because you do not have to switch from your active format to the spell or phonetic format and then switch back; Screen Reader/2 does it for you automatically.
 
For example, if you are using text format to read, pressing * THEN 5 spells the word at the current pointer or cursor position, then Screen Reader/2 switches back to text format.
 
SPELLING SHORTCUTS
 
The following key sequences enable you to spell words quickly:
* THEN 4.  Spells the previous word.
* THEN 5.  Spells the current word.
* THEN 6.  Spells the next word.
* THEN B.  Spells the current word with capital letters announced.
 
PHONETIC SHORTCUTS
 
When you have trouble understanding a particular character or word, you can use the phonetic shortcut keys to help you determine what the synthesizer is saying.
 
The phonetic alphabet uses a word beginning with the same letter to represent each character in our regular alphabet.
 
PHONETIC ALPHABET
Alpha        | Bravo        | Charlie      | Delta
Echo        | Foxtrot      | Golf        | Hotel
India        | Juliet      | Kilo        | Lima
Mike        | November    | Oscar        | Papa
Quebec      | Romeo        | Sierra      | Tango
Uniform      | Victor      | Whiskey      | X-ray
Yankee      | Zulu
 
You can use key sequence * THEN D to switch to the phonetic format, or use the following key sequences to hear a phonetic representation of just the previous, current, and next characters.
 
* THEN 7.  Spells the previous character using the phonetic alphabet.
* THEN 8.  Spells the current character using the phonetic alphabet.
* THEN 9.  Spells the next character using the phonetic alphabet.
 
ANNOUNCING VALUES
 
This section discusses key sequences that announce the following values:
 
ASCII Character Value.
Color of Character.
Icons.
Text Attributes.
 
ASCII CHARACTER VALUE
 
* THEN C. Announces the ASCII value of the current
character.
 
COLOR OF CHARACTER
 
0 THEN 8. Announces the color of the character at the
current cursor or pointer location.


Substitute the drive on which you want to install Screen Magnifier/2 for
Screen Reader/2 tells you the foreground color, then the
"d".
background color of the current character.  For example,
Screen Reader/2 might say, "White on black."


NOTE:  Do not type a colon (:) after the drive letter.
ICONS


5Press ENTER.
You can choose the way Screen Reader/2 announces icons
which are the pictures that represent the items you want
to work with, such as application programs, data files,
and printersThis function is called Icon Scanning.


From this point on, you will hear audio tones and prompts associated with
You can set Icon Scanning to read all icons, the icons it
the installation procedure.
knows (or recognizes), or no icons.  You may also change
the name of an icon or give an unknown icon a name.


INFORMATIONAL TONES
The following key sequences are used to change the way
that icons on your screen are announced:


These tones alert you to important stages of the installation processThey
CHORD D *.  Toggles the announcing of icons to All,
do not indicate that an error has occurred.
Known, or Not Speaking Icons.  If set to All,
and an icon is not known by Screen Reader/2,
you hear only "icon."  If set to Known, and
an icon is recognized by Screen Reader/2 you
hear the icon nameIf set to Not Speaking
Icons, and an icon is not known by Screen
Reader/2, you hear only "blank."
CHORD D 0.  Announces the current status of icon speaking
(All, Known, or Not Speaking Icons).
CHORD D #.  Associates a text string with the current
icon to identify it.


1 LONG BEEP:
TEXT ATTRIBUTES


NOTE: If you entered a valid drive letter in step 4 on page 6, you will not
Screen Reader/2 can announce the appearance of text as it
hear this tone.
is reading the screen. It can describe capitalization,
color, and font information.


Press ENTER to install Screen Magnifier/2 to drive C.  If you are installing
Screen Reader/2 announces capitalization when you turn
to a drive other than C, type the letter of the drive now and press ENTER.
Caps Scan On with CHORD A 4.  Here's how it works.  If
Caps Scan is On, Screen Reader/2 announces capital
letters or mixed case as it reads.  For example, if a
word contains one capital letter, Screen Reader/2
announces "Caps" followed by the word.  If a word
contains a combination of capital and lower-case letters
Screen Reader/2 announces "Mixed" followed by the word.
The default for Caps Scan is Off.


1 SHORT BEEP means installation was successful.
Screen Reader/2 can announce colors as it is reading the
screen.  For example, many editors use white on dark blue
as the default.  If you set Color Scan On, by using CHORD
0 8, you hear those colors announced if they are changed.
You can set Color Scan Off to stop hearing the colors
announced.  You can move the cursor or pointer (depending
on which mode you are in) to a place on the screen where
the default color is displayed and press CHORD 0 7.  This
key sequence sets the default color.  The next time you
highlight text, such as with bold or underline, the
editor will (for most programs) change the color of the
highlighted text and announce the new color.  The default
for Color Scan is Off.


After installation is complete, do the following:
Screen Reader/2 announces font changes when you turn Font
Scan On with CHORD 0 2.  Here's how it works.  If Font
Scan is On, Screen Reader/2 scans for font changes in
Presentation Manager and Windows applications.  If you
change a font or type style, Screen Reader/2 announces
that change.  If you change a point size you hear the
point size of each character.  The default for Font Scan
is Off.


1.  Remove the installation diskette from drive A.
Key sequences used for scanning:


2Close the OS/2 full-screen session by entering:
CHORD 0 7.  Toggles setting and clearing the default
color.
CHORD 0 8.  Toggles Color Scan On or Off.
CHORD A 3Announces the status for scan.
CHORD A 4.  Toggles Caps Scan On or Off.
CHORD A 7.  Cycles through mixed case handling:
Says cap before each capital letter.
Says mixed and cap.
Says cap only to separate words.
Says mixed only (default)
CHORD * 2.  Toggles Font Scan On or Off.


exit
IGNORING CHARACTERS


3Shut down your computer(Refer to "Shutting Down Your Computer" for
You can instruct Screen Reader/2 to ignore characters on
information on this procedure.)
the screenIgnoring characters is useful, for example,
when a program uses a line of equals signs as a boundary
between sectionsAn ignored character is treated as a
blank.


4Restart your computer.
# THEN H.  Starts ignoring characters you specify.
CHORD # H.  Stops ignoring characters you specify.
CHORD # SStops ignoring all characters previously
specified.


INSTALLATION ERRORS
After pressing key sequence # THEN H or CHORD # H, type
the characters (without any spaces between them) that you
want Screen Reader/2 to start or stop ignoring, and then
press ENTER.


During installation, if you hear a long, low tone followed by three short
MOUSE SIMULATION
beeps, an error has occurred.  There are several errors possible; the
appropriate error message is displayed on the screen.


Shutting Down Your Computer
Screen Reader/2 can simulate the actions of a mouse, and
announce the status of mouse toggles and the window
containing the mouse pointer.


To shut down your computer, use the following procedure.
Key sequences used for mouse movement are:
(If you are a Screen Reader/2 user, follow the instructions provided in
"Screen Reader/2 Shutdown Procedure" on page 52.)


1. From the OS/2 Desktop, display the OS/2 Desktop menu by clicking mouse
CHORD 2 3 THEN 1.   Toggles moving the mouse to follow
the Screen Reader/2 pointer On or
Off.
CHORD 2 3 THEN 3.  Toggles mouse tracking On or Off
(described following this list).
CHORD 2 3 THEN 4.  Simulates a single click on mouse
button 1.
CHORD 2 3 THEN 5.  Simulates a double click on mouse
button 1.
CHORD 2 3 THEN 6.  Simulates a single click on mouse
button 2.
button 2.
CHORD 2 3 THEN 8.  Announces the window containing the
mouse pointer.
CHORD 2 3 THEN A.  Moves the mouse pointer to the Screen
Reader/2 pointer.
CHORD 2 3 THEN C.  Cycles through the following three
mouse movements:
Horizontal mouse movement only.
Vertical mouse movement only.
Both vertical and horizontal
mouse movement.  (This is the
default.)
CHORD 2 3 THEN H.  Announces the status of mouse
settings (mouse movement with
pointer, mouse tracking, and mouse
movement settings).
When mouse tracking is On, speech occurs when the mouse
pointer moves to new text, over an icon for a minimized
application, or over a title.  The click-key sequences of
the mouse button perform the action where the mouse
pointer is located.  If mouse tracking is Off, the mouse
pointer moves to the Screen Reader/2 pointer and the
clicking action is performed.  The mouse-tracking default
is Off.
When mouse movement with the Screen Reader/2 pointer is
On, the mouse pointer moves to the location of what you
are hearing when the pointer changes.  The default is
Off.
NOTE:  You must have a mouse installed to use the mouse
key sequences.
MOVING THE POINTER
In the tutorial, you learned to move the pointer by
reading characters, words, and lines; by moving the
pointer to the cursor; and by reading specific lines.
Three ways to move the pointer directly to specific areas
of the view follow:
0 THEN D. Moves the pointer to the right edge of the view
at the current line.
0 THEN #. Moves the pointer to the bottom-left corner of
the view.
0 THEN *. Moves the pointer to the top-left corner of the
view.
SEARCHING BACKWARDS
In the tutorial, you learned how to search forward for a
string of characters from the top of the view by using
key sequences # THEN 1, # THEN 2, and # THEN 3.  You can
also search backward for a string from the bottom of the
view by using the following chords.
CHORD # 1.  Searches backward for a string from the
bottom of the view.  You are prompted to
enter the string to be found.
CHORD # 2.  Continues backward search.
CHORD # 3.  Searches backward for the same string from
the bottom of the view.  (If you have changed
pages, this chord searches from the bottom of
the new view.)
SETTING SWITCHES
Screen Reader/2 contains several "switches" that you can
turn On or Off for the following features:
A THEN 4.  Caps.
A THEN 5.  Spaces.
A THEN 6.  Dictionary.
A THEN 7.  Pause.
A THEN 8.  Wrap.
A THEN 9.  Numbering.
A THEN 0.  ForceSpell.
A THEN B.  Graphics.
A THEN #.  Status of switches (On or Off).
A THEN *.  KeyEcho.
* THEN B.  Spell current word with capitals.
# THEN B.  Keyboard lock-key status.
CHORD A 0.  SpellCaps.
CHORD A 6.  Trailing.
CAPS
A THEN 4. Toggles Caps On or Off.
The Caps switch setting tells Screen Reader/2 what to do
when it spells a word containing capital letters.  With
Caps On, capital letters are preceded by the word cap.
Caps Off is the default; all characters are treated as
lowercase.
SPACES
A THEN 5. Toggles Spaces On or Off.
The Spaces switch setting tells Screen Reader/2 whether
or not to announce spaces when you are in spell,
phonetic, or pronounce formats.
The default number of spaces to be announced between
words is one or more.  You can change this default by
using CHORD A 5 THEN N.  n is the number of spaces that
you want Screen Reader/2 to announce between words.
Fewer than n are not announced.  Refer to the description
of Trailing in this section.
Spaces Off is the default.
DICTIONARY
A THEN 6. Toggles Dictionary On or Off.
If you would like certain words to be read differently
from the way the synthesizer currently says them, you can
add, to the Screen Reader/2 dictionary, these words and
the replacement words that you want Screen Reader/2 to
read.  With Dictionary On in text or pronounce formats,
Screen Reader/2 looks in the dictionary for alphabetic
parts of words.  If it finds a word, it sends the
dictionary-replacement word to the synthesizer.
For example, OS (for Operating System) is included in
your dictionary list of words.  Because your synthesizer
might read it as "OZ," the replacement word "O S"
provides the correct pronunciation to be used.
You can add your own words to the list, delete words, or
change them by using the Screen Reader/2 Message Settings
notebook.
Dictionary On is the default.
GRAPHICS
A THEN B. Toggles Graphics On or Off.
The Graphics switch tells Screen Reader/2 how to treat
box characters.
When Graphics is On and text (including box characters)
is spoken, Screen Reader/2 announces the name of the box
character.
Graphics Off is the default.
PAUSE
A THEN 7. Toggles Pause On or Off.
The Pause switch setting tells Screen Reader/2 whether or
not to hesitate between words.
Pause Off is the default.
WRAP
A THEN 8. Toggles Wrap On or Off.
When the Wrap switch is On, Screen Reader/2 does not
recognize the right edge of the viewport as the end of a
line.  Instead, it reads from the current position
(cursor or pointer) to the bottom of the viewport.
Wrap Off is the default.
NUMBERING
A THEN 9. Toggles Numbering On or Off.
When Numbering is on, Screen Reader/2 announces the line
number as each line is spoken for the remainder of the
viewport.
Numbering Off is the default.
FORCESPELL
A THEN 0. Toggles ForceSpell On or Off.
The ForceSpell setting causes Screen Reader/2 to either
spell or pronounce a word that has no vowels. When
ForceSpell is On, Screen Reader/2 spells any word without
a vowel. When ForceSpell is Off, these words are spoken.
This switch is important when your synthesizer is reading
numbers or abbreviations. For example, you may want
ForceSpell Off if your synthesizer announces numbers such
as 9600 as ninety-six hundred instead of nine six zero
zero, or if it announces abbreviations such as Mr. as
"mister" instead of "m r dot."
ForceSpell On is the default.
Screen Reader/2 spells the word at the current cursor or
pointer location. When Screen Reader/2 encounters a
capital letter, it prefaces that letter with the word
cap.
SPELLCAPS
CHORD A 0.  Toggles SpellCaps On or Off.
With SpellCaps On, words with all capital letters are
spelled instead of pronounced.
SpellCaps Off is the default.
TRAILING
CHORD A 6.  Toggles Trailing On or Off.
The Trailing switch setting tells Screen Reader/2 whether
or not it should read the characters trailing the end of
a word or line.  Spaces must be On and your format must
be pronounce, spell, or phonetic.
For example, if you request that the OS/2 [C:\] prompt be
read--with Spaces and Trailing On and in spell
format--you hear "left bracket C colon backslash right
bracket awe 75 spaces."
The word-definition setting determines what is considered
"trailing".
Trailing Off is the default.
NOTE:  The word awe signals that a character is repeated
three or more times in succession.  Awe was chosen
because it is a short word and a word that you
probably will not encounter often.  The need for a
word such as awe to denote repetitive characters
can be demonstrated using the "75 spaces" example.
"75 spaces," the text spoken by your synthesizer,
could literally be on the screen.  When you hear
the word awe preceding it, you know that Screen
Reader/2 counted the occurrences of the repetitive
character and is telling you the number.  The word
awe precedes all character repetitions of three or
more, not just when the Trailing switch is On.
KEY ECHO
A THEN *. Toggles Key Echo On or Off.
The Key Echo switch setting tells Screen Reader/2 whether
or not it should echo the key that is pressed.
Key Echo Off is the default.
NOTE:  Key Echo is not available in DOS full-screen
sessions.
STATUS OF SWITCHES
A THEN #. Announces the status of switches.
Screen Reader/2 tells you which switches are not at their
default settings.
WORD-DEFINITION SETTINGS
A THEN C. Cycles through the following word definitions:
Alphabetic.
Alphanumeric.
Nonblank.
In Screen Reader/2, the default definition of a word is a
nonblank string followed by trailing blanks.
To save your Screen Reader/2 switch settings, use B THEN
*.  Refer to Saving Screen Reader/2 Settings for more
information on this topic.
STATUS INFORMATION
Using a keypad key sequence, you can request the status
of the keyboard lock keys and some Screen Reader/2 modes,
formats, cursor and pointer positions, and viewport
boundaries.
LOCK KEYS
# THEN 4. Announces the status of the following keys:
Caps Lock.
Num Lock.
Scroll Lock.
# THEN B. Toggles the announcing of lock status On or
Off.
NOTE:  This feature is not available in full-screen
sessions.
CURRENT FORMAT
# THEN 5. Announces the current format (text, pronounce,
spell, phonetic).
CURRENT VIEWPORT BOUNDARIES
# THEN 6. Announces the current viewport boundaries.
When you are in a text view, you hear the top, left,
bottom, and right row and column settings, in that order.
When you are in a Presentation Manager or seamless
Windows view, you hear bottom, left, top, and right pixel
settings, in that order.
CURRENT MODE AND POSITION
# THEN 9. Announces the current mode (cursor or pointer).
In cursor mode, you hear the location of the cursor; in
pointer mode, you hear the location of the pointer.
CURSOR/POINTER LOCATION
# THEN C. Announces the cursor location (line and
column).
# THEN 8. Announces the pointer location (line and
column).
POP-UP KEYPAD
With the advent of laptop computers, you can take your
work with you when you leave the office.  Now, you can
also take Screen Reader/2 with you!  Screen Reader/2
enables you to set up a pop-up keypad so you can enter
all of the keypad key sequences on your keyboard.
The pop-up keypad is a block of sixteen keys on the
keyboard that corresponds to the Screen Reader/2 keypad.
The pop-up keypad is set up to work on the left side of
your keyboard, but you can set up the keys on the right
side of your keyboard, if you prefer.  Refer to the
section "Arranging the Pop-Up Keypad Keys" for more
information.
NOTE:  The Screen Reader/2 keypad is always active and is
not affected by the pop-up keypad.
You can also redefine pop-up keypad keys to other
keyboard keys.  This enables you to set up your pop-up
keypad anywhere on your keyboard.  For example, you might
prefer your keypad to be defined on the numeric keypad.
NOTE:  The pop-up keypad is not available in DOS
full-screen sessions and some error panels.
Therefore, if you are using DOS applications, you
should run them only in a DOS window.
USING THE POP-UP KEYPAD
When the pop-up keypad is active on the keyboard, you can
work in one of two modes: 1) you can read with Screen
Reader/2 or, 2) you can work with an application.  The
two modes are mutually exclusive.  For example, when you
use WordPerfect to create a document, there are various
function keys that perform actions such as moving blocks
of text, highlighting text, and so on.  When the pop-up
keypad is active, these function keys are disabled.
Therefore, you must toggle between the pop-up keypad and
the regular keyboard to work with the document.
To use the pop-up keypad, press CHORD A 1 THEN B to
toggle the Hot key on.  (The Hot key is the keyboard key
sequence used to enable or disable the pop-up keypad.)
Then press and release ALT+SHIFT together to make the
pop-up keypad active.  To re-enable the normal keyboard
functions, press and release ALT+SHIFT again.
POP-UP KEYPAD DEFAULTS
Unless you specify otherwise, the pop-up keypad has the
following defaults:
The pop-up keypad is active on the left side of the
keyboard.
The Hot key is ALT+SHIFT; the Stop key is CTRL.
The default for the Hot key and the Stop key is Off.
When you activate the pop-up keypad using the Hot
key, you hear "Pop-up."  When you deactivate the
pop-up keypad, you hear "Pop-down."
Each time you press a key on the pop-up keypad, you
hear a low-pitched beep.
When the pop-up keypad is active, pressing any other
keyboard key causes a high-pitched beep, which
indicates an error.
The typing area of the keyboard is disabled while the
pop-up keypad is active.
CHANGING THE KEYPAD DEFAULTS
You can change some of the pop-up keypad defaults by
using the following key sequences:
CHORD A 1 THEN 0.    Announces the values from the last
key pressed (flag byte, scan code,
and character code in decimal).
Refer to the PAL Reference, "System
Statements", for details about these
values.
CHORD A 1 THEN 1.    Toggles between the pop-up keypad
being active on the left side or the
right side of the keyboard.
CHORD A 1 THEN 2.    Cycles through Hot key and Stop key
choices.  (This key sequence is
provided to help you avoid conflict
with your applications.  For
example, if the application you are
running uses the ALT key to jump to
the action bar, you cannot use the
ALT key for the Stop key, because
the application takes precedence
over the Screen Reader/2 key
assignment.)
The choices are:
1.  CTRL+SHIFT for Hot key; ALT for
Stop key.
2.  ALT+CTRL for Hot key; SHIFT for
Stop key.
3.  ALT+SHIFT for Hot key; CTRL for
Stop key.
NOTE:  In Presentation Manager
application programs, do not
use choice 1, CTRL+SHIFT for
Hot key; ALT for Stop key.
The reason is all PM
application programs use the
ALT key for menu operations.
Screen Reader/2 cannot
recognize the ALT key.  This
causes a situation where it
seems to Screen Reader/2 that
the Stop key is held down and
any key sequence you try
subsequently is recognized as
a chord with the Stop key.
CHORD A 1 THEN 3.    Toggles between audible feedback
when you are using the pop-up keys
(the default)  or no feedback.  The
feedback includes what you hear when
you use the Hot key ("pop-up" or
"pop-down"), when you use the pop-up
keypad keys (a low-pitched beep),
and when you press a keyboard key
that is not on the pop-up keypad (a
high-pitched beep).
CHORD A 1 THEN 4.    Toggles between disabling only the
keyboard keys of the pop-up keypad
or the entire typing area of the
keyboard while the pop-up keypad is
active (the default).  This means
that while the pop-up keypad is
active, the default is that nothing
you type will be displayed on the
screen.
CHORD A 1 THEN 5.    Announces the status of the pop-up
keypad settings.  The status tells
you the following:
1.  Whether the pop-up keypad is
active or inactive.
2.  Whether the Hot key is enabled
or disabled.
3.  The keys you are using for the
Hot key and the Stop key.
4.  Whether the location of the
pop-up keypad is left, right, or
user-defined.
5.  Whether just the keyboard keys
of the pop-up keypad are
disabled or whether the entire
typing area of the keyboard is
disabled.
6.  Whether audible feedback will be
heard when the pop-up keypad is
active.
CHORD A 1 THEN B.    Toggles the Hot key On or Off.  (The
default is Off.)
CHORD A 2 THEN N.    Redefines pop-up keypad key n to
another keyboard key.
CHORD A 2 THEN S.    Stops redefining pop-up keypad key
n.
NOTE:  If you hear "undefined" when you press a key
sequence that you know is defined, you may have
inadvertently pressed either ALT+ESC, CTRL+ESC, or
SHIFT+ESC while the pop-up keypad was active.
These keyboard key sequences should not be used
when you are using the pop-up keypad.
To correct the problem, press each ALT, CTRL, and
SHIFT key on your keyboard once to reset it.
ARRANGING POP-UP KEYPAD KEYS
Screen Reader/2 enables you to use either the left or
right side of the keyboard for the pop-up keypad.  The
default is for the pop-up keypad to be on the left side.
The keypad keys on the left side of the keyboard have
this arrangement:
The keyboard keys 1, 2, 3, and 4 correspond to keypad
keys 1, 2, 3, and A.
The keyboard keys Q, W, E, and R correspond to keypad
keys 4, 5, 6, and B.
The keyboard keys A, S, D, and F correspond to keypad
keys 7, 8, 9, and C.
The keyboard keys Z, X, C, and V correspond to keypad
keys *, 0, #, and D.
The keyboard key TAB corresponds to the keypad key
HELP.
The keyboard key CTRL corresponds to the keypad key
STOP.
If you prefer to set up the keypad keys on the right side
of the keyboard, you can select the following arrangement
using CHORD A 1 THEN 1:
The keyboard keys 7, 8, 9, and 0 correspond to keypad
keys 1, 2, 3, and A.
The keyboard keys U, I, O, and P correspond to keypad
keys 4, 5, 6, and B.
The keyboard keys J, K, L, and ; correspond to keypad
keys 7, 8, 9, and C.
The keyboard keys M, ,, ., and / correspond to keypad
keys *, 0, #, and D.
The keyboard key ENTER corresponds to the keypad key
HELP.
The keyboard key CTRL corresponds to the keypad key
STOP.
If you prefer to set up the keypad keys in another
location (such as the numeric keypad), use key sequence
CHORD A 2 THEN N.
ACTIVATING THE POP-UP KEYPAD AUTOMATICALLY
If you want the pop-up keypad to be active when you start
Screen Reader/2, you need to follow these steps with the
keypad attached:
1.  Press CHORD A 1 THEN B to activate the Hot key.
2.  Specify your pop-up keypad preferences (where you
want your keypad located on your keyboard, the key
you want to use for the Hot key, and so forth).
3.  If you want the pop-up keypad available as you start
Screen Reader/2, press key sequence B THEN * to save
your current settings.
NOTE:
1.  If the keypad is not attached to your system
the next time you start your computer, an
error message will be displayed requiring you
to press ENTER to continue the startup
process.  Depending on how you plan to use
your system, there are two ways to deal with
this error.
The first method is recommended if you plan to
use the keypad only occasionally.  To avoid
having to press ENTER during the startup
process, you can add the following statement
to the beginning of the CONFIG.SYS file:
pauseonerror=no
The second method is recommended if you plan
to use the pop-up keypad exclusively.  You can
add the word rem to the beginning of the line
that reads:
x:\srd22\keypad.sys
x is the drive on which Screen Reader/2 is
installed.
2.  If the keypad is not attached to your system
the next time you start Screen Reader/2, you
will hear a warning message.  However, Screen
Reader/2 will still start.  If you do not want
the warning message to be spoken, change the
Keypad option to No in the Message Settings
Notebook.
ALTERNATIVE METHOD
There is an alternative way to start the pop-up keypad.
You can remove the two dashes
(-- --) from the line of the KEYPAD.KPD file that reads:
-- -- keypad_enable:= true;
After saving the modified KEYPAD.KPD file, type PAL SRD2
at the SRD22 directory prompt.  Then restart Screen
Reader/2.  Now the pop-up keypad is active when you start
Screen Reader/2.
LEVELS OF TALKING
You can set the level, or amount, of talking that you
want Screen Reader/2 to do when you are using many of the
application profiles.  When you set the level to chatty,
Screen Reader/2 reads the most information, provides the
fullest explanations, and gives the most feedback when
changes occur.  Chatty talking level is provided
especially for new users.
When you set the level to moderate, Screen Reader/2 reads
less information.  Moderate level is the default.
When you set the level to quiet, Screen Reader/2 reads
the least information.  Quiet level is provided for users
who are familiar with an application and who require
little feedback.
For example, when you use the WordPerfect profile, chatty
talking level reads the entire help window, the menu
list, and the selected menu item.  Moderate talking level
reads the entire help window and the selected menu item.
Quiet talking level reads only the help title and the
selected menu item.
Explanations of what the different talking levels do for
particular profiles are provided in the profile
descriptions.
You can use CHORD A S to cycle through the three talking
levels.
PROFILES
A profile is an ASCII text file used to control the key
definitions and autospeaks for Screen Reader/2.  A
profile must be compiled and loaded into memory to be
activated.
In Screen Reader/2, profiles are loaded into memory on a
tier, which is a stack of profiles.  The profile tier can
change, depending on which program or process is running
in the foreground.  When a profile is loaded into memory
on a tier, its key definitions take precedence over any
other key definitions in the tier to which it is added.
In addition to the base profile, Screen Reader/2 provides
profiles for a variety of software programs.  These
programs run under the following OS/2 2.1 environments:
DOS text.
Presentation Manager.
OS/2 text.
Windows.
The profiles provided here were written for many popular
programs.  These profiles work with specific versions of
the programs.  We do not guarantee that the profiles will
work with earlier or later versions of the programs.  In
addition, we may not provide profiles for earlier or
later versions of the programs.
NOTE:  You may be able to use a profile as the base for
writing other profiles of a similar category or
nature.  For example, you may be able to use the
Lotus 1 2 3 profile as a base for another program
that would be considered a spreadsheet as well.
ADDING AND REMOVING PROFILES
You load application-specific profiles to control key
sequences and autospeaks for the application started in
each session.  Application-specific profiles are added to
the current profile tier in one of two ways:
1.  Screen Reader/2 automatically adds a profile to the
current tier as required for most base and extended
OS/2 applications.  In addition, Screen Reader/2 adds
OS/2, DOS, and Windows application-specific profiles
to the profile tier for applications listed in this
User's Guide.
2.  You can use key sequence # THEN A to add a profile to
the profile tier.  You can use CHORD # A to remove
the last profile from the tier.  CHORD # B tells you
which profiles are currently active.  The first one
spoken is the last one on the tier.
You can use the profiles that are provided with Screen
Reader/2 as they are or you can modify them.  In
addition, you can create your own profiles.  Use the
Profile Access Language (PAL) to do this.  (Refer to the
PAL Reference for more information.)
LIST OF SCREEN READER/2 PROFILES
The following is an alphabetical list of all the profiles
provided with Screen Reader/2.  These profiles are for
Presentation Manager, OS/2 text session, DOS session, or
Windows programs.  Each program type is noted next to the
program name.
AmiPro (Windows).
Base Screen Reader/2.
Activities List (P M).
Alarms (P M).
BookManager Read/2 (P M).
BookManager Read/DOS (DOS).
Calculator (P M).
Calculator (Windows).
Calendar (P M).
Command Prompt (DOS).
Command Prompt (OS/2 text).
Communications Manager (OS/2 text).
Daily Planner (P M).
DeScribe (P M).
Enhanced Editor (P M).
Hardware Error Pop-up (DOS).
Hardware Error Pop-up (OS/2 text).
Help for Windows (Windows).
Installation Aid (OS/2 text).
Lotus 1 2 3 (DOS).
Lotus 1 2 3 (P M).
Notepad (P M).
Planner Archive (P M).
PM Terminal (P M).
Quicken (DOS).
Quicken 2 (Windows).
Spreadsheet (P M).
Start Here (P M).
System Editor (P M).
To-Do List (P M).
To-Do List Archive (P M).
Word for Windows (Windows).
WordPerfect (DOS).
WordPerfect (Windows).
WordScan Plus (Windows).
View and Help Facility (P M).
3270 Emulation (OS/2 text).
5250 Emulation (OS/2 text).
BASE SCREEN READER/2
When Screen Reader/2 starts, the base Screen Reader/2
profile SRD2 is activated (unless you have specified
otherwise).  It includes all basic key sequences, and the
icon, mouse, scan, and time functions.
The base Screen Reader/2 profile also includes the key
sequences that you use for Presentation Manager screens,
viewports, autospeaks, and column viewer, the pop-up
keypad, and the edit facility.
There is a comprehensive listing of all base Screen
Reader/2 key sequences in "Screen Reader/2 Key
Sequences".
OS/2 2.1 PRESENTATION MANAGER APPLICATIONS
When you start any of the following Presentation Manager
programs, Screen Reader/2 loads a corresponding profile.
Under Presentation Manager, Screen Reader/2 automatically
reads standard controls such as entry fields, pulldown
menus, error messages, and the action bar.
The following Presentation Manager profiles are described
in this section:
Activities List.
Alarms.
BookManager Read/2.
Calculator.
Calendar.
Daily Planner.
DeScribe.
Enhanced Editor.
Lotus 1 2 3.
Notepad.
Planner Archive.
PM Terminal.
Spreadsheet.
Start Here.
System Editor.
To-Do List.
To-Do List Archive.
View and Help Facility.
ACTIVITIES LIST
The Activities List contains all your Daily Planner file
entries.  You use the Activities List for time-management
tasks.
PROFILE NAME:  PMDLIST
C THEN 2. Announces heading and activity entry
information.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Key sequence C THEN 2 causes the heading information to
be read.  When you press key sequence C THEN 2, chatty
reads the entry headings and expands on some.  For
example, it says "Alarm minutes before start time"  and
speaks the three activity types (Out of Office, Personal
Holiday, and National Holiday).  It also reads the
information you entered and tells you entry columns that
are blank.  Moderate reads the entry headings but without
expanding on them.  For example, it says only "Alarm" and
"Activity type."  It also reads the information you
entered.  Quiet reads only the information you entered.
ALARMS
The Alarms program enables you to set alarms to go off
during the day at the time you specify.  You can also
specify a screen message to be displayed.
PROFILE NAME:  PMDALARM
C THEN 2. Reads alarm entry information.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 announces the static text for the
spin-button entries when you are setting alarms.
When you press key sequence C THEN 2, the heading
information is read.  Chatty reads the entry headings and
expands on some.  For example, it says "Alarm time is set
for" and "Source of information is."  Moderate reads the
entry headings but without expanding on them.  For
example, it says only "Alarm time" and "Source."  Quiet
reads just the information that appears in the selector.
BOOKMANAGER READ/2
The BookManager Read/2 program, version 1.2, displays
online books.
PROFILE NAME:  BOOKMGR2
C THEN A. Reads current screen.
C THEN B. Toggles Page Browse On or Off.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 reads the page when Page Browse is On.
Otherwise, it reads only the current window title.  If
there is a plus or minus next to an entry in a Table of
Contents, Screen Reader/2 says, "Plus to expand" or
"Minus to collapse."
For chatty and moderate, Page Browse is On.  For quiet,
Page Browse is Off.
CALCULATOR
The Calculator program is like a hand-held calculator,
enabling you to perform mathematical operations.
PROFILE NAME:  PMDCALC
C THEN 1. Reads error information.
C THEN 2. Announces the contents of the calculator
memory.
C THEN C. Reads the current value.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 announces changes in the memory area of
the calculator.  If Character Echo is On (the default),
Screen Reader/2 says numbers as you type them.  NumLock
is turned on when the calculator program starts and
whenever the focus is on the calculator.  It will also
speak any error messages, such as "Divide by 0."  Screen
Reader/2 announces the results after the EQUAL key is
pressed.
Talking levels do not affect this profile.
CALENDAR
The Calendar program is part of the Daily Planner
program.  It displays a calendar into which you have
entered appointments and meetings.  You can choose to see
details for any day.
PROFILE NAME:  PMDCALEN
C THEN 1. Announces the day of the week, the day, the
month, and the year.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 announces the new date when the day,
month, or year changes:
    When the month or year changes, chatty announces the
day of the week (for example, Monday), as well as the
day, month, and year.  Moderate announces the day,
month, and year.  Quiet announces the day and month.
    When the day changes, chatty announces the day and
month.  Moderate and quiet announce only the day,
unless you are on a day which is actually in the
previous or next month.  In that case, the day and
month are announced.
DAILY PLANNER
The Daily Planner program enables you to keep a log of
your past or future activities.  With the planner, you
can set an accompanying alarm for a future activity, mark
an activity as completed, and archive the activity for
future reference.
PROFILE NAME:  PMDDIARY
C THEN 1. Announces the date.
C THEN 2. Reads the current Daily Planner entry
information.
C THEN 3. Reads the activity type and completion status
for the current entry.
C THEN 5. Reads the column title and contents for the
current entry.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 announces the date and Insert/Replace
status.  It also reads the new column title and contents
when the cursor is under a new column header or when you
scroll screen text.
When the date is announced, chatty says the new date,
including the Julian date.  (The Julian calendar counts
days sequentially, not by months.  For example, April 13,
1993 would be written 93103 in Julian format: 93 is the
year; 103 is the number of days that have passed since
the beginning of the year.)  Moderate says only the day
of the week and date.  Quiet says only the month and day;
for example, April 13.
When the new column title and contents are spoken or when
you have scrolled text on the screen, chatty causes the
column-header information to be treated like a help mode,
telling you what is expected as input.  Moderate reads
the column information as it appears on the screen.
Quiet reads just the contents of the entry for the
current column.
DESCRIBE
The DeScribe word-processor program (version 4.0) enables
you to create documents.  You can merge text and graphics
information, as well as create tables.  You can also
(3) DeScribe is a registered trademark of DeScribe, Inc.
import files created with other word-processing programs,
such as Microsoft Works.
PROFILE NAME: DESCRIBE
C THEN 1. Reads the font size.
C THEN 2. Reads the font name.
C THEN 3. Reads style information.
C THEN 0. Reads the status line or message line.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
For chatty and moderate, Screen Reader/2 reads the help
information automatically.  For quiet, the help
information is not read automatically.
ENHANCED EDITOR
The Enhanced Editor enables you to create and edit text
files.  You can also work with multiple files at the same
time.
PROFILE NAME:  EPM
C THEN 2. Reads the message line.
C THEN 3. Reads the status line.
C THEN A. Reads the text page.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 announces Insert/Replace status and the
top and bottom of the file.
If you use the frame-control option for prompting, Screen
Reader/2 reads the prompt information as you use the
Enhanced Editor menu items.
LOTUS 1 2 3 FOR OS/2
The Lotus 1 2 3 application program is a spreadsheet that
enables you to analyze data in many ways.
This profile is for Lotus 1 2 3 , Release 2.0.
PROFILE NAME:  123OS2
C THEN 4. Announces the current cell name.
(4) Works is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
(5) Lotus and 1-2-3 are registered trademarks of Lotus Development
Corporation.
C THEN 6. Announces the current status (menu, error,
help, and so forth).
C THEN B. Toggles Cell Browse On or Off.
C THEN 5. Reads the contents of the cell.
C THEN D. Toggles the cell-name autospeak On or Off.
CHORD C H. Reads the contents of the help box.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 announces the following:
The mode.
Help or error boxes.
Changes in the status indicators (Scroll Lock, Num
Lock, Caps Lock, and Insert/Replace).
Ranges while you are copying or moving cells.
Screen Reader/2 also reads the following:
All help topics displayed after you press F1 and the
help options as you browse through them using the
cursor keys.
Each cell as you move to it, if you have set Cell
Browse On using key sequence C B.
Chatty talking level automatically turns on Cell Browse
(the default is Off).  Quiet reads only the help title
instead of the entire help page.
NOTEPAD
The Notepad program simulates a paper notepad on your
desk.  Instead of writing notes on paper, you type them
using the Notepad.
PROFILE NAME:  PMDNOTE
C THEN 1 THEN N. Announces the title of notepad page n.
C THEN A. Reads the current notepad page.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 reads the title of the new note and
announces Insert/Replace status.
Talking levels do not affect this profile.
PLANNER ARCHIVE
The Planner Archive program enables you to store your
completed activity data for future reference and
retrieval.
PROFILE NAME:  PMDDARC
C THEN 2. Reads planner-archive entry information.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Chatty reads the entry headings and expands on some.  For
example, it says "Alarm minutes before start time" and
speaks the three activity types (Out of Office, Personal
Holiday, and National Holiday).  It also reads the
information you entered and tells you entry columns that
are blank.  Moderate reads the entry headings but without
expanding on them.  For example, it says only "Alarm" and
"Activity type."  It also reads the information you
entered.  Quiet reads only the information you entered.
P M TERMINAL
The P M Terminal program enables your personal computer
to communicate with other computer systems by doing the
following:
1.  Emulating any of the supported terminals.
2.  Transferring data (uploading and downloading) between
your personal computer and other computer systems.
PROFILE NAME:  SOFTERM
C THEN 4.  Reads the cursor line minus 4.
C THEN 5.  Reads the cursor line minus 3.
C THEN 6.  Reads the cursor line minus 2.
C THEN B.  Reads the cursor line minus 1.
CHORD C *.  Switches between views of the status window,
the P M Terminal text window, and the
Presentation Manager window.
CHORD C 4.  Toggles P M Terminal text-window-monitor
autospeak On or Off.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 automatically reads new information in
the PM Terminal text window.
NOTE:  This autospeak will only work when the view has
been changed to the text-window view by using the
chord C *.
Chatty and moderate cause Screen Reader/2 to read all of
the information between prompts, or the entire screen if
the previous prompt has scrolled off the screen.  For
quiet, only the current prompt line is read.
SPREADSHEET
The Spreadsheet program enables you to prepare budgets
and simple reports, and to analyze data in many ways.
PROFILE NAME:  PMSPREAD
C THEN 2. Reads formula field.
C THEN B. Toggles Cell Browse On or Off.
C THEN 3. Reads cell contents.
C THEN D. Toggles cell-name autospeak On or Off.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 announces Insert/Replace status.  It also
announces, conditionally, the contents and name of the
cell.  The conditions are as follows:
1.  If you turn on Cell Browse, C B, Screen Reader/2
reads the contents of the cell.
2.  If you turn on cell-name, C D, Screen Reader/2 reads
the cell name.
3.  If you turn on Cell Browse, using C B, and the
cell-name autospeak, using C D, Screen Reader/2 reads
the cell name and cell contents.
NOTE:  You will have to use the key sequences to turn on
the cell-browse and the cell-name autospeaks
because both are initially set to Off.
For chatty talking level, Cell Browse is automatically
turned On.
START HERE
The Start Here program gives basic information about OS/2
in a document format.
PROFILE NAME:  STHR
C THEN A. Reads current window.
C THEN B. Toggles Page Browse On or Off.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
If Page Browse is On, the profile automatically reads the
current page of information as it is displayed.  If Page
Browse is Off, the current page is not automatically
read.
For chatty and moderate, Page Browse is automatically On.
For quiet, Page Browse is Off.
SYSTEM EDITOR
The OS/2 System Editor is a text editor.  You can use it
to create and edit your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT
system files.  You can also use it as a convenient tool
to display text files or perform basic editing tasks.
PROFILE NAME:  SE
C THEN A. Reads only the text portion of the window.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 announces Insert/Replace status and the
top and bottom of the file.
Talking levels do not affect this profile.
TO-DO LIST
The To-Do List program enables you to list tasks that you
need or want to do.  You can sort the tasks by priority,
date, or description.
PROFILE NAME:  PMDTODO
C THEN 1. Announces the number of entries for each status
type.
C THEN 2. Reads to-do list line-entry information.
C THEN 3. Announces completion status for the current
entry.
C THEN 5. Reads the column title and contents for the
current entry.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 reads the new column title and contents
when the cursor is either under a new column header or
when you scroll text on the screen.  It also announces
Insert/Replace status.
When the new column title and contents are spoken, chatty
causes the column-header information to be treated like
the help mode, telling you what is expected as input.
Moderate gives the column title and entry information as
it appears on the screen.  Quiet tells you only the
contents of the entry for the current column.
TO-DO LIST ARCHIVE
The To-Do List Archive stores information that you
entered using the To-Do List program, and enables you to
review and retrieve the information.
PROFILE NAME:  PMDTARC
C THEN 2. Announces archived entry information for the
to-do list.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Chatty explains the contents of the activity entry most
fully.  Moderate provides less of an explanation of the
contents of the activity entry.  Quiet just reads the
information as it appears in the selector.
VIEW AND HELP FACILITY
The View and Help Facility program displays online books
and help in Presentation Manager applications.
PROFILE NAME:  VIEWDOC
C THEN A. Reads the current page.
C THEN B. Toggles Page Browse On or Off.
KEYBOARD KEYS:
CTRL + *. Expands all entries in the table of contents.
F 7.      Moves the focus to the pushbutton area of the
display.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 reads the page when Page Browse is On
(the default).  Otherwise, it reads only the current
window title.
If you are reading a section of the book or help that has
more than one page, Screen Reader/2 will read the page
and announce "more."
If a plus or minus sign is in front of a topic in the
Table of Contents, Screen Reader/2 says, "Plus to expand"
or "Minus to collapse."
For chatty and moderate, Page Browse is On.  For quiet,
Screen Reader/2 automatically turns off Page Browse.
OS/2 2.1 TEXT APPLICATIONS
If you start any of the text-based applications in this
list, Screen Reader/2 automatically loads a corresponding
profile.  These profiles, described in the following
sections, are:
Command Prompt.
Communications Manager.
Hardware Error Pop-up for Full-Screen Sessions.
Installation Aid.
3270 Emulation.
5250 Emulation.
COMMAND PROMPT
The Command Prompt profile reads lines on the screen that
you specify and also speaks output or messages from
commonly used commands.  The Command Prompt profile is
loaded automatically for an OS/2 full-screen or window
session.
NOTE:  This profile is sensitive to the Prompt command.
If you have altered the default appearance of the
command prompt, most of the automatic speaking
will not work.
PROFILE NAME:  CP
C THEN 4.  Reads the cursor line minus 4.
C THEN 5.  Reads the cursor line minus 3.
C THEN 6.  Reads the cursor line minus 2.
C THEN B.  Reads the cursor line minus 1.
C THEN C.  Reads the cursor line.
C THEN H.  Reads information between command prompts or
the entire screen if the previous command
prompt has scrolled off the screen.
NOTE:  You can use this key sequence to read
help information about a command.  For
example, if you type DIR /? on the
command line and press ENTER, the
command syntax with all possible
parameters and their descriptions is
displayed.  Press key sequence C THEN
H to hear this information.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 announces output messages from commonly
used commands.  For example, the new subdirectory is
announced when you use the Change Directory command.  It
also announces error information.
Chatty reads information between command prompts or the
entire screen if the previous command prompt has scrolled
off the screen.  Moderate announces output messages from
commonly used commands and error information.  Quiet
announces only error information.
COMMUNICATIONS MANAGER
The full-screen Communications Manager setup program
enables you to start and stop your emulator sessions,
configure them, upload and download files, and change
keyboard key functions.
PROFILE NAME:  COMMGR
C THEN 1.  Reads the action panel to enable you to remap
your keyboard and read previous key
information.
C THEN C.  Reads the line the cursor or selector is on.
CHORD C S.  Toggles between the full-screen and current
box viewport.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 reads error and help information, titles,
entry fields, and selectors.
For chatty and moderate, autospeaks are active.  For
quiet, only the titles of the help information are
spoken.
HARDWARE ERROR POP-UP FOR FULL-SCREEN SESSIONS
This program displays hardware error information, such as
a bad disk drive or diskette, or if you neglected to
insert a diskette when trying to obtain a directory
listing.
NOTE:  The profile applies only to full-screen sessions.
PROFILE NAME:  HARDERR
C THEN A. Reads error information.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 reads error and help information, and
announces the currently selected action.
Talking levels do not affect this profile.
INSTALLATION AID
The Installation Aid program is an OS/2 full-screen
program used for installing programs such as the IBM
Assembler or C Compiler.
PROFILE NAME:  INSTAIDE
C THEN C.  Reads the cursor line or selector.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 reads error and help information, and the
title and page of a help screen.  It also announces the
screen title and selector, if there is one, on an
installation screen.
Chatty and moderate read the entire page of help.  Quiet
reads only the title of the help page.
3270 EMULATION
The 3270 Emulation profile can be used for several 3270
terminal-emulation programs.  These programs are
Communication Manager's 3270, TCP/IP's 3270, and the IBM
ELEP2.
PROFILE NAME: 3270
C THEN 1.  Sets up the error line for XEDIT.
C THEN 2.  Sets up the command line for XEDIT.
C THEN 4.  Toggles the autospeak for announcing the
error line On or Off.
C THEN 0.  Announces system status.
C THEN C.  Reads the line the cursor is on, which is
usually the command line.
C THEN D.  Announces the file name in XEDIT.
C THEN #.  Announces the position in the file in XEDIT.
CHORD C 4.  Toggles the autospeak for the VM screen On or
Off.
CHORD C 0.  Announces the status view.
CHORD C B.  Announces status of Insert/Replace mode.
CHORD C S.  Reads error information.
CHORD C *.  Toggles between status view and main view.
CHORD D S.  Finds the status view.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 reads the XEDIT command prompt and error
line, and announces changed status (such as VM READ,
RUNNING), Insert/Replace status and KeyLock status, and
new information that appears on a VM screen.
Talking levels do not affect this profile.
5250 EMULATION
The 5250 Emulation profile is used with Communication
Manager's 5250 emulation program.  This profile is not
automatically added to the profile tier.  Use key
sequence # THEN A to load this profile.
PROFILE NAME:  5250
C THEN C. Announces the cursor line.
C THEN #. Reads the status line.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 announces a changed session, system
availability, message waiting, keyboard shift,
Insert/Replace status, keystroke buffering, and inhibited
input.  When input is inhibited, your cursor is on a part
of the VM screen where you cannot enter information.
Talking levels do not affect this profile.
OS/2 2.1 DOS SESSION APPLICATIONS
When you start any of the following DOS-session
applications in a window, Screen Reader/2 automatically
loads a corresponding profile if the window title is
exactly the same as the title selected when the
applications were migrated.
The next sections describe these OS/2 2.1 DOS session
profiles:
BookManager Read/DOS.
Command Prompt.
Hardware Error Pop-up for Full-Screen Sessions (DOS).
Lotus 1 2 3.
Quicken.
WordPerfect.
NOTE:  The DOS programs are initially migrated as
full-screen sessions.  In order to fully utilize
the Screen Reader/2 functions, we suggest that you
change them to DOS window sessions by doing the
following:
1.  Bring up the pop-up menu for the program
object that you want to change.
2.  Press RIGHT ARROW to open the settings
notebook.  Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook.
3.  On the second page, cursor down to the DOS
Window auto-radio button.
4.  Close the settings notebook.  The program will
now be in a DOS window session.
BOOKMANAGER READ/DOS
The BookManager Read/DOS program, version 1.2, displays
online books.
PROFILE NAME:  BOOKMGR
C THEN A.  Reads the currently active screen.
C THEN B.  Toggles Page Browse On or Off.
C THEN C.  Reads the cursor line or selector.
C THEN #.  Announces the cursor or selector location.
C THEN 0.  Announces status information.
C THEN D.  Announces context information about the
screen you are in currently (for example,
text window, action bar, pull-down menu, or
help).
C THEN H.  Announces function-key help.
C THEN 6.  Announces general help.
C THEN 7.  Cycles through selector response types:
Says selector.
Says rest of line.
Says selector and rest of line.
Says entire line.
C THEN 1.  Finds the hit word from the top.
C THEN 2.  Finds the next occurrence of the hit word.
NOTE:  The hit word is the word for which you
are searching.  If you are using key
sequences C THEN 1 and C THEN 2 to
search for a hit word, you need to
press C THEN 1, then C THEN 2 each
time you change the page.  Otherwise,
Screen Reader/2 announces there is no
occurrence of the hit word on the new
page.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
The default is Screen Reader/2 reads new selectors and
new pages when you move around in a document.
By using C THEN 7, you can change what Screen Reader/2
reads when the selector changes.
If Page Browse is set to Off or if the talking level is
set to quiet, new pages are not read automatically.
COMMAND PROMPT
The Command Prompt profile reads lines on the screen that
you specify and also speaks output or messages from
commonly used commands.
PROFILE NAME:  CP
C THEN 4.  Reads the cursor line minus 4.
C THEN 5.  Reads the cursor line minus 3.
C THEN 6.  Reads the cursor line minus 2.
C THEN B.  Reads the cursor line minus 1.
C THEN C.  Reads the cursor line.
C THEN H.  Reads information between command prompts or
the entire screen if the previous command
prompt has scrolled off the screen.  You can
use this key sequence to read help
information about a command.  For example, if
you type DIR /? on the command line and press
ENTER, you hear the command syntax with all
possible parameters and their descriptions.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 announces output messages from commonly
used commands.  For example, the new subdirectory is
announced when you use the Change Directory command.  It
also announces error information.
Chatty reads information between command prompts or the
entire screen if the previous command prompt has scrolled
off the screen.  Moderate announces output messages from
commonly used commands and error information.  Quiet
announces only error information.
HARDWARE ERROR POP-UP FOR FULL-SCREEN SESSIONS
This program displays hardware error information, such as
a bad disk drive or diskette, or if you neglected to
insert a diskette when trying to obtain a directory
listing.
NOTE:  The profile applies only to DOS full-screen
sessions.
PROFILE NAME:  HARDERR
C THEN A. Reads error information.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 reads error and help information, and
announces the currently selected action.
Talking levels do not affect this profile.
LOTUS 1 2 3
The Lotus 1 2 3 application program is a spreadsheet that
enables you to analyze data in many ways.
The Screen Reader/2 profile for Lotus 1 2 3, version 2.4,
is built so that you can take advantage of Lotus 1 2 3
features.  It includes a special autospeak called Cell
Browse so you can hear the contents of a cell when you
highlight it.
When you install the Lotus 1 2 3 program, specify CGA as
the video type and do not install WYSIWYG.  This prevents
the graphics mode from being installed; therefore, Screen
Reader/2 can read the information that is displayed.
NOTE:  This profile works only in a DOS window session.
If you migrate this application to the Desktop,
ensure that the session selection in the
application's settings notebook is DOS window and
not DOS full screen.  Also, ensure that you don't
change the title from Lotus 123 R2.4.
PROFILE NAME:  1 2 3
C THEN 1.  Reads line 1.
C THEN 2.  Reads line 2.
C THEN 3.  Reads line 3.
C THEN A.  Reads the error box.
C THEN 4.  Announces the current cell name.
C THEN 5.  Announces the message in pointer mode.
C THEN 6.  Announces the current status (menu, error,
help, and so forth).
C THEN B.  Toggles Cell Browse On or Off.
C THEN C.  Reads the contents of the cell.
C THEN D.  Toggles the cell-name autospeak On or Off.
CHORD C 5.  Reads the highlighted menu option.
CHORD C 6.  Reads the rest of the line that contains the
highlighted help option in the help box.
CHORD C H.  Reads the contents of the help box.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
Screen Reader/2 announces the following:
Entrance into Lotus 1 2 3.
The mode (and then sets appropriate viewports).
The contents of the menu or file-list selector.
Help or error boxes.
Changes in the status indicators (Scroll Lock, Num
Lock, Caps Lock, and Insert/Replace status).
Ranges while copying or moving cells.
Screen Reader/2 also reads the following:
All help topics displayed after you press F1 and the
help options as you browse through them using the
cursor keys.


2.  Select the Shut down option by typing "d".
Each cell as you move to it, if you have set Cell
Browse On using key sequence C THEN B.


3.  A confirmation window is displayed that asks if you are sure you want to
Highlighted menu items as you browse through them.
shut down your system.  The shutdown window contains three pushbuttons:
OK, Cancel, and Help.  The OK pushbutton is selected.  Press ENTER to
continue the shutdown process.


4.  If other programs are still running, messages will be displayed asking if
Chatty automatically turns on Cell Browse (the default is
you want to close these programs.
Off). Quiet reads only the help title instead of the
The No pushbutton is selected as the default.  Type "Y" to specify Yes.
entire help page.


A message will be displayed that indicates that shutdown is in progress.
QUICKEN
A second message will be displayed when the shutdown process has been
completed.  You should wait about 30 seconds after the first message
before restarting your computer.


Calibrating Your System
Quicken is a personal financial program that helps you
balance your checkbook, pay bills, and track investments.


When you restart your system after installing Screen Magnifier/2, the Desktop
NOTE:  This profile works only for Quicken version 6.0.
is magnified at the default factor of 4A dialog box is displayed on the
However, it does not work in a DOS full-screen
Desktop that asks if you want to run the calibration program nowIf you
sessionIf you migrate this application to the
click on Yes, the calibration routine will begin automatically.
Desktop, ensure that the session selection in the
application's settings notebook is DOS window and
not DOS full screenAlso, ensure that you don't
change the title from Quicken.


NOTE:  Because of the way OS/2 starts, the Calibration dialog box might be
The only color combination that you should select when
hidden behind other windows.  If this is the case, press CTRL + ESC to
using Quicken is the default of navy on azure.
display the Window List, then select Screen Magnifier/2.  The
Calibration dialog box will now be visible.


Screen Magnifier/2 uses both hardware and software techniques for
PROFILE NAME: Q
magnification. These techniques produce identical results but vary in the
demands they make on your computer.  To determine which technique is faster
for each magnification factor, Screen Magnifier/2 runs a calibration test
routine.


When the calibration test begins, the border around the magnified view
C THEN 1. Reads the help line associated with the
alternates between blue and green and the mouse pointer moves around on the
highlighted menu option.
Desktop. The calibration test runs through each magnification power, trying
C THEN 2. Reads the contents of a box (for example, the
both of the available techniques to see which is faster on your computer.
help box).
C THEN C. Reads the menu item, entry field, or line the
cursor is on.


It can take up to 20 minutes to run the calibration test, depending on the
WHAT YOU HEAR:
speed of your computer.  If you have a fast system, it can take considerably
less time.  You can stop the test at any time by pressing any key.


When the calibration test is finished, your computer will restart and Screen
Screen Reader/2 reads the highlighted menu option; the
Magnifier/2 will be ready to use.
current checkbook field; information, help, and tutorial
boxes; the highlighted item in a pull-down menu; and the
transaction settings.  It also announces entry fields as
they appear.


Recalibrating Your System
Talking levels do not affect this profile.


If you change your system significantly (by installing additional graphics
hardware or more memory, for example), you should run the calibration test
again.


To run the calibration test any time after installation, press CTRL + SHIFT
(6) Quicken is a registered trademarks of Intuit Inc.
to enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode, then press C.


Entering Screen Magnifier/2 Mode
WORDPERFECT


Once you have started Screen Magnifier/2, the program is always running in
WordPerfect is a word-processing program used to create
the background.  If you want to change characteristics of Screen Magnifier/2
documentsThis profile is for WordPerfect version 5.1.
or use one of the program functions, you have to first enter Screen
Magnifier/2 modeWhen you have finished making changes or using the
function, you have to leave Screen Magnifier/2 mode to return to your
application or the Desktop.


To change a Screen Magnifier/2 characteristic or use a Screen Magnifier/2
NOTE:  Ensure that you don't change the profile title
function:
from WordPerfect.


1.  Make sure Screen Magnifier/2 is running.
This profile works for the two sets of default colors in
WordPerfect 5.1.  If colors have changed, go back to the
default colors. The two sets of default colors are:


2.  Either press CTRL + SHIFT together OR click both mouse buttons at the
DEFAULT COLORS SET 1
same time.


Either way, you hear a beep and the system cursor changes to the Screen
1.  Normal Text (dark grey on dark blue).
Magnifier/2 magnifying glassYou are now in Screen Magnifier/2 mode and can
2.  Bold (white on dark blue).
use all of the program's functions or change its characteristics.  (Refer to
3Underlined (dark blue on dark grey).
"Fast Path" on page 11, "Using the Setup Window" on page 15, or "Using Screen
4.  Bold and Underlined (white on dark grey).
Magnifier/2" on page 23 for information on how to change the program
5. Block On (dark grey on dark red).
characteristics.)


When you are ready to return to your application, press
DEFAULT COLORS SET 2
CTRL + SHIFT again (or click both mouse buttons) to leave Screen Magnifier/2
mode.  You will hear a beep and the Screen Magnifier/2 magnifying glass will
change back to the system cursor.


NOTE: Even though you can use the mouse-button sequence to enter Screen
1. Normal Text (dark grey on dark blue).
Magnifier/2 mode, we are only going to refer to the key sequence from
2.  Bold (dark cyan on dark blue).
this point on.
3.  Underlined (white on dark blue).
4.  Underlined (dark blue on dark grey).
5.  Bold and Underlined (black on dark grey).
6.  Block On (dark grey on dark red).


Stopping and Restarting Screen Magnifier/2
PROFILE NAME:  WP


Once the program has started and you have entered Screen Magnifier/2 mode,
C THEN 1 THEN 1.  Begins a search for a highlighted block
you can stop Screen Magnifier/2 by pressing F3If you stop Screen
from the top.
Magnifier/2, you can restart the program by opening the Independence
C THEN 1 THEN 2.  Begins a search for a bold word from
Series(*) folder on the OS/2 Desktop. This folder contains the Screen
the top.
Magnifier/2 program object as well as the objects for other Independence
C THEN 1 THEN 3.  Begins a search for an underlined word
Series programs you have installed. Select the Screen Magnifier/2 object
from the top.
from this folder, then double-click or press ENTER.
C THEN 1 THEN A.  Begins a search for a bold, underlined
word from the top.
C THEN 2.         Continues C1 search from current
pointer position.
C THEN 3.        Continues C1 search from the top.
C THEN 4.        Toggles reveal-code autospeak On or
Off.
C THEN 5.        Reads the sentence with the misspelled
word.
C THEN 6.        Reads general help.
C THEN 0.        Reads the status line.
C THEN B.         Moves to the top of the menu, spelling
items, or thesaurus items.
C THEN C.        Reads the cursor line or selector.
C THEN D.        Announces the mode (spell, edit, menu,
etc.)


(*) Trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation


Fast Path
(7) WordPerfect is a registered trademark of WordPerfect Corporation.
Here's how to get Screen Magnifier/2 working quickly so you can begin using
your applications.  Fine-tuning the program is covered in later sections of
this User's Guide.


Increasing Magnification
C THEN H.        Reads specific help.
C THEN #.        Announces the cursor position in
editing mode.
CHORD * 4.        Reads the previous menu, spelling, or
thesaurus item.
CHORD * 5.        Reads the current menu, spelling, or
thesaurus item.
CHORD * 6.        Reads the next menu, spelling, or
thesaurus item.


1.  Press CTRL + SHIFT to enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode.
WHAT YOU HEAR:


2.  Press the UP ARROW.
Screen Reader/2 does the following:


Each time you press the UP ARROW, magnification increases one level.  If
It monitors the top, bottom, and cursor lines, and
you hold down the UP ARROW, magnification increases rapidly.
triggers other autospeaks when these change.


3.  Press the DOWN ARROW to decrease magnification.
It announces a directory name and the name of the
file at the current selector.


4.  Press CTRL + SHIFT when the magnification level is set to your
It announces selector changes and reads the currently
satisfaction.
highlighted item.


Setting Mouse Sensitivity
It announces the following codes for text
characteristics:


The more magnified the screen is, the faster the mouse pointer seems to move
Normal text.
in response to movements of the physical mouse. To slow down the mouse
Bold.
movements:
Underlined.
Bold and underlined.
Block on.


1.  Press CTRL + SHIFT.
It detects the thesaurus screen and reads the word
you specified.


2.  Press L to make the mouse less sensitive (which means it requires more
It detects the spell-checker screen and reads the
movement of the physical mouse to move the mouse pointer a given
misspelled word.
distance).


Each time you press L, the mouse sensitivity decreases one level; if you
It reads the help screen.
hold down the L key, the sensitivity decreases rapidly.


3.  Press M to increase sensitivity one level and the mouse pointer will move
It announces the Keys Help Index if it appears.
a greater distance for the same physical mouse movement.


4.  Press CTRL + SHIFT when you're happy with the mouse sensitivity.
It reads the menus at the bottom of the screen and
the current entry in a menu, and announces if a field
containing the default or current settings for the
entry exists.


Reversing Video
It announces the document number.


To reverse the video displayed on the screen:
It reads the highlighted pull-down menu item.


1Press CTRL + SHIFT.
Chatty reads the entire help window, the menu list, and
the menuModerate reads the entire help window and the
menu.  Quiet reads only the help title.


2.  Press V.  Immediately, the screen reverses colors; what was dark is now
WINDOWS APPLICATIONS
light, and vice versa.


3Press V again to restore the screen to its original colors.
When you start any of the following Windows programs,
Screen Reader/2 loads a corresponding profileUnder
Windows, Screen Reader/2 automatically reads standard
controls such as entry fields, pulldown menus, error
messages, and the action bar.


Making Multiple Changes
You must have a mouse installed on your system for the
mouse actions to work in Windows programs.


If you want to change all of these settings at once, or any combination of
Descriptions of the following profiles are discussed in
them, don't press CTRL + SHIFT after you have finished your first task.
this section:
Instead, go to step 2 of the next task.


When you have finished making all your changes, press
AmiPro.
CTRL + SHIFT to leave Screen Magnifier/2 mode.
Calculator for Windows.
Help for Windows.
Quicken 2 for Windows.
Word for Windows.
WordPerfect for Windows.
WordScan Plus for Windows.


Getting Started
AMIPRO


Once you have these basic features set to your satisfaction, you can either
AmiPro is a word-processing tool.  This profile is for
start using your application programs or continue reading this User's Guide
AmiPro, version 3.01.  You must have a mouse installed on
to learn more about Screen Magnifier/2.
your system for AmiPro to work properly with Screen
Reader/2.


Using the Setup Window
PROFILE NAME: AMIPRO
The Screen Magnifier/2 Setup window enables you to change or verify the
following settings at one time:


    Magnification
C THEN 1. Announces the paragraph style.
C THEN 2. Announces the font face name.
C THEN 3. Announces the font point size.
C THEN 4. Reads the highlighted portion in grammar
checking.
C THEN 5. Reads the line with the misspelled word.
C THEN 6. Reads the suggestion in the grammar checker.
C THEN H. Reads the general help.
C THEN 0. Reads the status line.
C THEN A. Reads a text page.


    Mouse Sensitivity
WHAT YOU HEAR:


    Focus Tracking
Screen Reader/2 spells the misspelled word when you use
AmiPro's spell checking tool.


    Dithering
In the chatty talking level, the explanation for the
currently highlighted menu item is read.


    Reverse Video


    Mouse Mode
(8) AmiPro is a trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.


NOTE:  You can also change settings with key sequences and, sometimes, with
CALCULATOR
mouse sequences.  However, the Screen Magnifier/2 Setup window is the
only way to visually verify your settings.


Opening the Setup Window
The Windows Calculator program can be used to perform
simple operations or to solve scientific mathematical
problems.


To open the Screen Magnifier/2 Setup window:
PROFILE NAME: CALC


1. Press CTRL + SHIFT to enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode.
C THEN 1. Announces the calculator type (scientific or
standard calculator).
C THEN 2. Reads the result.
C THEN 3. Announces the calculator mode (hex, decimal,
octal, binary, and so on).


2.  Press S (for Setup) to display the Screen Magnifier/2 Setup window.
WHAT YOU HEAR:


Figure 1. Screen Magnifier/2 Setup Window
Screen Reader/2 echoes the key presses as they apply to
the functions in the calculator.


The screen above shows the default settings for Screen Magnifier/2.  These
Talking levels have no effect on this profile.
settings may be different if you used the Fast Path.  For detailed
information about how to use these features, refer to "Using Screen
Magnifier/2" on page 23.


Magnification
HELP FOR WINDOWS


When you first open the Screen Magnifier/2 Setup window, the selection cursor
The Help for Windows program is used to display help
is on the MAGNIFICATION entry field and the default setting is 4.  (Remember,
information for programs running under Windows.
if you used the Fast Path, the settings displayed in this window may be
different from the default settings.)  The valid settings for magnification
are from 2 to 32 times normal size.


To change the magnification setting, either type a number into the entry
PROFILE NAME: WINHELP
field or use the mouse to click on the spin button.


If you click on the spin button, the magnification setting changes
C THEN H. Reads general help.
immediately. If you type a value, the magnification does not change until
you move the cursor to another field or select OK.


NOTE: Do not select OK until you have finished making all the setting
WHAT YOU HEAR:
changes you want because the window will close immediately.


For detailed information, refer to "Setting Magnification" on page 24.
For chatty and moderate, Screen Reader/2 reads the help
information.  For quiet, the help information is not read
automatically.


Mouse Sensitivity
QUICKEN 2 FOR WINDOWS


The default value for mouse sensitivity is 20.  The valid settings are from 1
Quicken 2 is a personal financial program that helps you
to 20.  The default setting of 20 is the most sensitive setting, which means
balance your checkbook, pay bills, and track investments.
that the mouse pointer is most responsive to the movements of the physical
This profile was written for Quicken for Windows, version
mouse.  The lower the setting number, the less responsive the mouse pointer.
2.0.
If you plan to use Screen Magnifier/2 at a high magnification level, you will
probably want to use a low mouse-sensitivity setting.


To change the mouse sensitivity, either move the cursor to the MOUSE
PROFILE NAME: QW
SENSITIVITY field and type a new value or use the mouse to click on the spin
button.


If you click on the spin button, the mouse sensitivity changes immediately.
C THEN A. Reads the current list item with the column
If you type a value, the sensitivity does not change until you either move
titles.
the cursor to another field or select OK. Again, do not select OK until
C THEN B. Reads the column title and entry.
you're ready to close the Screen Magnifier/2 Setup window.
C THEN D. Reads information based on the column function.


For detailed information, refer to "Specifying Mouse Sensitivity" on page 26.
WHAT YOU HEAR:


Focus Tracking
In chatty or moderate modes, the column titles are read
as you enter information into checks or the registers
with one-line settings.  When you use reports, the


The default value for FOCUS TRACKING is ON, which means that the mouse
category name is read for the selected item.  Also, when
pointer will move automatically to the current area of interest.  To turn
you change columns, the column title is read; when you
focus tracking off, either click on the checkbox or press ALT + F.
change categories, the category name is read.


To toggle focus tracking back on, click on the checkbox again or press ALT +
When you set up a budget, the category name is read along
F againThe focus-tracking setting takes effect immediately.
with the entry informationAlso, when you change
columns, the column title is read; when you change
categories, the category name is read.


For detailed information, refer to "Toggling Focus Tracking" on page 39.
Quiet reads only the entry information without the column
titles.


Dithering
NOTE:  When you use reports, if you have turned off the
Use Color option, autospeaks are not heard.


The default value for DITHERING is OFF.  To turn dithering on, either click
WORD FOR WINDOWS
on the checkbox or press ALT + D.


To toggle dithering off, click on the checkbox again or press ALT + D again.
The Word for Windows program is a word-processing tool
The dithering setting takes effect immediately.
which can help you to create professional-looking
documents.  You can use Word in conjunction with the
WordScan Plus program to scan in paper documents to edit
on your computer with the Word program.


For detailed information, refer to "Toggling Dithering" on page 40.
This profile is for Microsoft Word, version 2.0.


Reverse Video
PROFILE NAME: MSWORD


The default value for REVERSE VIDEO is OFF.
C THEN 1. Announces the font style.
C THEN 2. Announces the font name.
C THEN 3. Announces the font point size.
C THEN 4. Reads the highlighted portion in grammar
checking.
C THEN 5. Reads the line with the misspelled word.
C THEN H. Reads general help.
C THEN 0. Reads the status line.
C THEN #. Announces the cursor position.
C THEN A. Reads the text page.


To reverse the video display, either click on the checkbox or press ALT + V.
WHAT YOU HEAR:
The reverse-video setting takes effect immediately.


To restore the display to the original colors, click on the checkbox again or
Screen Reader/2 spells the misspelled word when using the
press ALT + V again.
spelling-checker tool.


For detailed information, refer to "Reversing Video" on page 36.
With chatty, the explanation for the current highlighted
menu item is read.


Mouse Mode
WORDPERFECT FOR WINDOWS


The default value for MOUSE MODE is FREE.  The other settings are CENTERED
WordPerfect is a word-processing program used to create
and RELATIVE(The current mouse mode is indicated by a black circle in one
documentsThis profile is for WordPerfect for Windows,
of the auto-radio buttons.)
version 5.2.


To change the mouse mode, click on the auto-radio button next to the mode you
PROFILE NAME: WPWINFIL
want to use. Or, you can use the arrow keys to select the auto-radio button
you want.  The mouse-mode setting takes effect immediately.


For detailed information, refer to "Specifying the Mouse Mode" on page 27.
C THEN 4. Toggles speaking reveal codes On or Off.


Pushbuttons
C THEN 5. Reads the line with the misspelled word.
C THEN H. Reads general help.
C THEN 0. Reads the status line.
C THEN #. Announces the cursor position in editing mode.


There are five pushbuttons located at the bottom of the Setup window:
WHAT YOU HEAR:


OK is used to confirm and activate the changes you have made to the
Screen Reader/2 reads the misspelled word when you are
Screen Magnifier/2 settingsIt also closes the Setup window.
using the spelling-checker tool.  It also reads messages
generated by the spelling-checker and thesaurus.  Screen
Reader/2 reads the reveal code at the cursor position
when the code changes, if it is onThe default is Off.


RESET is used to restore the settings to the values in effect when you
Chatty reads the description of the currently highlighted
opened the Setup window.
task. Moderate and quiet are not active in this profile.


DEFAULT is used to restore the values to those that were in effect when
LIMITATIONS: Screen Reader/2 cannot detect when a word
Screen Magnifier/2 was first installed.
is underlined, double underlined, or red-lined. This is
due to the underlines being drawn rather than being part
of the font of the character.


CANCEL is used to close the Setup window without activating any changes.
WORDSCAN PLUS FOR WINDOWS


NOTE:  You can also press ESC to close the Setup window without
The WordScan Plus program, version 1.1, is an optical-character-recognition program that works with a
activating changes.
page scanner or FAX file to convert printed documents
into text that you can edit on your computer. The Setup
window has settings that can only be changed by using a
mouse. Screen Reader/2 can perform mouse functions
through key sequences. However, you must have a mouse
installed on your system for the WordScan Plus key
sequences to work.


HELP provides general information about the Screen Magnifier/2 program.
PROFILE NAME: WORDSCAN
(You can also get context-sensitive help for the currently selected
setting or pushbutton by pressing F1.)


Using Screen Magnifier/2
C THEN 1. Sets the program for what you want to capture
This section discusses all of the Screen Magnifier/2 functions and explains
from the document.
how to use them. You'll learn about:
C THEN 2. Sets the page orientation of the document.
C THEN 3. Sets the type quality.
C THEN A. Sets the source of the document image.
C THEN 4. Automatically sets the brightness level to
lighten or darken the source document. (This
feature is available only if your scanner has
an automatic brightness setting.)
C THEN 5. Reads the status of WordScan Plus settings.
(This key sequence will work without a mouse
installed.)
C THEN 7. Starts processing automatically.
C THEN 8. Starts the processing preview.


    Increasing and decreasing magnification and mouse sensitivity
WHAT YOU HEAR


    Turning off magnification temporarily


    Specifying the mouse mode
(9) WordScan is a trademark of Calera Recognition Systems, Inc.


    Using the reading features
Screen Reader/2 reads the progress-monitor information so
that you know how much of the document has been
processed.


    Checking your position on the Desktop
When using chatty, the Setup category is spoken when a
setting is changed using the key sequences C THEN 1
through C THEN 8 and C THEN A described above.


    Reversing the video display for higher contrast
SAVING YOUR SCREEN READER/2 SETTINGS


    Turning focus tracking and dithering on and off
As you use a profile, you might find that it does not
work exactly as you would like. For example, you might
want to change the browse and echo settings in the edit
facility profile. Using the information provided in the
profile discussions earlier in this chapter, you can
change various attributes to suit your needs.


    Returning the mouse to the last focus point
If you want the revised profile to start automatically
when you start Screen Reader/2, use key sequence B THEN *
to save your changes. The next time you start Screen
Reader/2, your customized profiles will be ready to use.


    Locking mouse movement
NOTE: If you have added a new profile to the tier and then saved your changes, that new profile must be present the next time you start Screen Reader/2.
If the profile tier is not exactly as it was when you saved your changes, the changes you saved will not be active. When the profile tier is restored to the way it was when you saved changes, they will be active.


    Getting help
Settings are saved in a file with a name based on the current program name and the extension .STO; for example, BOOKMGR.STO. These settings are saved in this file in the Screen Reader/2 directory to be recalled the next time you use that program.


     Stopping Screen Magnifier/2
Key sequence B THEN * is also used to save the following Screen Reader/2 settings:
<pre>
BLANK          Bottom.
CAPS.          Dictionary.
FORCESPELL.    Format.
GRAPHICS.      Icons.
IGNORE.        Left.
LOCKSTATUS.     Mode.
NOISE          Numbering.
PAUSE.          Pitch.
POINTER.        Rate.
RIGHT.          Spaces.
SPELLCAPS.      Stopping
TABLE.          Top.
TRAILING.      Trap
VIEW.          Viewport.
VOLUME.        Word definitions.
WRAP.
</pre>
Refer to the Set command in the PAL Reference online book for a description of each of these settings.


NOTE:  If you are a new OS/2 user, you might want to go through the OS/2
NOTE:  Refer to the section "Screen Reader/2 Notebooks" for information about saving settings in your Screen Reader/2 Settings, Synthesizer Settings, and Message Settings notebooks.
tutorials to learn about this operating system.  The Tutorial is
located in the Information folder on the OS/2 Desktop.  More
introductory information is contained in the Start Here folder.


Using Screen Magnifier/2 Functions
STARTING SCREEN READER/2


This section contains a detailed description of each of the Screen
The Screen Reader/2 installation program sets up Screen Reader/2 to start automatically when you turn on your system.
Magnifier/2 functions and tells you how to change the program settings to
your satisfaction.  Once you have the functions set the way you want them,
you can stop Screen Magnifier/2 and it will "remember" your settings when you
restart the program.


NOTE: For a summary of the program's functions and the associated key and
However, you may want to restart Screen Reader/2 to change the default profile tier or to activate changes you have made to the default tier. You can restart it by following these steps:
mouse-button sequences, refer to the "Quick Reference" on page 47.
# Open the Independence Series folder on your OS/2 Desktop.
# Open the Screen Reader/2 program object in the Independence Series folder.
# If Screen Reader/2 is running, you will be asked if you are sure you want to stop Screen Reader/2 and restart it. Press ENTER to restart the system.


Setting Magnification
You should hear a message telling you that Screen Reader/2 started (up to 30 seconds after you perform these two steps).  If you hear three short beeps instead, your synthesizer may be turned off.  Turn on your synthesizer and press ENTER.  Screen Reader/2 should now
start.


Screen Magnifier/2 enables you to magnify your Desktop and applications from
If you hear three beeps when you would expect your synthesizer to start talking (for example, when you start your computer), verify that the synthesizer is turned on and that the cables are all connected. Then press ENTER. If you resolved the problem, speech should begin shortly.
2 times up to 32 times normal size, in increments of one.  This means that
If not, you will hear three beeps again. If you press ENTER, Screen Reader/2 will be stopped.
you can enlarge the information on your computer screen to exactly the size
that is best for you.


Increasing Magnification
NOTE: For information about problems related to starting Screen Reader/2, refer to the "Problem Determination" section of the Getting Started manual (either in print or on cassette).


You can use any of these ways to increase the magnification level:
CHANGING THE WAY SCREEN READER/2 STARTS


1. Enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode by pressing CTRL + SHIFT. Then, press the
When you install Screen Reader/2, the installation program creates a batch file called SRD2.CMD. This file starts Screen Reader/2 and loads the base profile automatically. The base profile contains the basic Screen Reader/2 key sequences and cannot be removed from
UP ARROW key. Each time you press it, the magnification increases by
the profile tier. However, you can specify additional profiles to be loaded at startup time by modifying the SRD2.CMD batch file.
one. If you hold the UP ARROW, the magnification increases rapidly.


OR
The SRD2.CMD batch file contains the following line:


2.  Enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode, then hold down mouse button 1 and click
START SRD SRD2
mouse button 2.  Each time you click mouse button 2, the magnification
level increases.


OR
The command START SRD starts the program; SRD2 is the base profile that is loaded for all sessions. To add other profiles to the batch file, type the profile name after the SRD2 profile name. The additional profiles will be loaded each time you start Screen Reader/2, and
they will be on all tiers like Screen Reader/2. However, unlike the base profile, these additional profiles can be removed from the profile tier. Refer to the section "Adding and Removing Profiles" for more information.


3.  Use the Screen Magnifier/2 Setup window.
SPECIFYING SYNTHESIZER SETTINGS


When you have set the magnification to your satisfaction, leave Screen
You can also specify synthesizer settings in the startup command file. Screen Reader/2 uses the synthesizer settings specified in SRD.TTS, unless you specify otherwise. (The extension .TTS stands for Text To Speech.)  To use a different synthesizer settings (.TTS)
Magnifier/2 mode to return to your application.
file or more than one synthesizer, insert the following command in the SRD2.CMD batch file.


Decreasing Magnification
SRD [/s xxx.TTS] [profile name]


You can use any of these ways to decrease the magnification level:
NOTE: xxx is a synthesizer settings file name. profile name is optional.


1Enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode by pressing CTRL + SHIFT.  Then, press the
You can enter the command more than once in the SRD.CMD file. For example:
DOWN ARROW key. Each time you press it, the magnification decreases by
  /s acc.tts /s pss.tts srd2 myprof
one.  If you hold the DOWN ARROW, the magnification decreases rapidly.
In this example, Screen Reader/2 can send output to either synthesizer specified in the synthesizer settings file. Unless you use a customized profile that uses the DEVICE command, Screen Reader/2 will send output to only the synthesizer indicated by the first parameter.


OR
NOTE: Use /s only if you want to use a different file, or files, than the default file (SRD.TTS) that was created when you installed Screen Reader/2.


2.  Enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode, then hold down mouse button 2 and click
ADDING PROFILES WITH THE SETTINGS NOTEBOOK
mouse button 1.  Each time you click mouse button 1, the magnification
level decreases.


OR
If you want to add a profile to the base (for example, a profile you created that contains customized key sequences), you can either edit the SRD2.CMD file and add the profile name to the end of the command, or change the file using the Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook.


3Use the Screen Magnifier/2 Setup window.
To change the file using the Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook, follow these steps:
# Open the Independence Series folderIt is on your OS/2 Desktop.
# Select the Screen Reader/2 program object in the Independence Series folder, but do not press ENTER.
# Press SHIFT+F10 to display the Screen Reader/2 pop-up menu. The first item on the pop-up menu is Open. It has an arrow to its right, indicating that there is a submenu.
# Press the RIGHT ARROW key to display the submenu.
# Select the first item, Settings, to display the Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook. The cursor is at the first character of an entry field containing the Screen Reader/2 parameters currently in SRD2.CMD.
# Type any additional parameters.
# Press ALT+F4 to save your changes and close the notebook.


When you have set the magnification to your satisfaction, leave Screen
SCREEN READER/2 NOTEBOOKS
Magnifier/2 mode to return to your application.


Turning Off Magnification
Each object on the Desktop has a notebook attached to it. Notebooks are so called because they actually look like notebooks, with tabs separating the sections. Each tab relates to a topic contained in the notebook and each topic contains one or more pages.  You can change values
and settings on the pages.


From time to time, you might want to have your Desktop displayed in
The Screen Reader/2 object has three notebooks:
non-magnified mode.  This could be helpful when you want to perform routine
OS/2 or PM tasks and do not need to have the screen magnified.  To this end,
Screen Magnifier/2 provides a means for turning off magnification
temporarily.


To turn off magnification, enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode, then press N (for
The Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook is used to change the starting parameters for Screen Reader/2.
Non-magnified).


The view changes from magnified to non-magnified.  If you want to perform
The Synthesizer Settings notebook is used to change the values for your synthesizer.
non-Screen Magnifier/2 tasks, leave Screen Magnifier/2 mode by pressing CTRL
+ SHIFT.  Now you can perform any of the Desktop functions you require.


When you want to return to the magnified mode, enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode,
The Message Settings notebook is used to change the way Screen Reader/2 speaks.
then press N again.


Specifying Mouse Sensitivity
NOTE:  If you are satisfied with the way your synthesizer is working, you should not change any of the settings in the Synthesizer Settings notebook.


The movements of the mouse pointer on the screen correspond to the movements
DISPLAYING THE SCREEN READER/2 NOTEBOOKS
of the physical mouse on your desk; therefore, when Screen Magnifier/2 is
magnifying at a high level, the mouse pointer appears to move rapidly.
Screen Magnifier/2 enables you to adjust the mouse sensitivity so that the
mouse pointer is less responsive to the movements of the physical mouse.
This gives the visual effect of slowing down the mouse movements.


When you increase the magnification level, Screen Magnifier/2 automatically
To display the Screen Reader/2 notebooks:
decreases the mouse sensitivity for you to make it easier to follow. If you
# Open the Independence Series folder. It is on your Desktop.
change from a high magnification level to a lower one, you might want to
# Select the Screen Reader/2 object in the Independence Series folder. Do not press ENTER.
increase the sensitivity so the mouse pointer is more responsive to the
# Press SHIFT+F10 to display the Screen Reader/2 pop-up menu. The first item is Open. It has an arrow to its right, indicating that there is a submenu.
movements of the physical mouse.
# Press the RIGHT ARROW key to display the submenu.
The items on the submenu are:
:Settings.
:Start/Restart.
:Synthesizer Settings.
:Message Settings.
:About.
NOTE: The Start/Restart and ABOUT items are not notebooks.


Increasing Sensitivity
START/RESTART enables you to start or restart Screen Reader/2.


To make the mouse more sensitive, first enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode.  Then,
ABOUT describes the Screen Reader/2 license and copyright.
press M (for More sensitivity).  Each time you press the M key, the
mouse-sensitivity level increases by one step.  Holding down the M key
increases sensitivity rapidly.


When you have set the mouse sensitivity to your satisfaction, leave Screen
5. Select the notebook with which you want to work:
Magnifier/2 mode to return to your application or the Desktop.


HINT:  To help you judge the correct settings for your environment, you can
Use the Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook to view and modify the parameters that are used to start Screen Reader/2 and to change the current icon and title.
move the mouse while adjusting the sensitivity.


Decreasing Sensitivity
Use the Synthesizer Settings notebook to change the settings for your synthesizer.


To make the mouse less sensitive, first enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode.  Then,
Use the Message Settings notebook to display and change the dictionary and to change the way
press L (for Less sensitivity).  Each time you press the L key, the
Screen Reader/2 pronounces and spells words.
mouse-sensitivity level decreases by one step.  Holding down the L key
decreases sensitivity rapidly.


When you have set the mouse sensitivity to your satisfaction, leave Screen
For more information about a notebook and how to change its values, press F1 while the notebook is open.
Magnifier/2 mode to return to your application.


NOTE:  You can also use the Setup window for this function.
USING SCREEN READER/2 NOTEBOOKS


Specifying the Mouse Mode
To scroll through the notebook pages from one section to another, use one of the following methods:
# Use the ALT+UP ARROW keys to move the cursor to the notebook tabs.  Then use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to move the cursor to the tab you want and press ENTER.  Use the ALT+DOWN ARROW keys to return to the notebook page.
# Use the ALT+PAGE DOWN and ALT+PAGE UP keys to move through the notebook pages. To move the cursor between the different window controls on a notebook page, use the TAB key.  To move the cursor within a control group, use the directional arrow keys. The controls are:


Screen Magnifier/2 enables you to choose the way you want the mouse to work:
CHECK BOXES.
A check box is a two-part control consisting of a
square box and text describing a choice you can make.
A check box acts as a switch.  You press the SPACEBAR
to select a check box, which is then filled in with an
X or check mark.  Check boxes are used for settings
such as acknowledge stop, always stop, and the Screen
Reader/2 Stop key.


    Free
COMBINATION BOXES (COMBO BOX).
A combination box is a control that combines the
functions of a spin button and a list box.  It
contains a list of objects that you can scroll through
and select from to complete the entry field.


    Centered
ENTRY FIELD.
An entry field is a two-part control consisting of
text and a rectangular box.  You can type either one
or more lines in this box, depending on whether it is
a single-line entry field or a multiple-line entry
field.  When an entry field is first displayed, it is
either blank or contains a default value.  To change
the value, type a new value and press ENTER, or TAB to
the next control.  Screen Reader/2 uses entry fields
for stop delay, search strings, notes, dictionary
words and replacements, remarks, key delay, and code
page.


    Relative
LIST BOXES.
A list box is a rectangular box with scroll bars that
usually contains a scrollable list of choices from
which you can select one choice.  Screen Reader/2 uses
list boxes for such functions as saving your changes
to a file.


To specify the mouse mode, enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode, then press O (for
MENU BAR.
mOuse mOde)Each time you press O, the mouse changes modes and the Screen
The action bar is the area at the top of the primary
Magnifier/2 icon changes direction to indicate the current mode.
window.  It contains actions that are available in
this window.  The action bar is on line 2 of the
Screen Reader/2 notebooks.  The Synthesizer Settings
notebook has only one choice: FileThe Message
Settings notebook has two choices:  File and Utility.
When you choose either, a pull-down menu is displayed.


Free Mode
PUSHBUTTONS.
A pushbutton is rectangular with rounded corners.  It
contains text that shows the actions in dialog boxes,
secondary windows, and message boxes.  When you select
a pushbutton, the action indicated by the text occurs
immediately.  Pushbuttons are near the bottom of each
notebook page and each dialog window.  The functions
performed by pushbuttons include Undo, Search, Help,
and Cancel.  Use the TAB key and the directional arrow
keys to move the cursor to a pushbutton, then press
ENTER to perform the function.


The FREE mode means that the mouse pointer moves freely around the screen, in
RADIO BUTTONS.
response to and corresponding to the movements of the physical mouseAs you
Radio buttons are round buttons on the screen with
move the mouse pointer close to the edge of the Screen Magnifier/2 view, the
text beside them.  You can select only one in a group
screen moves so you can see the rest of the magnified area.
of radio buttonsAuto-radio buttons are
automatically selected when you move to them.  You use
radio buttons when setting up your Desktop and when
setting such Screen Reader/2 options as Indexing.


When the mouse is in the free mode (the default), the Screen Magnifier/2
SCROLLABLE LISTS.
magnifying glass is in its standard orientation with the handle pointing to
A scrollable list is a vertical listing of values.
the lower right, at approximately 4 o'clock, like this:
Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to move through a
scrollable list.  If the window containing the values
is not wide enough to display all of the information
in one column, you can also use RIGHT ARROW and LEFT
ARROW to hear the rest of the information.  The HOME


Figure 2. Mouse Pointer in Free
key moves the cursor to the top of the list and the
Mode
END key moves the cursor to the bottom of the list.


Centered Mode
To change a value (such as a spelling-table entry or a
synthesizer code) in a scrollable list, press ENTER
while the cursor is on the correct value to display an
edit box containing the text value.  After changing
the text, press ENTER to confirm the change.  To
return to the scrollable list without changing the
value, press ESCAPE.  Screen Reader/2 uses scrollable
lists for synthesizer codes and values, ASCII set
conversion table, announcements, spelling tables, and
the dictionary.


The CENTERED mode means that the mouse pointer stays at the center of the
SPIN BUTTONS.
magnified areaWhen you move the physical mouse around on the Desktop, the
Spin buttons are controls that enable you to choose an
mouse pointer stays in the center of the Screen Magnifier/2 view as the
entry from a list of choices.  Only one choice is
screen pans behind the pointer.
displayed at a time.  Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW
keys to cycle through these choicesSpin buttons are
used for all the COM port parameters, the synthesizer
codes, the ASCII character set, and buffer management
parameters.


In the centered mode, the handle of the Screen Magnifier/2 magnifying glass
SCREEN READER/2 SETTINGS NOTEBOOK
is pointing to the upper right, at approximately 2 o'clock, like this:


Figure 3. Mouse Pointer in Centered
The Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook enables you to
Mode
change Screen Reader/2 characteristics and edit the
SRD2.CMD file to change the way Screen Reader/2 starts.


Relative Mode
Select Settings on the Screen Reader/2 Open submenu to
display the Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook which has
the following tabs:


The RELATIVE mode provides a constant indicator of your relative position on
PARAMETERS.   This page enables you to view and modify
the Desktop. For example, let's say you want to open a program object that
the parameters that are used to start
is near the bottom left of the DesktopWhen you move the pointer to that
Screen Reader/2These parameters are
object, the pointer will indicate, by its location, that you are now in the
used by the the SRD2.CMD file.
bottom-left corner of the Desktop.


When you move the physical mouse, the view moves behind the mouse pointer so
At the bottom of the notebook page are
that the mouse pointer always indicates the position of the magnified view,
three pushbuttons:
relative to the rest of the Desktop.


If you open another window or change focus to one already open, the mouse
UNDO.  Choose this pushbutton to reset
pointer will indicate your new location on the Desktop by its position on the
any changes to the values that were
screen.
read when you opened the Settings
notebook.
 
DEFAULT.  Choose this button to change
the parameter to the default: SRD2.
 
HELP.  Choose this button to display
general help for the entire page.
 
GENERAL.      This page enables you to change the name
of the Screen Reader/2 object, or icon,
that represents the program.  You change
the name by typing a new name in the Title
 
field.  You can change the icon that
represents this object by using the CREATE
ANOTHER, EDIT, or FIND pushbuttons.
 
Press F1 for more information about how to make a
selection or for technical information about your current
choices.  F1 displays a contextual help window.  If you
need information about the help window, press F1 while
you use the help facility.
 
After making your changes, press ALT+F4.  Your changes
will be saved automatically and the notebook is closed.
 
SYNTHESIZER SETTINGS NOTEBOOK
 
Select Synthesizer Settings on the Screen Reader/2 Open
submenu and press ENTER.  The first page of the
Synthesizer Settings notebook is displayed for you to
make your changes.
 
Synthesizer settings are contained in .TTS files.  The
Synthesizer Settings notebook has the following tabs:
 
SYNTHESIZER CODES.    This page enables you to change the
following synthesizer codes:
 
CONTROL.  Control codes direct speech output to the synthesizer. The codes include starting and stopping speech, initializing the synthesizer, and sending and receiving index markers.
 
PITCH.  Pitch is the tone, or frequency, of the synthesizer's voice.  It can range from low
to high.
 
RATE.  Rate is the speed of speech.
 
VOLUME.  Volume is the loudness of speech.
 
SPECIAL.  Special codes are synthesizer-specific and can be set up for such features as
changing voices and languages.
After setting the code, you can use a keypad key sequence to send it.  To activate a special
code, press key sequence A THEN A THEN N; n represents the number (1 to 9) assigned to the
special code.
 
COM PORT. On this page, you can change six synthesizer communications parameters:
 
COMMUNICATIONS (SERIAL) PORT.
The serial connector to which
your synthesizer is connected.
 
BAUD RATE.  The speed (bits per second) at which your computer and synthesizer send data to
each other.
 
WORD LENGTH.  The size of the data packet that your synthesizer and computer use to
communicate.
 
PARITY.  The method that the synthesizer and computer use to detect transmission errors.
 
NUMBER OF STOP BITS.  Signals that are sent to the computer or the synthesizer to indicate
the end of the data packet.
 
HANDSHAKING.  Another word for protocol (such as XON/XOFF).
 
OTHER. On this page, the settings are:
 
INDEXING.  The capability of some synthesizers to send markers back through the asynchronous communications channel after each word is spoken.  This capability enables the Screen Reader/2
pointer to move to the beginning of each word as it is spoken.  This setting is checked if your synthesizer supports this feature.
 
TYPE.  The Serial setting is checked, indicating that your synthesizer is connected externally to a serial port.
You should change the setting to Internal only if you have been told by your synthesizer
manufacturer to do so.
 
COMMENTS.  Usually contains the name of the synthesizer(s) associated with this file.
 
(This is a freeform field so you can type in any data you want.)
 
STOP. On this page, the settings are:
 
DELAY. The time Screen Reader/2 waits to send more text after it sends a Stop command.
 
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP.
This setting is checked if your synthesizer returns a code after having processed the Stop
command.
 
ALWAYS STOP.
This setting is checked if your
synthesizer can handle a Stop
command independent of the
state of the protocol.
 
ASCII SET. This option enables you to specify your synthesizer's ASCII character-set support. You can select LOWER (128 characters), FULL (256 characters), or CONVERT (256 characters with conversion). LOWER means the synthesizer can speak characters only in the lower half
of the character set. FULL means the synthesizer can speak the entire character set. CONVERT is a Screen Reader/2 process that allows some synthesizers to speak the full table.
 
If you are using an InfoVox VoxBox synthesizer or Braille device, you will probably select Convert. With this choice, you also specify the code page your system uses, and you
type the string to send to the synthesizer for each ASCII character.
 
BUFFER MANAGEMENT.  On this page, you specify whether or not to activate Screen Reader/2's buffer management or Smart Talk features.
 
Check the BUFFER MANAGEMENT check box if your synthesizer will not accept any commands while its buffer is full (indicated by a slow response to a Stop command).
 
If you have buffer management set to On, you select the number of characters to wait before Screen Reader/2 searches for a good breaking point to start and stop speech output. You also specify the string to send when Screen Reader/2 detects that the synthesizer buffer is full and the string that the synthesizer returns when its buffer is empty.
 
Check the SMART TALK check box if your synthesizer waits until it receives all data from a request before beginning to speak. Smart Talk causes Screen Reader/2 to send a Talk command to the synthesizer before Screen Reader/2 reads all the text. Most synthesizers work well with Smart Talk active, although there may be extra pauses.
 
SAVING YOUR CHANGES
 
You can save changes you made to the synthesizer settings in either of two ways:
# You can save the changes in the same synthesizer file. To do this, press ALT+F4.
# You can save the changes in a different synthesizer file by doing the following:
#:a. Select the File choice on the action bar and press ENTER.
#:b. Select Save to file from the pull-down menu to display a Save as file-dialog window. In this window, you can type a full drive, directory, and file name, or just a file name, and then select a drive and directory from the scrollable lists.
#:c. To confirm that you want to save the file, press ENTER or choose the SAVE pushbutton.
 
CHANGING SETTINGS IN OTHER FILES
 
To change synthesizer settings in files other than the one you are using, do the following:
# Open the Configuration - Screen Reader/2 object in your Independence Series folder. All Screen Reader/2-supported synthesizer files are displayed as data objects in this folder.  These objects are identified by their file names. The default synthesizer file that Screen Reader/2 uses is SRD.TTS. Screen Reader/2 may also be using additional (or different) .TTS files if you changed the way Screen Reader/2 starts.
# Select the synthesizer settings file you want, then press ENTER.
# When the Synthesizer Settings notebook is displayed, make your changes, then press F10 to display the File pull-down menu.
# Select Save to file to save the changes you just made.
 
NOTE: If you have added or removed a .TTS file and the change is not reflected in the Configuration - Screen Reader/2 folder, you should select the Refresh Contents object. When this object is selected, it closes the Configuration - Screen Reader/2 folder and takes you back to the Independence Series folder. When you open the Configuration - Screen Reader/2 folder again, the .TTS file list will be updated.
 
MESSAGE SETTINGS NOTEBOOK
 
You use the Message Settings notebook to work with spelling tables, Screen Reader/2 messages, and the dictionary.
 
Select Message Settings on the Screen Reader/2 Open submenu to display the Message Settings notebook.
 
The Message Settings notebook has the following tabs:
 
SPELLING TABLES.  On this page, you can change the ASCII
strings Screen Reader/2 sends to the
synthesizer for each entry in Screen
Reader/2's five spelling tables.  Each
spelling table has 256 entries.  The
spelling tables and their functions
are:
 
DEFAULT.  Tells Screen Reader/2
what to send to the synthesizer for
characters on the display when
Screen Reader/2 spells characters
or words.
 
PHONETIC.  Same as the default table, but all letters have phonetic names.
 
COLOR.  Tells Screen Reader/2 what to send to the synthesizer for 64 color attributes.
 
STANDARD KEYS.  Contains the description of the standard keyboard key for each ASCII code.
 
EXTENDED KEYS.  Contains the description of extended keys such as function keys and cursor
movement keys.
 
NOTE:  The Standard Keys and Extended Keys tables are used for the key-echo function.
 
OTHER. On this page, the settings are:
 
KEY DELAY. The amount of time Screen Reader/2 waits for a second key press before canceling a key sequence.
 
KEYPAD. If this setting is checked, you will hear a warning message if a keypad is not attached.
 
STOP. If checked, Screen Reader/2 sends the Stop command each time a key is pressed on the keypad.
 
CODE PAGE. Enables you to specify the code page that should be used with this file. Unless you are creating a file for another set of characters, this number should be identical to that of the code page you are currently using.
 
COMMENTS. Contains information about the current code page.
 
ANNOUNCEMENTS. On this page, you can change what your synthesizer says for the following types of announcements:
Screen Reader/2 formats and modes.
Keypad and help messages.
Viewport messages.
Error messages and information messages.
 
DICTIONARY. On this page, you can tell Screen Reader/2 how the synthesizer should pronounce certain words which it might otherwise mispronounce, if following the normal rules of pronunciation. You tell Screen Reader/2 how to pronounce words by spelling them like they sound.


NOTE:  You might notice that the mouse pointer moves more slowly in this mode
For example, OS (for Operating System) is included in your dictionary list of words. Because your synthesizer might read it as "OZ," the replacement letters "O S" provide the correct pronunciation to be used.
than in the other mouse modes.  This is because, in the relative mode,
the movement of the pointer is proportionate to the magnification.
The higher the magnification, the slower the pointer moves because it
is traveling a relatively smaller distance.


In the relative mode, the handle of the magnifying glass is pointing to the
USING THE DICTIONARY AND SPELLING TABLES
upper left, at approximately 10 o'clock, like this:


Figure 4. Mouse Pointer in Relative
If you select the Utility choice on the action bar in the Message Settings notebook and press ENTER, a pull-down menu with the following choices appears:
Mode


When you have changed the mouse mode to your satisfaction, leave Screen
Import dictionary file.
Magnifier/2 mode to return to your application or the Desktop.
Export dictionary file.
Import spelling table.
Export spelling table.


NOTE:  You can also use the Setup window to choose among these three modes.
Use this pull-down menu to import or export dictionary or spelling-table ASCII files. When you choose any of these menu items, a dialog window appears that has a filename entry field. Type the name of the file containing your ASCII spelling table or dictionary. If you are exporting
a spelling-table ASCII file, you must select the spelling-table name from a scrollable list.  To perform the import or export action, press ENTER.


Using the Reading Function
SAVING YOUR CHANGES


One of the most useful features of the Screen Magnifier/2 program is the
You can change the message settings that you are currently using. The changes take effect immediately and remain in effect only until you turn off Screen Reader/2.
reading function. This function displays a special cursor that automatically
However, you can choose to save these settings for future use, and you can also change them in other files for future use.
pans across each line of text in the active window, updating the Screen
Magnifier/2 view as it goes. When the cursor reaches the end of a line of
text, it moves quickly to the left side of the window and starts scanning the
next line.  When the cursor reaches the end of the text, you hear a two-note
audio cue and the cursor changes back to the magnifying glass.


Starting the Reading Function
You can save changes you made to the message settings in either of two ways:


1. Before you start the reading function, make sure you place the mouse
1. You can save the changes in the same message-settings file. To do this, press ALT+F4.
pointer where you would like to start reading.


2. Enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode and press the ALT key.
2. You can save the changes in a different message-settings file. To do this:


Reading Features
a. Select the File choice on the action bar and press ENTER.


The reading function has several features that make it even more helpful.
b. Select Save to file from the pull-down menu to display a Save as file-dialog window. In this
These are listed below along with the keys that activate them:
window, you can type a full drive, directory, and file name, or just a file name, and then select a drive and directory from the scrollable lists.


ACTION                                                KEY
c. To confirm that you want to save the file, press ENTER or choose the SAVE pushbutton.


Increase reading speed                                Right Arrow
CHANGING SETTINGS IN OTHER FILES


Decrease reading speed                                Left Arrow
To change Screen Reader/2 messages in files other than the one you are using:


Pause while reading                                    P (Pause)
1. Open the Configuration - Screen Reader/2 object in your Independence Series folder.


Home (top of window)                                  H (Home)
All Screen Reader/2-supported message files are displayed as data objects in this folder.  These objects are identified by their file names. Message files have the extension .CNF. The default message file that Screen Reader/2 uses is SRD.CNF.


Next line                                              T (nexT)
2. To open a notebook to change the Screen Reader/2 messages and dictionary file, select the SRD.CNF file and press ENTER. The first page of the Screen Reader/2 Message Settings notebook is displayed.


Previous line                                          K (bacK)
3. Make the changes you want, then press F10 to move the cursor to the File option on the action bar of the Message Settings notebook.


Stop reading                                          Alt
4. Press ENTER to display the pull-down menu.


INCREASING THE READING SPEED
5. Press ENTER to select the Save to file option.


When you first activate the reading function, the cursor pans across the
6. The Save CNF File window is displayed. In this window, you can type a full drive, directory, and file name, or just a file name, and then select a drive and directory from the scrollable lists.
screen fairly slowly.  If you prefer to read faster, press the RIGHT ARROW
key.


Each time you press RIGHT ARROW, the cursor speed increases slightly. If you
7. To confirm that you want to save the file, press ENTER or choose the SAVE pushbutton.
want the speed to increase rapidly, hold down the RIGHT ARROW key until the
cursor moves at the speed you want.


HINT:  You will probably want the reading speed to be slower at higher
SYNTHESIZERS
magnifications.


DECREASING THE READING SPEED
This section contains technical data about the Screen Reader/2-supported synthesizers.  Included are the default Screen Reader/2 settings for each synthesizer and the required switch settings, if any.


To decrease the reading speed, press the LEFT ARROW key.
NOTE: To use a synthesizer not listed in this User's Guide, contact either your synthesizer
manufacturer or the place where you purchased Screen Reader/2 to determine support and setup
procedures.


Either press the LEFT ARROW key repeatedly or hold it until the cursor slows
ACCENT BY AICOM
to the speed you want.


PAUSE WHILE READING
SOFTWARE SETTINGS


The PAUSE feature enables you to stop the reading cursor temporarily. Simply
The following values for the Accent synthesizer are in the ACC.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.
press P to stop reading; press P again to restart the reading cursor.
<pre>
COM PORT.        COM1.
BAUD RATE.      9600.
PARITY.          None.
LENGTH.          7 bits.
STOP BITS.      1 stop bit.
RATE.            Active.
VOLUME.          Active.
PITCH.          Active.
SPECIAL.        Active for voices 1 to 9.
STOP DELAY.      0.
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. No.
ALWAYS STOP.    Yes.
PROTOCOL.        Clear to Send.
INDEXING.        Yes.
CHARACTER SET.  Lower.
</pre>


HOME
HARDWARE SETTINGS


The HOME feature enables you to move the reading cursor to the top of the
Switches 4 and 8 are On; all others are Off.
current window.  Press H to interrupt the reading function and move the
cursor to the beginning of the window in which you are currently reading.
Screen Magnifier/2 will automatically start reading again from the top of the
window.


NEXT LINE
NOTE: If you turn off the Accent synthesizer during a session, you should restart Screen Reader/2 after you turn the Accent on again. Otherwise, you might experience sluggish response.


The NEXT LINE feature moves the reading cursor to the line below the current
(10) Accent and Aicom are registered trademarks of Aicom Corporation.
line.  Press T to move to the next line; Screen Magnifier/2 begins reading
the new line immediately.


PREVIOUS LINE
APOLLO BY DOLPHIN SYSTEMS


The PREVIOUS LINE feature moves the reading cursor to the line above the
SOFTWARE SETTINGS
current line.  Press K to move to the previous line; Screen Magnifier/2
begins reading the new line immediately.


STOPPING THE READING FUNCTION
The following values for the Apollo synthesizer are in the APOLLO.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.


Screen Magnifier/2 stops reading automatically when the cursor reaches the
COM PORT.          COM1.
end of the text in the active window. You can also stop the reading function
BAUD RATE.          9600.
any time you choose by pressing the ALT key. Either way, you hear a two-note
PARITY.            None.
audio cue and the reading cursor changes back to the Screen Magnifier/2
LENGTH.            8 bits.
magnifying glass.
STOP BITS.          1 stop bit.
RATE.              Active.
VOLUME.            1 to 6 active for changing voices.
PITCH.              Active.
SPECIAL.            1 to 8 active for changing languages.
STOP DELAY.        0.
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP.  No.
ALWAYS STOP.        Yes.
PROTOCOL.          Clear to Send.
INDEXING.          Yes.
CHARACTER SET.      Full.


NOTES:
NOTES:


1. When you turn off the reading function, the speed at which you were
1. The Apollo synthesizer changes baud rate by using different cables. When the synthesizer is shipped, the baud rate in the .TTS file is set to 9600. If you have a cable that is different from 9600 baud, change the .TTS file to match your cable.
reading is saved so the next time you begin reading, the cursor moves at
 
that speed.
2.  This synthesizer supports several languages. A different language ROM chip is required for each language. Make sure that you have the correct ROM chip for the language you want.
 
3.  On this synthesizer, an On/Off knob controls volume.
 
AUDAPTER BY PERSONAL DATA SYSTEMS
 
SOFTWARE SETTINGS
 
The following values for the Audapter synthesizer are in the AUD.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.
 
COM PORT.          COM1.
BAUD RATE.          9600.
PARITY.            None.
 


2. There are several Screen Magnifier/2 functions that are allowed while you
(11) Apollo is a trademark of Dolphin Systems.
are in the reading mode:


    Adjusting magnification and mouse sensitivity
(12) Audapter is a trademark of Personal Data Systems.


    Toggling focus tracking and dithering on and off
LENGTH.            8 bits.
STOP BITS.          1 stop bit.
RATE.              Active.
VOLUME.            Active.
PITCH.              Active.
SPECIAL.            1 to 9 active for changing voices
from high (1) to low (9).
STOP DELAY.        0.
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP.  No.
ALWAYS STOP.        Yes.
PROTOCOL.          Clear to Send.
INDEXING.          Yes.
CHARACTER SET.      Lower.


    Reversing video
BRAILLE 'N SPEAK AND BRAILLE BLAZER BY BLAZIE ENGINEERING


    Changing mouse mode
SOFTWARE SETTINGS


Checking Your Relative Position
The following values for the Braille Blazer and Braille
'n Speak products are in the BLAZIE.TTS file.  You can
use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to
change them.


When you are working in the magnified mode, you might lose track of the
COM PORT.          COM1.
position of the magnified area in relation to the Desktop as a whole. Screen
BAUD RATE.          9600.
Magnifier/2 provides two ways for you to check the relative location of the
PARITY.            None.
window with which you are currently working: the locator and the
LENGTH.            8 bits.
relative-position marker.
STOP BITS.          1 stop bit.
RATE.              1 and 9 active.
VOLUME.            Active.
PITCH.              Active.
SPECIAL.            Not active.
STOP DELAY.        0.
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP.  No.
ALWAYS STOP.        Yes.
PROTOCOL.          XON/XOFF.
INDEXING.          Yes.
CHARACTER SET.      Lower.


Using the Locator
CALLTEXT 5050/5010 AND PROSE 2020 BY CENTIGRAM COMMUNICATIONS CORP.


When you activate the locator, the view of the Desktop changes from magnified
NOTE:  The manufacturer of these synthesizers was
to non-magnified and a large yellow-and-red square is displayed to indicate
formerly Speech Plus Corporation.
where you are working on the Desktop.


You can use the mouse to move the locator to a new area of interest.  When
SOFTWARE SETTINGS
you turn off the locator, the new area is magnified.


You can use one of the following methods to display the locator.  First,
enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode, then:


1.  Press the X key.  (It might help you to remember if you think of "X marks
(13) Braille Blazer and Braille 'n Speak are trademarks of Blaize
the spot" on the Desktop.)
Engineering.


OR
The following values for the CallText 5050 and  Prose
2020 synthesizers are in the SP.TTS file.  Note that
these values are the same for the CallText 5050 and Prose
2020.  You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer
Settings notebook to change them.


2. Press and hold mouse button 1 and mouse button 2 until the locator is
COM PORT.           COM1.
displayed.
BAUD RATE.          9600.
PARITY.            None.
LENGTH.            8 bits.
STOP BITS.          1 stop bit.
RATE.              Active.
VOLUME.            Active.
PITCH.              Active.
SPECIAL.            Not active.
STOP DELAY.        0.
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP.  Yes.
ALWAYS STOP.        Yes.
PROTOCOL.          XON/XOFF.
INDEXING.          Yes.
CHARACTER SET.      Lower.


NOTE:  Make sure you hold down the mouse buttons until the locator is
DECTALK BY DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
displayed.  If you just click the mouse buttons, you will leave Screen
Magnifier/2 mode.


To remove the locator from the screen and return to magnified mode, simply
SOFTWARE SETTINGS
press X again.  Or, you can press and hold mouse button 1 and mouse button 2
until the locator disappears.


Using the Relative-Position Marker
The following values for the DECtalk synthesizer are in the DEC1.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change these values.


Screen Magnifier/2 also provides a relative-position marker that enables you
COM PORT.          COM1.
to see where you are on the Desktop without leaving the magnified mode. The
BAUD RATE.          1200.
relative-position marker is a flashing, reverse-video box that indicates the
PARITY.            None.
location of the area in which you are currently working.
LENGTH.            8 bits.
STOP BITS.          1 stop bit.
RATE.              Active.
VOLUME.            Volume is controlled by a thumb-wheel on the unit.
PITCH.              1 to 9 active.
SPECIAL.            1 to 9 active for changing voices (refer to note).
STOP DELAY.        0.
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP.  No.
ALWAYS STOP.        Yes.
PROTOCOL.          XON/XOFF.
INDEXING.          Yes.
CHARACTER SET.      Lower.
BUFFER MANAGEMENT.  Yes.


To display the relative-position marker, enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode, then
(14) CallText 5050/5010 is a trademark and Prose 2020 is a registered trademark of Centigram Communications Corporation.
press R (for Relative).


The view remains magnified so that the marker denotes your relative position
(15) DECtalk is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
only.  That is, the reverse-video box indicates where the Screen Magnifier/2
view is located in relation to the rest of the Desktop.  The higher the
magnification factor, the smaller the relative-position marker.


To remove the relative-position marker, just press R again or move the mouse.
NOTE:  The DEC1.TTS file is set with Special 1 to 9 active for changing voices. These are the voices:
The marker will be removed from the screen.


Leave Screen Magnifier/2 mode to return to your application or the Desktop.
1.  Perfect Paul.
2.  Beautiful Betty.
3.  Huge Harry.
4.  Doctor Dennis.
5.  Kit the Kid.
6.  Rough Rita.
7.  Uppity Ursula.
8.  Frail Frank.
9.  Whispering Wendy.


Reversing Video
HARDWARE SETTINGS


The default PM screen is made up primarily of dark letters and objects
A thumb-wheel on the back of the synthesizer controls volume.
against a light background.  The default color scheme might not be easy to
see for some Screen Magnifier/2 users.  Therefore, Screen Magnifier/2 enables
you to reverse this color scheme so that the display is made up primarily of
light letters and objects against a dark background.  The colors that were
previously light are now dark and vice versa.  This color scheme provides
greater contrast and is more usable for some people.


You can use any of the following methods to reverse the screen colors.
NOTE:  You might notice halting speech or pauses you do not expect. If you want to smooth that speech (at the expense of responsive Stop), toggle Buffer Management and Smart Talk to No.
First, enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode, then:


1.  Press V (for Video).
ECHO BY ECHO CORPORATION.


OR
NOTE:  The manufacturer of this synthesizer was formerly Street Electronics.


2.  Double-click mouse button 2.
SOFTWARE SETTINGS


OR
The following values for the ECHO synthesizer are in the ECHO.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.


3. Use the Setup window.
COM PORT.           COM1.
BAUD RATE.          9600.
PARITY.            None.
LENGTH.            8 bits.
STOP BITS.          1 stop bit.
RATE.              1 and 9 active.
VOLUME.            Active.
PITCH.              Active.
SPECIAL.            Not active.
STOP DELAY.        0.
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP.  No.
ALWAYS STOP.        Yes.
PROTOCOL.          Clear to Send.
INDEXING.          No.
CHARACTER SET.      Lower.


To return the screen to its previous colors, use one of the above methods.
(16) ECHO is a trademark of Echo Corporation.


HINT:  If the screen colors are still not easy for you to see, you might want
ECHO-PC BY ECHO CORPORATION
to use the OS/2 Color Palette or Scheme Palette option to change the colors
even more.  These options are in the System Setup folder which is in the OS/2
System folder on the OS/2 Desktop.


To return to your application or the Desktop, leave Screen Magnifier/2 mode.
NOTE:  The manufacturer of this synthesizer was formerly Street Electronics.


Toggling Focus Tracking
SOFTWARE SETTINGS


The Screen Magnifier/2 focus-tracking feature ensures that the Screen
The following values for the ECHO-PC synthesizer are in the ECHOPC.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.
Magnifier/2 view includes the area of interest. When Screen Magnifier/2 is
magnifying, only a portion of the Desktop can be seen at one time.
Consequently, you might not know if a system dialog box or an error message
has popped up in an area that you currently cannot see.  With focus tracking
turned on, Screen Magnifier/2 automatically moves the mouse pointer (and,
therefore, the Screen Magnifier/2 view) to the area of interest, so you do
not miss any important information.


To toggle focus tracking on and off, enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode and press
COM PORT.          COM1.
F (for Focus).
BAUD RATE.          9600.
PARITY.            None.
LENGTH.            8 bits.
STOP BITS.          1 stop bit.
RATE.              Active.
VOLUME.            Active.
PITCH.              Active.
SPECIAL.            Not Active.
STOP DELAY.        0.
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP.  No.
ALWAYS STOP.        Yes.
PROTOCOL.          XON/XOFF
INDEXING.          Yes.
CHARACTER SET.      Lower.
BUFFER MANAGEMENT.  No.


When focus tracking is toggled on, a high-pitched beep is sounded.  When it
KEYNOTE GOLD BY PULSE DATA INTERNATIONAL, LTD.
is toggled off, you hear a lower-pitched beep.


To return to your application or the Desktop, leave Screen Magnifier/2 mode.
SOFTWARE SETTINGS


NOTES:
The following values for the Keynote Gold synthesizer are in the GOLD.TTS file.  You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.
 
COM PORT.          COM1.
BAUD RATE.          9600.
PARITY.            None.
LENGTH.            8 bits.
STOP BITS.          1 stop bit.
RATE.              Active.
VOLUME.            Not active.
PITCH.              Active.
SPECIAL.            Active (refer to notes).
STOP DELAY.        0.
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP.  No.
ALWAYS STOP.        Yes.
PROTOCOL.          XON/XOFF
INDEXING.          Yes.
 
(17) ECHO-PC is a trademark of Echo Corporation.
 
(18) Keynote Gold is a trademark of Pulse Data International, Ltd.
 
CHARACTER SET.      Full.
 
;NOTES:
#The GOLD.TTS file is set with Special 1 to 4 for different languages (if they are
installed). The languages are:
:#English.
:#Spanish.
:#French.
:#German.
:Special 5 is not set.
:Special 6 to 9 are set to control the intonation as follows:
 
6. Reverse intonation.
7. Normal intonation.
8. Emphatic intonation.
9. Very emphatic intonation.
 
2.  The Keynote Gold synthesizer requires a special EPROM in order to work with Screen
Reader/2.  Please contact the manufacturer or the local dealer.
 
3.  If you bought your synthesizer before March, 1993, use the GOLD.TTS file.
 
4.  If you bought your synthesizer after March, 1993, use the GOLD2.TTS file.
 
PERSONAL SPEECH SYSTEM BY VYSION INCORPORATED
 
NOTE:  The manufacturer of this synthesizer was formerly Votrax Incorporated.
 
SOFTWARE SETTINGS
 
The following values for the Personal Speech System synthesizer are in the PSS.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.
 
COM PORT.          COM1.
BAUD RATE.          2400.
PARITY.            Odd.
LENGTH.            7 bits, parity ignored.
STOP BITS.          1 stop bit.
RATE.              1, 2, 3, 5, 9 active.
 
(19) Votrax is a registered trademark of Votrax Incorporated.
 
VOLUME.            Active.
PITCH.              1, 2, 5, 9 active.
SPECIAL.            Not active.
STOP DELAY.        4.
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP.  No.
ALWAYS STOP.        Yes.
PROTOCOL.          Clear to Send.
INDEXING.          Yes.
CHARACTER SET.      Lower.
 
HARDWARE SETTINGS
 
The communication switch is set for parallel. You must change this switch from parallel to serial communications. Also ensure that the switch settings on your synthesizer are set to 2400 baud.
 
SWITCH-BANK LOCATION
 
One switch bank for the Personal Speech System is located inside the unit.  The switches are accessible through a slot in the back-right corner of the unit. Use a ballpoint pen or a similar tool to set the switches.
 
SWITCH SETTINGS
 
For serial communications and 2400 baud, set all switches Down except switch 2.  That switch should be in the Up position.
 
PORTABLE DECTALK BY DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION AND MULTIVOICE BY INSTITUTE
ON APPLIED TECHNOLOGY
 
SOFTWARE SETTINGS
 
The following values for the Portable DECtalk and MultiVoice synthesizers are in the DEC2.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.
 
COM PORT.          COM1.
BAUD RATE.          9600.
PARITY.            None.
LENGTH.            8 bits.
STOP BITS.          1 stop bit.
RATE.              Active.
VOLUME.            1, 2, 3, 4 reduce the volume
(1=maximum reduction, 4=slight reduction).
6, 7, 8, 9 increase the volume (6=slight increase, 9=maximum increase).
 
(20) MultiVoice is a trademark of Institute on Applied Technology.


1.  There might be occasions when you find focus tracking distracting, such
PITCH.              1 to 9 active.
as when:
SPECIAL.            1 to 9 active for changing voices
(refer to note).
STOP DELAY.        0.
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP.  No.
ALWAYS STOP.        Yes.
PROTOCOL.          XON/XOFF.
INDEXING.          Yes.
CHARACTER SET.      Lower.
BUFFER MANAGEMENTYes.


    The magnification is low enough that the whole of the area of
NOTE: The DEC2.TTS file is set with Special 1 to 9 active for changing voices.  These are the voices:
interest can be seen at once; for example, if you are using the Setup
#Perfect Paul.
window at a magnification of 2.
#Beautiful Betty.
#Huge Harry.
#Doctor Dennis.
#Kit the Kid.
#Rough Rita.
#Uppity Ursula.
#Frail Frank.
#Whispering Wendy.


    There is focus that is tracked that actually moves you away from what
HARDWARE SETTINGS
you want to see.  For example, the video viewer in Multimedia
Presentation Manager/2(*) has a slide bar that tells you how much of
the video you have watched already.  Screen Magnifier/2 tracks that
slider instead of the video itself.


    You are using software applications that update the screen frequently
The On/Off knob in the front of the MultiVoice unit also controls the volume.
during startup (such as those that open multiple windows).  If you
find the resulting shifts in focus distracting, try turning off focus
tracking before you start up the application. Once the program has
settled down, do the following:


a. Enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode.
NOTE:  You might notice halting speech or pauses you do not expect. If you want to smooth that speech (at the expense of responsive Stop), toggle Buffer Management and Smart Talk to No.


b.  Press F to turn focus tracking back on.
READING EDGE BY XEROX IMAGING SYSTEMS


c.  Press B to move the pointer to the last focus point.
SOFTWARE SETTINGS


d. Leave Screen Magnifier/2 mode to return to your application.
The following values for the Reading Edge scanner are in the XEROX.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.


2. You can also use the Setup window to toggle focus tracking.
COM PORT.           COM1.
BAUD RATE.          9600.
PARITY.            None.
LENGTH.            8 bits.
STOP BITS.          1 stop bit.
RATE.              Active.
VOLUME.            Active (refer to notes).
PITCH.              Active.
SPECIAL.            Active (refer to notes).
STOP DELAY.        0.


(*) Trademark of International
(21) Reading Edge is a trademark of XEROX Imaging Systems.
Business Machines Corporation


Toggling Dithering
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP.  No.
ALWAYS STOP.        Yes.
PROTOCOL.          XON/XOFF
INDEXING.          Yes.
CHARACTER SET.      Lower.
BUFFER MANAGEMENT.  Yes.


Dithering is the process by which computers create colors that they are
NOTES:
otherwise incapable of displaying.  Most computers can display a limited
number of colors.  Some colors, such as red, blue, yellow, and green, are
displayed in their essential forms.  Other, more complex, colors are created
by alternating pixels of two existing colors to simulate the appearance of a
third color.


For example, on a VGA display, pink is composed of alternating red and white
1. The XEROX.TTS file is set with Volume 3 to 7 for levels of intonation as follows:
pixels. From a distance, these colors blend together and appear to be pink.
However, when the screen is magnified by Screen Magnifier/2, you can see the
alternating red and white pixels.  This can be distracting at higher
magnifications, so Screen Magnifier/2 provides a way to turn off the
dithering mechanism.  When dithering is turned off, complex colors are
displayed as the nearest color that the computer can produce; in some cases,
this will be gray.


To turn dithering on, enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode and press D (for
Volume 1 and 2 are not active.
Dithering).  To turn dithering off, enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode and press D
again.


To return to your application or the Desktop, leave Screen Magnifier/2 mode.
Volume 3 to 7 are set to control the intonation as follows:


NOTE:  You can also use the Setup window for this function.
3. Intonation is 0% of normal.
4. Intonation is 50% of normal.
5. Normal intonation.
6. Intonation is 150% of normal.
7. Intonation is 200% of normal.


Moving the Mouse to the Last Focus Point
Volume 8 and 9 are not active.


Screen Magnifier/2 provides the ability to move the mouse pointer to the spot
2. The XEROX.TTS file is set with Special 1 through 9 to control voices as follows:
that was the last focus point. This can be a very convenient feature. For
example, if you are using a text editor and move the mouse to review the text
you just typed, you can use this feature to return to the last focus point
and continue typing.


You can use either of the following methods to move the mouse to the last
1. Perfect Paul.
focus point. First, enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode, then:
2. Beautiful Betty.
3. Huge Harry.
4. Frail Frank.
5. Kit the Kid.
6. Rough Rita.
7. Uppity Ursula.
8. Doctor Dennis.
9. Whispering Wendy.


1. Press B (for Back to the last focus point).
3. You might notice halting speech or pauses you do not expect. If you want to smooth that speech (at the expense of responsive Stop), toggle Buffer Management and Smart Talk to No.


OR
VOXBOX BY INFOVOX


2.  Click mouse button 2, then click mouse button 1.
SOFTWARE SETTINGS


The Screen Magnifier/2 view will change so that the mouse pointer is now at
The following values for the VoxBox synthesizer are in the VOX.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.
the location of the previous focus point.


To return to your application or the Desktop, leave Screen Magnifier/2 mode.
COM PORT.          COM1.


Locking Mouse Movement
(22) VoxBox is a trademark of InfoVox.


Screen Magnifier/2 provides a means by which you can restrict the movements
BAUD RATE.          4800.
of the mouse to horizontal or vertical only. This is especially helpful when
PARITY.            None.
you're working with information in columns, such as spreadsheet applications,
LENGTH.            8 bits.
or when you're performing drag-and-drop operations.
STOP BITS.          1 stop bit.
RATE.              Active.
VOLUME.            Active.
PITCH.              Active.
SPECIAL.            1 to 9 active for changing languages and response modes (refer to note).
STOP DELAY.        0.
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP.  No.
ALWAYS STOP.        Yes.
PROTOCOL.          XON/XOFF.
INDEXING.          Yes.
CHARACTER SET.      Convert.


To lock the mouse movement, press and hold CTRL, then move the mouse in the
NOTE:  The Special settings for the InfoVox are as follows:
direction you want.  As long as you are holding down the CTRL key, you can
only move the mouse in the direction of the initial movement.  When you
release the CTRL key, you can once again move the mouse in all directions.


Getting Help
1.  The language in ROM slot 1.
2.  The language in ROM slot 2.
3.  The language in ROM slot 3.
4.  The language in ROM slot 4.
5.  The language in ROM slot 5.
6.  The language in ROM slot 6.
7.  The language in ROM slot 7.
8.  Changes to the normal response mode; improves prosody.
9.  Changes to the fast response mode; default.


Screen Magnifier/2 provides online help, both general and contextual.
HARDWARE SETTINGS
General help supplies an overview of the Screen Magnifier/2 program and
enables you to select specific topics about which you want to learn more.
Contextual help provides information about a specific item in the context in
which it is currently being used.


General Help
You must set some of the InfoVox switches for it to work with Screen Reader/2.


To get general help, enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode, then press F1.  The
SWITCH-BANKS LOCATIONS
Introduction to Screen Magnifier/2 panel is displayed.  In addition to
containing introductory information, this panel enables you to access other
panels that contain specific information about individual topics.


Contextual Help
The unit contains three switch banks. These are located, if the back of the synthesizer is facing you, in the lower mid-section of the panel and to the right of the parallel and serial connectors.


To get help about a specific topic, enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode, then press
Use a ballpoint pen or other similar tool to set the switches. If the switches are pushed toward the bottom of the synthesizer, they are On. If they are positioned toward the top of the synthesizer, they are Off.
S to open the Setup window. Select the item for which you need explanation,
then press F1. A panel will be displayed that contains additional
information about that topic.


Using Help Panels
SWITCH SETTINGS


When a help panel is opened, the Screen Magnifier/2 pointer will be
The settings for the three banks follow:
positioned on the first linked topic, which is in a reverse-video box.  To
open the help panel associated with that linked topic, either press ENTER or
double-click with the mouse.


If there are other linked topics in a panel, they will be displayed in a
For Bank 1 (left):
different color than the text.  To open a help panel associated with another
linked topic, either TAB to the topic and press ENTER or move the mouse
pointer to the topic and double-click.


NOTE:  If you are using a monochrome color scheme, the linked topics are not
Switch 1 is On.
displayed in color. Refer to "Using a Monochrome Color Scheme" on
Switch 2 is Off.
page 56 for information about how to identify linked topics.
Switches 3 to 7 are On.
Switch 8 is Off.


If there is more than one page of help about a topic, there will be a scroll
For Bank 2 (middle):
bar on the right side of the help panel.  You can either press PAGE DOWN to
see the subsequent pages or use the mouse to move the scroll bar.


HINT:  You might want to use the reading function when you display help
Switch 1 is On.
panels.
Switch 2 is Off.
Switches 3 to 7 are On.
Switch 8 is Off.


Closing a Help Panel
For Bank 3 (right):


To close a help panel, use one of the following methods:
Switches 1 to 7 are Off.
Switch 8 is On.


    Double-click on the system-menu icon in the upper-left corner.
NOTE: Ensure that you have the correct cable and that you connect the synthesizer cable to the computer correctly. The correct cable has female connectors on both ends. Connect the cable to the host-computer connector on the synthesizer (the male connector leftmost at the back of the synthesizer unit, if it is facing you) and to the serial connector on your computer.


    Press ALT + F4.
==Other Considerations==
The following sections address Screen Reader/2 features that you need to know about, but are not likely to use often:
:"Changes to Screen Reader/2 1.0".
:"Help for Error Messages".
:"Recalling Screen Reader/2 Settings".
:"Migrating Windows Applications".


    Press ESC.
===CHANGES TO SCREEN READER/2===
There are several things that have changed since Screen Reader/2 version 1.0.  This section outlines these changes so that you will be able to use the new Screen Reader/2 quickly and efficiently.


If multiple help panels are open, they will all close if you press ALT + F4
PRESENTATION MANAGER KEY SEQUENCES
or double-click on the system menu.  If you press ESC, one help panel closes
each time you press this key.


Stopping Screen Magnifier/2
Some P M key sequences that started with C in the previous version of Screen Reader/2 have been changed to leave the C key sequences available for application-specific profiles. (CHORD B S has also been changed.)


If you want to turn off Screen Magnifier/2, enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode and
The list below includes each former key sequence, the key sequence to which it has been changed, and the function.
press F3.


A confirmation dialog will be displayed that asks if you really want to quit.
C then H has changed to chord 7 8 then S. Chord 7 8 then S will read static text.
Press ENTER if you do want to stop Screen Magnifier/2; if you do not want to
stop Screen Magnifier/2, select NO and press ENTER.


NOTE: If you just want to go to a non-magnified view temporarily, remember
Chord B S has changed to chord 7 8 then C. Chord 7 8 then C will display the Desktop context menu.
you can press N while you are in Screen Magnifier/2 mode to turn off
the magnification.


Quick Reference
Chord C 9 then n has changed to chord 7 9 then n. Chord 7 9 then n will set up the Screen Reader/2 switch list by associating the current window with keypad key n.
NOTE:  MB-1 is an abbreviation for Mouse Button 1; MB-2 is an abbreviation
for Mouse Button 2.


+----------+-----------+----------+
C then 9 then n has changed to chord 8 9 then n. Chord 8 9 then n will make window n the foreground window.
|Function | Key      | Mouse    |
|          | Sequences | Sequences|
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Enter    | Press    | Click    |
|Screen    | CTRL +    | MB-1 and |
|Magnifier/| SHIFT    | MB-2    |
|mode      |          | together |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Leave    | Press    | Click    |
|Screen    | CTRL +    | MB-1 and |
|Magnifier/| SHIFT    | MB-2    |
|mode      |          | together |
+----------+-----------+----------+


Once you have entered Screen Magnifier/2 mode, you can perform the following
C then 0 has changed to chord 7 8 then 7.  Chord 7 8 then 7 will announce the window type and type of control at the current Screen Reader/2 pointer position.
tasks:


+----------+-----------+----------+
C then 8 has changed to chord 7 8 then 8. Chord 7 8 then 8 will announce the program name and window title.
|Function | Key      | Mouse    |
|          | Sequences | Sequences|
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Increase  | Press UP  | Hold    |
|magnificat|oARROW    | MB-1,    |
|          |          | click    |
|          |          | MB-2    |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Decrease  | Press    | Hold    |
|magnificat|oDOWN      | MB-2,    |
|          | ARROW    | click    |
|          |          | MB-1    |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Toggle    | Press N  |          |
|magnificat|on        |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|More      | Press M  |          |
|mouse    |          |          |
|sensitivit|          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Less      | Press L  |          |
|mouse    |          |          |
|sensitivit|          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Toggle    | Press ALT |          |
|reading  |          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Increase  | Press    |          |
|speed    | RIGHT    |          |
|while    | ARROW    |          |
|reading  |          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Decrease  | Press    |          |
|speed    | LEFT      |          |
|while    | ARROW    |          |
|reading  |          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+


+----------+-----------+----------+
Chord C 8 has changed to chord 7 8 then 9. Chord 7 8 then 9 will display a list of windows in the current application.
|Function | Key      | Mouse    |
|          | Sequences | Sequences|
+----------+-----------+----------+
|To pause  | Press P  |          |
|while    |          |          |
|reading  |          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|To read  | Press H  |          |
|from the  |          |          |
|top of   |          |          |
|the       |          |          |
|current   |          |          |
|window    |          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|To read  | Press T  |          |
|the next  |          |          |
|line      |          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|To read  | Press K  |          |
|the      |          |          |
|previous  |          |          |
|line      |          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Toggle    | Press X  | Hold    |
|locator  |          | MB-1 and |
|          |          | MB-2    |
|          |          | together |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Toggle    | Press R  |          |
|relative-p|sition    |          |
|marker    |          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Toggle    | Press F  |          |
|focus    |          |          |
|tracking  |          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Toggle    | Press D  |          |
|dithering |          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Toggle    | Press V  | Double-cl|ck
|video    |          | MB-2    |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Specify  | Press O  |          |
|mouse    |          |          |
|modes    |          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Move      | Press B  | Click    |
|mouse to  |          | MB-2,    |
|last      |          | then    |
|focus    |          | click    |
|point    |          | MB-1    |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Display  | Press S  |          |
|Screen    |          |          |
|Magnifier/|          |          |
|Setup    |          |          |
|Window    |          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Display  | Press F1  |          |
|Help      |          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+


+----------+-----------+----------+
NOTE: Key sequence C THEN C still announces the cursor line or selector.
|Function  | Key       | Mouse    |
|          | Sequences | Sequences|
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Run      | Press C   |          |
|calibratio|          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+
|Stop      | Press F3  |          |
|Screen    |          |          |
|Magnifier/|          |          |
+----------+-----------+----------+


Other Considerations
AUTOMATIC STARTUP
This section contains information that is beyond the scope of everyday Screen
Magnifier/2 tasks.  These topics include the following:


    Using Screen Reader/2 with Screen Magnifier/2
In the previous version, you could run the DESK program
after you installed Screen Reader/2 to change the way the
desktop was organized.  In the new version, the
installation program does this for you automatically.


    Migrating Windows(* *) applications to the Desktop
NOTE:  If you did not run DESK in the previous version,
you may prefer to use the original desktop layout.
Refer to "OS/2 Desktop" for information on
restoring the original desktop.


    Running DOS applications in a window
DESKTOP FOLDER FOR SCREEN READER/2


    Using a monochrome color scheme
In the previous version, you started Screen Reader/2 from the Screen Reader/2 Folder. This folder contained the following objects:
*Screen Reader/2.
*OS/2 Keys.
*User's Guide.
*PAL Reference.
*Configuration File.
In the new version, you start Screen Reader/2 by opening the Independence Series folder. This folder contains the following objects:
*On-Line Books -- Screen Reader/2.
*Configuration File -- Screen Reader/2.
*Screen Reader/2.
NOTE: If you have other Independence Series software installed, it may also contain other objects.


    Using a mouse with Screen Magnifier/2
CHANGES TO SCREEN READER/2 1.1


    Reinstallation considerations
There are several things that have changed since the previous version of Screen Reader/2.  Refer to the Screen Reader/2 version 1.2 Installation Guide for these changes. The information is available in print and on cassette.


    Removing Screen Magnifier/2 from your system
This new release of Screen Reader/2 enables users to have ScreenReader/2 version 1.2 and Screen Magnifier/2 on a system and to have them work together.


    Problem determination
This release also includes the following updates:


(* *) Trademark of Microsoft
1.  More profiles
Corporation


Using Screen Magnifier/2 with Screen Reader/2 Version 1.2
We have included three new sample profiles:


If you use Screen Reader/2 version 1.2 in addition to Screen Magnifier/2,
LOTUS 1-2-3 FOR OS/2  This profile makes it easier to use Lotus 1-2-3 release 2.0 for OS/2 with Screen Reader/2. You can find its description with the Presentation Manager profiles in this Screen Reader/2 User's Guide.
there are several items you should consider:
AMIPRO FOR WINDOWS This sample profile enables you to use the word processor AmiPro version 3.01 with Screen Reader/2. Its description is listed with the Windows profiles in this User's Guide.


1If you are new to both Screen Magnifier/2 and to Screen Reader/2, we
2DOS profiles now loaded automatically
recommend that you use the Screen Reader/2 tutorial before exploring
Screen Magnifier/2 functions.


2.  If you use Screen Magnifier/2 but have not started Screen Reader/2, focus
Now, whenever you start a DOS program listed in this User's Guide, a profile for that program will be automatically added to the profile tier.
tracking will not work correctly for notebook tabs or for Windows
applications.  If this occurs, start Screen Reader/2 by opening the
Screen Reader/2 object.  It is in the Independence Series folder.


3.  If you want the area that Screen Magnifier/2 magnifies to follow the
3.  Indexing supported for Blazie Engineering products
pointer as Screen Reader/2 reads for you, do the following:


a. Turn on pointer mode by pressing # 0 on the Screen Reader keypad.
If you use the Braille Blazer or the Braille'n Speak, you will find that indexing works. We updated the synthesizer section of this User's Guide to reflect this change. The synthesizer sections in the printed and cassette versions of Getting Started remain unchanged.


bUse the CHORD 2 3 THEN 1 key sequence to make the mouse pointer
4Updated help and error messages
follow the Screen Reader/2 pointer.


c. Use any "read" key sequence (such as current line, next line,
We have reworked Screen Reader/2 error messages to be more understandable and useful. In addition, we enhanced help for the Screen Reader/2 notebooks.
paragraph) to begin reading.


NOTE:  In addition to the above points, don't forget the Screen Reader/2
===HELP FOR ERROR MESSAGES===
information that was discussed in "Pre-Installation Considerations" on
If an error message is displayed, you can obtain more information about the cause of the error and how to correct it. At an OS/2 command prompt, type help, followed by the number of the error that you encountered.
page 4.
For example, if you encounter an error with the identifying number ERR1234, you would type help ERR1234.
Screen Reader/2 will display information about the error.


Screen Reader/2 Shutdown Procedure
RECALLING SCREEN READER/2 SETTINGS


If you are a Screen Reader/2 user, use the following procedure to shut down
If you think you saved your Screen Reader/2 state settings but they were not active the next time you used the program, it may be because you have changed the profile tier in which the settings were saved. The profile tier must be exactly as it was when you saved the settings.  If you change the current profile tier to be identical to the one in which you saved your settings, the settings will be restored automatically.
your computer:


1.  Press CHORD 7 8 THEN C on your Screen Reader/2 keypad to display the OS/2
SCREEN READER/2 KEY SEQUENCES
Desktop pop-up menu.


2. Use the DOWN ARROW key to select the Shut down option on the pop-up menu,
This appendix contains a complete listing of all base Screen Reader/2 key sequences. The first section lists the Screen Reader/2 core keys sequentially. For example, all of the key sequences that start with A, then those that start with B, and so on.
then press ENTER. You hear:


Desktop
The second section lists the key sequences by function. For example, all of the reading keys, then the spelling keys, and so on.


You hear a message that asks if you are sure you want to shut down your
BASE KEYS
system.  The shutdown window contains the pushbuttons OK, Cancel, and
Help.  The OK pushbutton is selected.


3.  Press ENTER to indicate that it is OK to continue the shutdown process.
The Screen Reader/2 base keys read information on the screen, announce format changes, and turn switches On or Off.


4.  As shutdown continues, you might hear additional messages asking you to
Basic Keys:
confirm that you want to close programs currently running.  The No
pushbutton is preselected as the default.  Type "Y" to specify Yes.


When you hear:
1.  Reads the previous line.
2.  Reads the current line.
3.  Reads the next line.
4.  Reads the previous word.
5.  Reads the current word.
6.  Reads the next word.
7.  Reads the previous character.
8.  Reads the current character.
9.  Reads the next character.
HELP.  Toggles Help mode On or Off.
STOP.  Stops speech.


Please wait, shutdown still in progress...
Key sequences that start with 0 are:


Screen Reader/2 is no longer activeUnfortunately, you will no longer
001 TO 009. Reads lines 1 through 9.
hear messagesThe system continues the shutdown processAnother
010 TO 019. Reads lines 10 through 19.
message appears on the screen. This message is not read:
020 TO 029. Reads lines 20 through 29.
030 TO 039. Reads lines 30 through 39.
040 TO 049. Reads lines 40 through 49.
050 TO 059. Reads lines 50 through 59.
060 TO 069. Reads lines 60 through 69.
CHORD 0 1.  Reads the rest of the screen from the line
above the current position.
CHORD 0 2.  Reads the rest of the screen from the current position.
CHORD 0 3Reads the rest of the screen from the line below the current position.
0 7Reads the character above.
0 8.  Announces the color of the current character.
0 9.  Reads the character below.
0 A.  Reads the entire screen.


Shutdown has completedIt is now safe to
0 BReads the rest of the screen from the current position.
turn off your computer, or restart the
0 C.  Reads the rest of the line.
system by pressing Ctrl + Alt + Del.
0 D.  Moves the pointer to the right edge of the viewport.
0 #.  Moves the pointer to the bottom left of the viewport.
0 *.  Moves the pointer to the top left of the viewport.
0 H.  Announces the time.
CHORD 0 7.  Toggles setting and clearing the default color.
CHORD 0 8.  Toggles Color Scan On or Off.
CHORD 0 H.  Announces the date.
CHORD 0 S.  Toggles the time autospeak On or Off.


You should wait about 30 seconds after the first message before
Key sequences that start with * are:
restarting or turning off your system.
* 1.  Reads the previous field.
* 2.  Reads the current field.
* 3.  Reads the next field.
* 4.  Spells the previous word.
* 5.  Spells the current word.
* 6.  Spells the next word.
* 7.  Spells the previous character using the phonetic alphabet.
* 8.  Spells the current character using the phonetic alphabet.
* 9.  Spells the next character using the phonetic alphabet.
* 0.  Switches to pronounce format.
* A.  Reads the rest of the current field.
* B.  Spells the current word with capitals.
* C.  Announces the ASCII value of the current character.
* D.  Switches to phonetic format.
* H.  Sets the field definition for foreground or background color, or a mixture of both.
* *.  Switches to text format.
* #.  Switches to spell format.
CHORD * 2.  Toggles Font Scan On or Off.
CHORD * A.  Announces the font of the current character.
CHORD * H.  Toggles between inclusion and exclusion of font changes in field definitions.


NOTE: If you are using a non-IBM computer system, this shutdown process may
Key sequences that start with # are:
not work for you. You should use the Window List to open the Desktop.
# 1. Searches for a string you specify from the top.
Then, press CTRL + \ to make sure no object is selected. Press SHIFT
# 2. Continues forward search.
+ F10 to display the Desktop's pop-up menu. Select Shut down from the
# 3. Searches for the current string from the top.
pop-up menu.
# 4. Announces the keyboard lock-key status.
# 5. Announces current format.
# 6. Announces the current viewport status.
# 8. Announces the pointer position.
# 9. Announces the current mode and position status.


Migrating Windows Applications
# 0. Turns on pointer mode.
# A. Adds a profile to the tier.
# B. Toggles reporting keyboard lock-key status On or Off.
# C. Announces the cursor position.
# D. Turns on cursor mode.
# H. Starts ignoring one or more characters.
# #. Moves the pointer to the cursor or selector.
# *. Moves the cursor to the pointer. (This key sequence may not work on non-IBM machines.)
CHORD # 1.  Searches backwards from the bottom for a string you specify.
CHORD # 2.  Continues backward search.
CHORD # 3.  Searches backward from the bottom for the previous string.
CHORD # A.  Removes a profile from the tier.
CHORD # B.  Announces the Screen Reader/2 version and the active profiles for the current session.
CHORD # H.  Stops ignoring one or more characters.
CHORD # S.  Resets ignore.


Screen Magnifier/2 has no access to Win-OS/2 Full Screen sessions; therefore,
Key sequences that start with A are:
you should migrate your Windows applications to the OS/2 Desktop and launch
them from there.  Do not start your Windows programs using a Win-OS/2 Full
Screen session.


The OS/2 Migrate Applications utility searches your computer drives for all
A 1 N.  Sets pitch (1 to 9).
Windows applicationsIt then creates a Desktop object which you can select
A 2 N.  Sets rate (1 to 9).
to start your Windows application.
A 3 N.  Sets volume (1 to 9).
A 4. Toggles Caps On or Off.
A 5. Toggles Spaces On or Off.
A 6. Toggles Dictionary On or Off.
A 7. Toggles Pause On or Off.
A 8. Toggles Wrap On or Off.
A 9. Toggles line Numbering On or Off.
A 0. Toggles ForceSpell On or Off.
A A N.  Sets Special Codes (1 to 9).
A B. Toggles Graphics On or Off.
A C. Cycles through word-definition settings (alphabetic, alphanumeric, and nonblank).
A #. Announces the status of switches and the talking level in effect.
A *. Toggles Key Echo On or Off.
CHORD A 3.  Announces the status for scan.
CHORD A 4.  Toggles Caps Scan On or Off.
CHORD A 6Toggles Trailing characters On or Off.
CHORD A 7.  Cycles through mixed-case handling.
CHORD A 0.  Toggles SpellCaps On or Off.
CHORD A S.  Sets the amount of talking (chatty, moderate, or quiet level) .
CHORD A 1 THEN 0. Announces values from last event key pressed (flag byte, scan code, character code in decimal).
CHORD A 1 THEN 1. Toggles between having the pop-up keypad active on the right or left.
CHORD A 1 THEN 2. Sets up the pop-up keypad Hot key and Stop key.


If your Windows programs are part of either the Windows Main or Windows
CHORD A 1 THEN 3. Toggles between the keyboard beeping or not beeping.
Accessories group, OS/2 will migrate them to the Windows Accessories folder.
CHORD A 1 THEN 4. Toggles between disabling only the keyboard keys of the pop-up keypad or
If they are in the Windows Program Manager or any other Windows application,
the entire typing area of the keyboard while the pop-up keypad is active.
OS/2 will migrate them to the Windows Programs folder on the OS/2 Desktop.
CHORD A 1 THEN 5. Announces the status of the pop-up keypad settings.
CHORD A 1 THEN B. Toggles the pop-up keypad Hot key and the Stop key On or Off.
CHORD A 2 THEN N. Redefines the pop-up keypad key n to another keyboard key.
CHORD A 2 THEN S. Stops redefining pop-up keypad key n.
CHORD A 5 THEN N. Sets the number of spaces that you want Screen Reader/2 to announce between words.  (n can be any number from 1 to 9; the default is 2.)


To migrate your Windows applications, do the following:
Key sequences that start with B are:


1.  Select the OS/2 System icon.
B 1. Reads the first word of the current line.
B 2. Reads the middle word of the current line.
B 3. Reads the last word of the current line.
B 4. Reads the rest of the word above.
B 5. Reads the rest of the current word.
B 6. Reads the rest of the word below.
B 7. Announces the position of the left edge of the column viewer.
B 8. Announces the location of the column viewer and how many columns there are.
B 9. Announces the position of the right edge of the column viewer.
B A. Defines viewport 1 through 9.
B B N. Makes viewport n the active viewport (n can be any number from 1 to 9).
B B B. Sets the viewport to the full view.
B C. Sets the bottom-right corner of the viewport.
B D. Toggles user-defined autospeaks On or Off.
B D B. Turns off all active autospeaks.
B *. Saves all Screen Reader/2 settings.
B # N. Announces the screen coordinates of viewport n or autospeak n.
B 0.    Defines autospeaks 1 through 9.
CHORD B 1.  Reads from the top of the column to the
current column-viewer position.
CHORD B 2.  Moves the column viewer up one line and
reads the column entry.
CHORD B 3.  Moves the column viewer to the top of
column.
CHORD B 4.  Moves the column viewer left one column
and reads the column entry, or sets the
left edge manually.
CHORD B 5.  Reads the current column entry.


2Select the System Setup icon.
CHORD B 6.  Moves the column viewer right one column
and reads the column entry, or sets the
right edge manually.
CHORD B 7.  Reads from the current column-viewer
position down to the bottom of the column.
CHORD B 8.  Moves the column viewer down one line and
reads the column entry.
CHORD B 9.  Moves the column viewer to the bottom of
the column.
CHORD B 0.  Displays the Customization menu.
CHORD B A.  Defines a column.
CHORD B *.  Moves the column viewer to the previous position.  Press this chord twice to go back two positions.
CHORD B HStarts the tutorial.
B CHORD B 1.Moves to column 1.
B CHORD B 2. Moves to column 2.
B CHORD B 3. Moves to column 3.
B CHORD B 4. Moves to column 4.
B CHORD B 5. Moves to column 5.
B CHORD B 6. Moves to column 6.
B CHORD B 7. Moves to column 7.
B CHORD B 8. Moves to column 8.
B CHORD B 9. Moves to column 9.
B CHORD B A N. Reassigns a column number.


3.  Select the Migrate Applications icon.
Key sequences that start with C are reserved for application profiles, except:


The Find Programs menu is displayed. This menu appears with the Windows
C C. Announces the cursor line or selector in Presentation Manager.
programs option already selected. (The menu can also have DOS and OS/2
applications selected; you might want to deselect these two, using the
SPACEBAR.)


4.  Select the Find button.
Key sequences that start with D are:


The Migrate Programs window appears. This window contains all of the
D 1. Reads previous sentence.
Windows applications that OS/2 found.
D 2. Reads current sentence.
D 3. Reads next sentence.
D 7. Toggles Character Echo On or Off.
D 8. Toggles Word Echo On or Off.
D 9. Toggles Line Echo On or Off.
D 0. Toggles Column Browse On or Off.
D A. Reads current paragraph.
D B. Toggles the flush of text being spoken On or Off.
D C. Announces the currently active browse and echo modes.
D D. Switches to default edit facility, turning Line Browse On, echoes Off, and flush On.
D #. Toggles current edit facility selections.
D *. Toggles Line Browse On or Off.
CHORD D 2.  Toggles between one-space and two-space sentence termination.
CHORD D 7.  Shifts the margin alert to the left by one character.
CHORD D 8.  Cycles through margin alert types.


5Using the SPACEBAR, deselect any program that you don't want to migrate.
CHORD D 9Shifts the margin alert to the right by one character.
CHORD D 0.  Announces the current status of icon speaking (All, Known, or Not Speaking
Icons)
CHORD D #.  Associates a text string with the current icon to identify it.
CHORD D *.  Toggles the announcing of icons to All, Known, or Not Speaking Icons.
CHORD D C THEN 7. Cycles through deletion feedback and destructive backspace types.
CHORD D C THEN 8. Announces the length of the deletion look-ahead.
CHORD D C THEN 9. Cycles through lengths of the deletion look-ahead (3 through 20).
CHORD D C THEN C. Toggles function-keys processing On or Off.
CHORD D C THEN 0. Enables and disables edit facility for controls.
CHORD D C THEN D. Toggles the browse talking level between chatty and moderate.


6.  Select the Migrate button.
Key sequences that start with 1 are:


OS/2 migrates the applications to the OS/2 Desktop in a folder called
CHORD 1 2 THEN 4. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the Desktop.
Windows Programs or Windows Accessories.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 5. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the view.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 6. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the viewport.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 7. Changes the view up one level to the parent window or the Desktop.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 8. Resets the view to the focus window.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 9. Changes the view down one level to a child window.
CHORD 1 2 THEN *. Changes the view to the next OS/2 text window.
CHORD 1 2 THEN A. Announces vertical scroll-bar information.
CHORD 1 2 THEN B. Announces horizontal scroll-bar information.
CHORD 1 2 THEN C. Changes the view to the next sibling window.
CHORD 1 2 THEN H. Reads the description for the highlighted setting in the DOS
Settings or Win-OS/2 Settings Notebook.


You can now select any of your Windows applications from these folders.
Key sequences that start with 2 are:


Running DOS Applications in a Window
CHORD 2 3 THEN 1. Toggles moving the mouse to follow the Screen Reader/2 pointer On or Off.
CHORD 2 3 THEN 3. Toggles mouse tracking On or Off.
CHORD 2 3 THEN 4. Simulates a single click on mouse button 1.


Under OS/2 2.1, DOS programs are initially migrated as full-screen sessions.
CHORD 2 3 THEN 5. Simulates a double click on mouse button 1.
In order to use Screen Magnifier/2, you should change any DOS programs to DOS
CHORD 2 3 THEN 6. Simulates a single click on mouse button 2.
window sessions by doing the following:
CHORD 2 3 THEN 8. Announces the window containing the mouse pointer.
CHORD 2 3 THEN A. Moves the mouse pointer to the Screen Reader/2 pointer.
CHORD 2 3 THEN B. Simulates a double click on mouse button 2.
CHORD 2 3 THEN C. Cycles through the mouse-movement types:
Horizontal only.
Vertical only.
Horizontal and vertical (the default).
CHORD 2 3 THEN H. Announces the status of mouse settings (mouse movement with
pointer, mouse tracking, and mouse-movement settings).


1.  Bring up the pop-up menu for the program object that you want to change.
Key sequences that start with 7 are:


2. Press RIGHT ARROW to open the program object's Settings notebook.
CHORD 7 8 THEN 7. Announces the window type and type of control at the current Screen
Reader/2 pointer position.
CHORD 7 8 THEN 8. Announces the program name and window title.
CHORD 7 8 THEN 9. Displays a list of windows in the current application.
CHORD 7 8 THEN S. Reads static text.
CHORD 7 8 THEN C. Displays the Desktop context menu.
(This key sequence may not work on non-IBM machines.)
CHORD 7 8 THEN D. Toggles drawing noise On or Off.
CHORD 7 9 THEN N. Sets up the Screen Reader/2 switch list by associating the current
window with keypad key n.
CHORD 7 9 THEN H. Clears the switch list.


3.  On the second page of the Settings notebook, select the DOS Window
Key sequences that start with 8 are:
auto-radio button.


4. Close the Settings notebook. The program will now be in a DOS window
CHORD 8 9 THEN N. Makes window n the foreground window.
session.
CHORD 8 9 THEN N is used to switch to the window established by CHORD 7 9 THEN N.
CHORD 8 9 THEN H. Announces the switch-list entries and their assigned keys.


Using a Monochrome Color Scheme
KEY SEQUENCES BY FUNCTION


If you have set up your system with the OS/2 monochrome color scheme, you
This section lists all of the Screen Reader/2 key sequences according to the function for which they are used.
might encounter these scenarios:


    Turning off dithering does not work as you might expect.  This is because
ANNOUNCE KEYS
OS/2 system objects (and, possibly, other program objects) are bitmaps,
with dithered colors "built in."  When you turn dithering off, the
bitmapped objects are not affected and will remain dithered.


    Some application programs use colorsIf so, these programs will not be
0 8.    Announces the color of the current character.
displayed in monochrome because the monochrome color scheme only affects
* C.  Announces the ASCII value of the current character.
OS/2 applications.
CHORD * A.  Announces the font of the current character.
# 4.  Announces the keyboard lock-key status.
# 5.  Announces the current format.
# 6.  Announces the current viewport status.
# 8.  Announces the pointer position.
# 9Announces the current mode and position status.
# C.  Announces the cursor position.
CHORD # B.  Announces the Screen Reader/2 version and the active profiles for the current session.
A #.  Announces the status of switches and the talking level in effect.
CHORD A 1 THEN 5. Announces the status of the pop-up keypad settings.
B # N. Announces the screen coordinates of viewport n or autospeak n.
D C.  Announces the currently active browse and echo functions.
CHORD D C THEN 8. Announces the length of the deletion look-ahead check.


    Topics that are linked in help panels will not be displayed in color, as
COLUMN-VIEWER KEYS
they usually are.  You can identify these linked topics by using the TAB
key to travel from one linked topic to the next.


Using the Mouse with Screen Magnifier/2
CHORD B A. Defines a column.
CHORD B 0. Displays the Customization menu.
B 8. Announces the location of the column viewer and how many columns there are.
B 7. Announces the position of the left edge of the column viewer.
B 9. Announces the position of the right edge of the column viewer.
CHORD B 1. Reads from the top of the column to the current column-viewer position.
CHORD B 5. Reads the current column entry.
CHORD B 7. Reads from the current column-viewer position down to the bottom of the column.
CHORD B 2. Moves the column viewer up one line and reads the column entry.
CHORD B 8. Moves the column viewer down one line and reads the column entry.


Because most mice have just two buttons, only a few mouse-button combinations
CHORD B 4. Moves column viewer left one column and reads the column entry, or sets the left edge manually.
are available for use. You can use the Screen Magnifier/2 mouse-button
CHORD B 6. Moves column viewer right one column and reads the column entry, or sets the right edge manually.
sequences but you should be aware that there are some special considerations:
CHORD B 3. Moves the column viewer to the top of the column.
CHORD B 9. Moves the column viewer to the bottom of the column.
CHORD B *. Moves the column viewer to the previous position. Press this chord twice to go
back 2 positions.
B CHORD B 1. Moves to column 1.
B CHORD B 2. Moves to column 2.
B CHORD B 3. Moves to column 3.
B CHORD B 4. Moves to column 4.
B CHORD B 5. Moves to column 5.
B CHORD B 6. Moves to column 6.
B CHORD B 7. Moves to column 7.
B CHORD B 8. Moves to column 8.
B CHORD B 9. Moves to column 9.
B CHORD B A N.  Reassigns a column number for ease of use.


    When you use the mouse to open an object on the Desktop, you should click
CURSOR/POINTER KEYS
once on the object to select it, then double-click to open it.


    In OS/2 Desktop operations, you can click mouse button 1 and mouse button
# 8. Announces the pointer position.
2 together to bring up the Window List. In Screen Magnifier/2, you can
# 9. Announces the current mode and position status.
click mouse button 1 and mouse button 2 together to enter Screen
# 0. Turns on pointer mode.
Magnifier/2 mode. To ensure that you bring up the Window List, hold down
# C. Announces the cursor position.
mouse button 1, then click mouse button 2.
# D. Turns on cursor mode.
# #. Moves the pointer to the cursor or selector.
# *. Moves the cursor to the pointer. (This key sequence may not work with non-IBM machines.)


    When you use the mouse, you might have to move around on the screen more
EDIT KEYS
than you would if you were using the keyboard.


Reinstallation Considerations
D 7. Toggles Character Echo On or Off.
D 8. Toggles Word Echo On or Off.
D 9. Toggles Line Echo On or Off.
D 0. Toggles Column Browse On or Off.
D C. Announces the currently active browse and echo functions.
D D. Switches to normal edit facility, turning Line Browse On, echoes Off, and flush On.
D #. Toggles current selections.
D *. Toggles Line Browse On or Off.
CHORD D 2.  Toggles between one-space and two-space sentence termination.
CHORD D 7.  Shifts the margin alert to the left by one character.
CHORD D 8.  Cycles through margin alerts.


If you need to reinstall Screen Magnifier/2, for reasons such as:
CHORD D 9.  Shifts the margin alert to the right by one character.
CHORD D C THEN 7. Cycles through deletion feedback and destructive backspace types.
CHORD D C THEN 8. Announces the length of the deletion look-ahead check.
CHORD D C THEN 9. Changes the length of the deletion look-ahead check length.
CHORD D C THEN C. Toggles function-key processing On or Off.
CHORD D C THEN 0. Enables and disables edits for a particular type of view.
CHORD D C THEN D. Defines the browse talking level.


    Updating OS/2 2.1 with a CSD (Corrective Service Diskette),
FORMAT KEYS


    Changing display resolutions, or
* *.  Switches to text format.
* #.  Switches to spell format.
* D.  Switches to phonetic format.
* 0.  Switches to pronounce format.


    Changing display modes,
ICON KEYS


you must use the following procedure:
CHORD D 0.  Announces the current status of icon speaking (All, Known, or Not Speaking Icons).
CHORD D #.  Associates a text string with the current icon to identify it.
CHORD D *.  Toggles the announcing of icons to All, Known, or Not Speaking Icons.


1.  Remove Screen Magnifier/2 from your system.  (Refer to the following
LEVEL/VOLUME/RATE KEYS
section for this information.)


2. Restart your computer.
A #.  Announces the status of switches and the talking level in effect.
CHORD A S.  Sets the amount of talking (chatty, moderate, or quiet level).
A 1 N. Sets pitch (1 to 9).
A 2 N. Sets rate (1 to 9).
A 3 N. Sets volume (1 to 9).


3.  Change your system as needed.
MISCELLANEOUS KEYS


4Restart your computer.
# AAdds a profile to the tier.
CHORD # A.  Removes a profile from the tier.
CHORD B H.  Starts the tutorial.


5.  Reinstall Screen Magnifier/2.
MOUSE KEYS


Removing Screen Magnifier/2 from Your System
CHORD 2 3 THEN 1. Toggles moving the mouse to follow the Screen Reader/2 pointer On or Off.
CHORD 2 3 THEN 3. Toggles mouse tracking On or Off.
CHORD 2 3 THEN 4. Simulates a single click on mouse button 1.
CHORD 2 3 THEN 5. Simulates a double click on mouse button 1.
CHORD 2 3 THEN 6. Simulates a single click on mouse button 2.
CHORD 2 3 THEN 8. Announces the window containing the mouse pointer.
CHORD 2 3 THEN A. Moves the mouse pointer to the Screen Reader/2 pointer.
CHORD 2 3 THEN B. Sets mouse button 2 to respond to double clicks.
CHORD 2 3 THEN C. Cycles through the following mouse movements:
Horizontal only.
Vertical only.
Both vertical and horizontal.
(This is the default.)
CHORD 2 3 THEN H. Announces the status of mouse settings (mouse movement with pointer, mouse
tracking, and mouse-movement settings).


If you want to remove Screen Magnifier/2 from your system, use the following
MOVE KEYS
procedure:


1. Open an OS/2 window.
0 D. Moves the pointer to the right edge of the viewport.
0 #. Moves the pointer to the bottom left of the viewport.
0 *. Moves the pointer to the top left of the viewport.
# #. Moves the pointer to the cursor or selector.
# *. Moves the cursor to the pointer. (This key sequence may not work on non-IBM machines.)


2.  Insert the Screen Magnifier/2 diskette in drive A.
POP-UP KEYPAD KEYS


3.  Change to drive A by entering:
CHORD A 1 THEN 1. Toggles between having the pop-up keypad active on the right or the left.
CHORD A 1 THEN 2. Sets up the Hot key and the Stop key for the pop-up keypad.
CHORD A 1 THEN 3. Toggles between the keyboard beeping and not beepingAudible feedback is
the default.
CHORD A 1 THEN 4. Toggles between disabling only the keyboard keys of the pop-up keypad or
the entire typing area of the keyboard while the pop-up keypad is active.
CHORD A 1 THEN 5. Announces the status of the pop-up keypad settings.


a:
CHORD A 1 THEN B. Toggles the Hot key and Stop key On or Off.
CHORD A 2 THEN N. Redefines pop-up keypad key n to another keyboard key.
CHORD A 2 THEN S. Stops redefining pop-up keypad key n.


4.  Enter:
PRESENTATION MANAGER KEY SEQUENCES


sm2undo
CHORD 7 8 THEN 8. Announces the program name and window title.
CHORD 7 9 THEN N. Sets up the Screen Reader/2 switch list by associating the current
window with keypad key n.
CHORD 7 9 THEN H. Clears the switch list. You are asked to confirm that you want to
clear the entries.
CHORD 8 9 THEN H. Announces the switch-list entries and their assigned keys.
CHORD 8 9 THEN N. Makes window n the foreground window.
CHORD 8 9 THEN N is used to switch to the window established by CHORD 7 9 THEN N.
CHORD 7 8 THEN 7. Announces the window type and type of control at the current Screen Reader/2 pointer position.
C C.              Announces the cursor line or selector.
CHORD 7 8 THEN S. Reads static text.
CHORD 7 8 THEN 9. Displays a list of windows in the current application.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 4. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the Desktop.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 5. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the view.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 6. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the viewport.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 7. Changes the view up one level to the parent window or the Desktop.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 8. Resets the view to the focus window.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 9. Changes the view down one level to a child window.
CHORD 1 2 THEN C. Changes the view to the next sibling window.
CHORD 1 2 THEN *. Changes the view to the next OS/2 text window.
CHORD 1 2 THEN A. Announces vertical scroll-bar information.
CHORD 1 2 THEN B. Announces horizontal scroll-bar information.
CHORD 1 2 THEN H. Reads the description for the highlighted setting in the DOS Settings or Win-OS/2 Settings Notebook.
CHORD 7 8 THEN D. Toggles drawing noise On or Off.


5. Change back to the drive where OS/2 is located.
CHORD 7 8 THEN C. Displays the Desktop context menu.
(This key sequence may not work on non-IBM machines.)


6.  Close the OS/2 window by entering:
READ KEYS


exit
1.          Reads the previous line.
2.          Reads the current line.
3.          Reads the next line.
4.          Reads the previous word.
5.          Reads the current word.
6.          Reads the next word.
7.          Reads the previous character.
8.          Reads the current character.
9.          Reads the next character.
001 TO 009. Reads lines 1 through 9.
010 TO 019. Reads lines 10 through 19.
020 TO 029. Reads lines 20 through 29.
030 TO 039. Reads lines 30 through 39.
040 TO 049. Reads lines 40 through 49.
050 TO 059. Reads lines 50 through 59.
060 TO 069. Reads lines 60 through 69.
CHORD 0 1.  Reads the rest of the screen from the line above the current position.
CHORD 0 2.  Reads the rest of the screen from the current position.
CHORD 0 3.  Reads the rest of the screen from the line below the current position.
0 7.        Reads the character above.
0 9.        Reads the character below.
0 A.        Reads the entire screen.
0 B.        Reads the rest of the screen from the current position.
0 C.        Reads the rest of the line.
* 1.        Reads the previous field.
* 2.        Reads the current field.
* 3.        Reads the next field.
* A.        Reads the rest of the current field.
B 1.        Reads the first word of the current line.
B 2.        Reads the middle word of the current line.
B 3.        Reads the last word of the current line.
B 4.        Reads the rest of the word above.
B 5.        Reads the rest of the current word.
B 6.        Reads the rest of the word below.
D 1.        Reads the previous sentence.
D 2.        Reads the current sentence.
D 3.        Reads the next sentence.
D A.        Reads the current paragraph.
STOP.      Stops speech.


7.  Press CTRL + SHIFT to enter Screen Magnifier/2 mode.
SCAN KEYS


8.  Press F3 to stop Screen Magnifier/2.
CHORD 0 7.  Toggles setting and clearing the default color.
CHORD 0 8.  Toggles Color Scan On or Off.
CHORD A 3.  Announces the status for scan.
CHORD A 4.  Toggles Caps Scan On or Off.
CHORD A 7.  Cycles through mixed case handling:
Says cap before each capital letter.
Says mixed and cap.
Says caps only to separate words.
Says mixed only.
CHORD * 2.  Toggles Font Scan On or Off.


9.  Shut down and restart your system.
SEARCH KEYS


Problem Determination
# 1.        Searches for a string you specify from the top.
# 2.        Continues forward search.
# 3.        Searches for the current string from the top.
CHORD # 1.  Searches backward from the bottom for a string you specify.
CHORD # 2.  Continues backward search.
CHORD # 3.  Searches backward from the bottom for the previous string.


If you encounter a problem that you cannot resolve, you can get technical
SET DEFINITION KEYS
support for Screen Magnifier/2 over the telephone.  A package describing this
support is included with your Screen Magnifier/2 software.  Be sure to read
through this package.


Appendix A.  Legal Information
* H.              Sets the definition for foreground or background color, or a mixture of both.
EDITION NOTICE
# H.              Starts ignoring one or more characters.
CHORD # H.        Stops ignoring one or more characters.
CHORD # S.        Resets ignore.
# D.              Turns on cursor mode.
# 0.              Turns on pointer mode.
A 1 N.            Sets pitch (n can be any number from 1 to 9).
A 2 N.            Sets rate (n can be any number from 1 to 9).
A 3 N.            Sets volume (n can be any number from 1 to 9).
A A N.            Sets Special Codes (n can be any number from 1 to 9).
CHORD A 1 THEN 2. Sets up the Hot key and the Stop key.
CHORD A 5 THEN N. Sets the number of spaces that you want Screen Reader/2 to announce between
words(n can be any number from 1 to 9; the default is 2.)
A C.              Cycles through word-definition settings (alphabetic, alphanumeric, and
nonblank).
CHORD A S.        Sets the amount of talking (chatty, moderate, or quiet).
B C.              Sets the bottom-right corner of the viewport.


THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH DOES NOT APPLY TO THE UNITED KINGDOM OR ANY COUNTRY
B B B.            Sets the viewport to the full view.
WHERE SUCH PROVISIONS ARE INCONSISTENT WITH LOCAL LAW:  INTERNATIONAL
B *.             Saves all Screen Reader/2 settings.
BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied
warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.


This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical
SPELL KEYS
errors.  Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these
changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.  IBM may
make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s)
described in this publication at any time.


It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information
* 4.    Spells the previous word.
about, IBM products (machines and programs), programming, or services that
* 5.    Spells the current word.
are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not
* 6.    Spells the next word.
be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products,
* 7.    Spells the previous character using the phonetic alphabet.
programming, or services in your country.
* 8.    Spells the current character using the phonetic alphabet.
* 9.    Spells the next character using the phonetic alphabet.
* B.    Spells the current word with capitals.


Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your
TIME KEYS
IBM Authorized Dealer or your IBM Marketing Representative.


SPECIAL NOTICES
0 H.        Announces the time.
CHORD 0 H.  Announces the date.
CHORD 0 S.  Toggles the time autospeak On or Off. The default is Off.


References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not
TOGGLE KEYS
imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM
operates.  Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not
intended to state or imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may
be used.  Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does
not infringe any of IBM's intellectual property rights or other legally
protectable rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or
service.  Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other
products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by IBM,
are the user's responsibility.


The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) in this publication, are
HELP.            Toggles Help mode On or Off.
trademarks or registered trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United
CHORD * 2.        Toggles Font Scan On or Off.
States and/or other countries:
CHORD * H.        Toggles between inclusion and exclusion of font changes in field definitions.
# B.              Toggles reporting keyboard lock-key status On or Off.
A 4.              Toggles Caps On or Off.
A 5.              Toggles Spaces On or Off.
A 6.              Toggles Dictionary On or Off.
A 7.              Toggles Pause On or Off.
A 8.              Toggles Wrap On or Off.
A 9.              Toggles Numbering On or Off.
A 0.              Toggles ForceSpell On or Off.
A B.              Toggles Graphics On or Off.
A *.              Toggles Key Echo On or Off.
CHORD A 1 THEN 1. Toggles between having the pop-up keypad active on the right or the left.
CHORD A 1 THEN 3. Toggles between the keyboard beeping or not beeping.
CHORD A 1 THEN 4. Toggles between disabling only the keyboards keys of the pop-up keypad or
the entire typing area of the keyboard while the pop-up keypad is active.
CHORD A 1 THEN B. Toggles the Hot key and the Stop key On or Off.
CHORD A 4.        Toggles Caps Scan On or Off.
CHORD A 6.        Toggles Trailing Characters On or Off.
CHORD A 0.        Toggles SpellCaps On or Off.


Independence Series
B D.              Toggles user-defined autospeaks On or Off.
Multimedia Presentation Manager/2
D 7.              Toggles Character Echo On or Off.
OS/2
D 8.              Toggles Word Echo On or Off.
Presentation Manager
D 9.              Toggles Line Echo On or Off.
PS/1
D 0.              Toggles Column Browse On or Off.
PS/2
D B.              Toggles the flush of text being spoken On or Off.
PS/ValuePoint
D #.              Toggles current selections.
Screen Magnifier
D *.              Toggles Line Browse On or Off.
Screen Reader
CHORD D 2.        Toggles between one-space and two-space sentence termination.
CHORD D C THEN C. Toggles function-key processing On or Off.
CHORD 0 8.        Toggles Color Scan On or Off.


The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**) in this publication,
VIEWPORT AND AUTOSPEAK KEYS
are trademarks of the respective companies in the United States and/or other
countries:


TRADEMARK          COMPANY
B A.    Defines viewport 1 through 9.
Windows            Microsoft Corporation
B B N.  Makes viewport n the active viewport (n can be any number from 1 to 9).
B B B.  Sets the viewport to the full view.
B C.    Sets the bottom-right corner of the viewport.
B D.    Toggles user-defined autospeaks On or Off.
B D B.  Turns off all active autospeaks.
B 0.    Defines autospeaks 1 through 9.
B # N.  Announces the screen coordinates of viewport n or autospeak n.
0 D.    Moves the pointer to the right edge of the viewport.
0 #.    Moves the pointer to the bottom left of the viewport.
0 *.    Moves the pointer to the top left of the viewport.


==License Information==
==Glossary==
A


IBM Independence Series Screen Magnifier/2 (Product)
;ACKNOWLEDGE STOP:In Screen Reader/2, a parameter that specifies if the synthesizer sends a control sequence back to Screen Reader/2 to indicate that it has received, and has acted upon, the Screen Reader/2 Stop sequence.
82G3872
;ALWAYS STOP:A Screen Reader/2 parameter that specifies if the synthesizer allows a Stop sequence to be sent even if Not Clear to Send or XOFF has been received.
;APPLICATION PROGRAM:A program written for, or by, a user that applies to the user's work, such as a program that does inventory control or word processing.
:NOTE: Screen Reader/2 contains profiles that define keypad key sequences customized for use with specific application programs.
;ASCII:An acronym standing for American National Standard Code for Information Interchange. The ASCII code is a character set consisting of seven-bit coded characters (eight bits, including parity check). It is used for information interchange among data-processing systems, data-communication systems, and associated equipment.
:The ASCII set consists of control characters and graphic characters.
:NOTE: IBM has defined an extension to the ASCII code (characters 128-255).
;ATTRIBUTE:Used here as a display attribute, it is a number that determines how an item should appear on the screen. For example, an attribute could be the color of a screen character or indicate that the Presentation Manager character is italic, bold, or underlined.
;AUTOSPEAK:An autospeak monitors values or areas of the screen for change and then announces the change. It is a unique feature of Screen Reader/2 and the Profile Access Language.


==STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY==
B


International Business Machines Corporation (IBM) grants the following
;BAUD RATE:The measure of the transmission rate between a computer and a synthesizer; it is approximately ten times the number of characters transmitted per second.
limited warranty for this IBM Licensed Program, hereinafter referred to as
;BROWSE:An edit function, browsing is used primarily for reading. It enables you to hear the character, word, or line the cursor is on, depending on where you move the cursor. If Page Browse is On, a page is read automatically.
"Program", if this copy of the Program is delivered by IBM, an IBM Authorized
;BUFFER MANAGEMENT:A Screen Reader/2 synthesizer parameter that enables Screen Reader/2 to wait for a good breaking point in the text before sending a talk command and a "buffer full" string to the synthesizer, leaving room for the Stop command.
Dealer for this Program, or any other IBM-approved supplier for this Program
to a user.


(Such a user if referred to herein
C
as "original user".)  A "user"
shall mean a Customer who acquired
possession of and is licensed to
use this copy of the Program for
its own use or for use within its
business enterprise and not for
remarketing.  Any unused portion of
the Warranty Period may be conveyed
to another user.


==MEDIA==
;CHILD WINDOW:A window that is positioned relative to another window (either a main window or another child window). Contrast with parent window.
;CHORD:A key sequence that consists of two keypad keys that are pressed at the same time and can be combined with other key presses.  An example of a key sequence that includes a chord is CHORD 1 2 THEN B.
;CLEAR TO SEND (CTS):In data communications, a term meaning that the protocol between the computer and the communications device is based on hardware.
;CODE PAGE:The character display you can select for your system based on the country code. A system can be enabled for two pages, typically 437 (English) and 850 (International). Screen Reader/2 needs to know the code pages to announce the characters correctly.
;COLUMN VIEWER:A Screen Reader/2 feature that enables you to read columnar information quickly and easily.
;COMMUNICATION PORT (COM PORT):An access point for data entry or exit either to or from a communication device such as your speech synthesizer. A communications port is sometimes called a serial port or serial connector. (COM1, COM2, and COM3 are character-device names reserved for serial ports 1 through 3.)
;CONTROL WINDOW:A class of window used to handle a specific kind of user interaction. Radio buttons and check boxes are examples.
;CURSOR:A symbol displayed on the screen and associated with an input device. The cursor indicates where input from the device will be placed. Types of cursors include text cursors, graphics cursors, and selection cursors. Contrast with focus and pointer.


The Warranty Period for the media
D
on which the Program is recorded is
for three months from the date of
its delivery to the original user
as evidenced by a receipt.


IBM warrants that this media will
;DEFAULT VALUE:A value used when no value is explicitly specified by the user. For example, the default value for synthesizer volume is 5.
be free from defects in material
;DESKTOP
and workmanship under normal use
#In P M, a window that displays a list of groups of programs, each of which can be started or stopped.
during the Warranty Period. If
#The window, corresponding to the physical device, against which all other types of windows are established.
notified during the Warranty Period
;DICTIONARY:A list of words and replacement strings. Screen Reader/2 uses the dictionary to read words differently from the way the synthesizer would speak them normally.
that the media contains such
;DIALOG BOX:A type of window that contains one or more controls for the formatted display and entry of data. Also known as a pop-up window.
defects, IBM will replace such
media.  If IBM is unable to deliver
replacement media, you may
terminate your license and your
money will be refunded upon return
of all your copies of the Program.


==PROGRAM==
E


The Warranty Period for this
;ECHO:An edit function, echoing is used primarily for writing. It repeats (speaks) what you just typed, whether it is a character, word, or line.
Program is for three months from
;ENTRY FIELD:An area on the screen, usually highlighted in some manner, in which users type information.
the date of its delivery to the
;ENTRY-FIELD CONTROL:The means by which the application receives data entered by the user in an entry field. When it has the input focus, it displays a flashing pointer at the position where the next typed character will go.
original user as evidenced by a
receipt.


IBM warrants that this Program, if
F
unaltered, will conform to its
Program Specifications during the
Warranty Period when such Program
is properly used on a machine for
which it was designed.  If notified
during the Warranty Period that the
Program contains defects such that
it does not conform to its Program
Specifications, IBM will 1) attempt
to make the Program operate as
warranted a) if prior to the
Service Expiration Date, by
providing a correction, or b) if
after the Service Expiration Date,
by providing any existing
corrections, or 2) replace the
Program with a functionally
equivalent Program, as determined
by IBM.


In the event that IBM does not
;FIELD:In Screen Reader/2, a contiguous area of the display with the same color or font. It can be one character, several characters, a line, several lines, or an entire window.
provide such a remedy, you may
;FOCUS:The point where keyboard actions will take effect. In OS/2, the focus is usually on the window or control where the cursor is located currently.
terminate your license and your
;FONT:A particular size and style of typeface that contains definitions of character sets, marker sets, and pattern sets.
money will be refunded upon return
;FORMAT:In Screen Reader/2, any one of five methods of reading information on the screen. These methods are text, pronounce, spell, phonetic, and ASCII.
of all your copies of the Program.
;FULL-SCREEN APPLICATION:An application program that occupies the whole screen.


IBM does not warrant that any other
G
defects in the Program will be
corrected or that the operation of
the Program will be uninterrupted.


This limited warranty for the media
;GRAPHIC CHARACTER:In Screen Reader/2, a set of characters with ASCII values from 176 to 223 that are "box" characters-corners, vertical and horizontal lines, tees, crosses, and intersections.
and the Program will apply only if
the Program is licensed and located
in the United States or Puerto
Rico.


THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL
H
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.


Some states do not allow the
;HANDSHAKING:For communications with the synthesizer, either Clear to Send, a hardware protocol, or XON/XOFF, a software protocol. Handshaking tells Screen Reader/2 when it can transmit information to the synthesizer. Another word for handshaking is protocol.
exclusion of implied warranties, so
the above exclusion may not apply
to you.  This limited warranty
gives you specific legal rights,
and you may also have other rights
which vary from state to state.
Following the end of the Warranty
Period, Program Services may be
available. The License Information
contains details on such
availability.  If you have a
question as to where you may obtain
warranty service, see the Service
Provider information contained in
the program package.


==PROGRAM SPECIFICATIONS==
I


The IBM Screen Magnifier/2 version
;ICON:A graphical representation of an object consisting of an image and its background. Icons can represent items (such as a document file) with which a user wants to work, and actions that the user wants to perform. In Presentation Manager, icons are used for data objects, system actions, and minimized programs.
1.2 program is a computer-access
;INDEXING:The capability of some synthesizers to send markers back through the asynchronous communications channel after each word is spoken. This capability enables the Screen Reader/2 pointer to move to the beginning of each word as it is spoken.
system for people who are
;INPUT FOCUS:The area of the screen that will receive input from an input device (typically, the keyboard).
visually-impaired. Screen
Magnifier/2 version 1.2 magnifies
software that runs on the OS/2
Desktop.  Magnification levels from
2 to 32 times normal size are
supported.


==SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT==
K


Screen Magnifier/2 requires the
;KEYPAD:A rectangular piece of equipment with 18 keys that directs Screen Reader/2 to speak text from the screen.
following machine and program
:The keypad can be attached to a mouse port or to a Screen Reader/2 adapter.
specifications:


MACHINE REQUIREMENTS:
L


    Personal Computers
;LENGTH:In asynchronous communication, the number of "transmit and receive" data bits.


-  Screen Magnifier/2 runs on
N
any PS/1*, PS/2*,
PS/ValuePoint*, or 100%
IBM-compatible system
capable of running OS/2
2.1.
-  A 100% IBM
VGA-register-compatible
display controller is
required.
-  A mouse is required.


PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS:
;NOTEBOOK:A graphical representation of a bound notebook that contains pages separated into sections by tabs. You can select a tab to turn to the section identified by the tab label. A section can contain one or more pages.
;NOTEBOOK CONTROLS:A notebook control is used to make changes in an object's settings notebook. These changes take effect immediately. Screen Reader/2 notebook controls include: combination boxes, spin buttons, entry fields, menus, scroll bars, notebooks, buttons, list boxes, title bars, multiple-line entry fields, and static text.


Screen Magnifier/2 requires OS/2
P
Version 2.1 using the VGA display
device driver.


LICENSED PROGRAM MATERIALS
;PAL:Profile Access Language. A computer programming language that enables you to create or modify profiles for use with Screen Reader/2.
AVAILABILITY
;PARENT WINDOW:The window relative to which one or more child windows is positioned. Contrast with child window.
;PARITY:In asynchronous communications, maintaining the same level or count. For example, the speech synthesizer and the computer keep the same number of computer ones to perform a check based on an even or odd number for all words.
;PHONETIC ALPHABET:An alphabet that represents each character by a word beginning with the same letter. For example, e f g is echo, foxtrot, golf.
;PITCH:The parameter that adjusts the frequency; that is, the high or low tone of the synthesizer's voice.
;PIXEL:The smallest area of a display screen capable of being addressed and switched between visible and invisible states. Combined together, they constitute an image (as on a computer screen).
;POINTER
#A Screen Reader/2-unique marking device that is invisible on the screen and moves along as speech commences. It provides a way to move around the screen that is not dependent on cursor movement, thereby allowing full access to the screen.
#The symbol displayed on the screen that is moved by a pointing device, such as a mouse.  The pointer is used to point to items that users can select. Contrast with cursor.
;POP-UP KEYPAD:A block of sixteen keys on the keyboard that emulates the main block of sixteen keys on the Screen Reader/2 keypad. The block is arranged four keys by four keys and can be set up on either the left or right side of a keyboard.
;POP-UP WINDOW:A window that appears on top of another window in a dialog. Each pop-up window must be completed before returning to the underlying window.
;PRESENTATION MANAGER (PM):The visual component of OS/2 that presents, in windows, a graphics-based interface to applications and files installed and running in OS/2.
;PROFILE:A file used to control the key definitions and autospeaks for Screen Reader/2. Processing of a profile includes creating, compiling, and loading it.
;PROFILE TIER:A stack of profiles. The profile tier can change depending on which program or process is running in the foreground.
;PROTOCOL:For communications with the synthesizer, either Clear to Send, a hardware protocol, or XON/XOFF, a software protocol. The protocol tells Screen Reader/2 when it can transmit information to the synthesizer. Another word for protocol is handshaking.


The IBM Screen Magnifier/2 program
R
is available without source program
materials.  It is available in
object code only.


WARRANTY
;RATE:The speed at which a speech synthesizer speaks.
;READ REQUEST:Any keypad key press that asks Screen Reader/2 to read information from the screen. These requests can take different forms; for example, read a line, word, or character, or spell a word.
;REFRESH:To update a window, with changed information, to its current status.


Media: three-month warranty
S


Program: three-month warranty
;SCROLL BAR:A control window, horizontally or vertically aligned, that allows the user to scroll additional data into an associated panel area.
;SCROLLABLE ENTRY FIELD:An entry field larger than the visible field.
;SELECTOR:A type of cursor used to indicate the choice or entry field with which a user wants to interact. It is represented by highlighting the item on which it is currently positioned.
;SERIAL SYNTHESIZER:An external synthesizer that attaches to the computer through the serial connector (sometimes called COM port or communication port).
;SIBLING PROCESSES:Child processes that have the same parent process.
;SIBLING WINDOWS:Child windows that have the same parent window.
;SLIDER:An area on the scroll bar that indicates the size and position of the visible information in a panel area in relation to the information available. Also known as thumb mark.
;SMART TALK:A Screen Reader/2 feature that enables Screen Reader/2 to send a talk command to the synthesizer before the data has all been sent.
;STATIC TEXT:Text associated with an OS/2 Presentation Manager control or a group of controls that describes what the control does.
;STOP BITS:A signal to a receiving mechanism to wait for the next signal.
;STOP DELAY:In Screen Reader/2, a parameter that specifies a delay after you press Stop on the keypad before normal transmission proceeds.
;SWITCH:An action that moves the input focus from one area to another. This can be within the same window or from one window to another.
;SWITCH LIST:A Screen Reader/2 feature that enables a user to access multiple windows. A keypad key number is assigned to a window, then that key is used to access that window.


SERVICE EXPIRATION DATE
T


4/1/96
;TEXT WINDOW:Also known as the VIO (video input/output) window.
;TIER:Refer to profile tier.


No program services are available
V
after this date.


SOFTWARE INCLUDED
;VIEW:In OS/2 Presentation Manager, a Screen Reader/2 view is a Presentation Manager window or a text window. In full screen, the Screen Reader/2 view is the screen. In Presentation Manager, the coordinates of a view are relative to the OS/2 Desktop.
;VIEWPORT:A rectangular portion of a Screen Reader/2 view. A viewport's coordinates are relative to the current view.
;VIO:Video Input/Output.
;VOLUME:The loudness with which a speech synthesizer speaks.


One 1.44MB 3.5-inch diskette
W


TYPE/DURATION OF PROGRAM SERVICES
;WINDOW:An area of the screen with visible boundaries within which information is displayed. A window can be smaller than the screen or as large as the screen, and windows can overlap.
;WINDOW LIST:The list of programs that are active. The list can be used to switch to a program and to stop programs.


Program services under the
X
Statement of Limited Warranty will
be available during the first three
months following the date of
delivery to the end user by the IBM
Authorized Dealer or Industry
Remarketer, but not later than
April 1, 1996.  Support will be
provided by the IBM Authorized
Service Provider as defined in the
program package.


Index
;XON/XOFF:In data communications, an abbreviation meaning "transmit On, transmit Off." This is a protocol determining how the computer and the device communicate and is based on software.


[[Category:Software Articles]]
[[Category:Screen Reader/2]]

Latest revision as of 13:10, 11 November 2022

Reprint Courtesy of International Business Machines Corporation, © International Business Machines Corporation

Introducing Screen Reader/2

Screen Reader/2 is a computer-access system which enables blind and visually impaired people to use OS/2, Windows, and DOS applications, all running under OS/2 2.1. It is the first computer-access system to automatically read the title, selector, and other system information presented by the graphical user interface in both OS/2 and Windows applications.

Enhancements to Screen Reader/DOS and Screen Reader/2 1.0

Screen Reader/2, version 1.1, is similar to Screen Reader/DOS but works with OS/2, version 2.1. Most of the basic Screen Reader/2 key sequences are similar to those of Screen Reader/DOS and Screen Reader/2, version 1.0; however, new autospeaks, profiles, and key sequences have been added for Screen Reader/2 to support the OS/2 2.1 environment.

Screen Reader/2, version 1.1, has these additional enhancements to the Screen Reader product:

  • Key definitions have been changed to allow more forms of keypad key sequences. Screen Reader/2 uses a concept known as chords to extend its capabilities. A chord is a combination of two keys that are pressed simultaneously.
  • The way you install, start, modify, and view books for Screen Reader/2 is similar to other OS/2 2.1 applications.
  • Screen Reader/2 is so flexible, you can even use it with a laptop computer. You can assign the keypad key sequences to your keyboard.
  • Screen Reader/2 provides profiles that enable you to work with most of the applications included with OS/2 2.1. It also includes profiles for many popular software programs that work with OS/2, DOS, and Windows 3.1. These profiles are loaded automatically.
  • Screen Reader/2 can announce mouse movements and you can use the keypad to simulate mouse functions.
(1) OS/2 is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation.
(2) Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

You can now use multiple serial output devices, like a Braille display and a synthesizer.

In addition, if you have Screen Reader/2, Version 1.0, you will notice that there are additional profiles and "seamless" Windows support in Screen Reader/2, Version 1.1.

If you are a DOS user, you will find we have added new profiles for WordPerfect 5.1, Quicken 6.0, Lotus 1-2-3, and BookManager/Read.

Screen Reader/2 Documentation

The documentation that accompanies Screen Reader/2 includes a printed book, online books, cassettes, and two Reference Cards printed in Braille.

Getting Started provides step-by-step instructions for installing Screen Reader/2. In addition, Getting Started contains the Screen Reader/2 tutorial.

The tutorial teaches you the basic keypad key sequences as well as how to use Screen Reader/2 with your OS/2 Desktop. You learn how to find the Independence Series and Screen Reader/2 folders on your desktop and you learn how to use the Screen Reader/2 online books. Be sure to complete the tutorial before proceeding with the User's Guide.

Getting Started is available in print and on cassettes.

The User's Guide builds on the functions you learned in the tutorial and describes Screen Reader/2's advanced features. You learn about:

  • Views, viewports, and column viewer.
  • Autospeaks for application profiles.
  • Edit functions.
  • Pop-up keypad.
  • Profile tiers.
  • Key sequences.

In addition to the above, you also learn how to customize Screen Reader/2 to suit your environment and your preferences.

The User's Guide is only available as an online book. There is also a Reference Card in Braille that contains a complete listing of all Screen Reader/2 key sequences and their functions.

The PAL Reference explains the syntax of the Profile Access Language (PAL) for those who want to modify Screen Reader/2 profiles. Refer to the PAL Reference for information that helps you write your own application-specific profiles or change the profiles included in the package. The PAL Reference is available only as an online book.

The online OS/2 Keys book lists all the OS/2 keys you can use to navigate the OS/2 system, windows, help, and online books. It is also provided as a Reference Card printed in Braille.

OS/2 Desktop

The OS/2 Desktop contains graphical representations of the objects you use to perform your computer tasks. For most applications running under OS/2, the Desktop remains in the background. Unlike other applications you encounter, the default OS/2 Desktop does not contain a title, cannot be minimized or maximized, and, because it is in the background, it can be covered up by other active windows.

When you install Screen Reader/2, however, it changes the appearance of the Desktop so that it looks like other application folders. (It now has a title and can be maximized and minimized.) Screen Reader/2 also makes it easier for blind or visually impaired users to navigate OS/2. When OS/2 is installed, the icons are not arranged in any particular order. When you install Screen Reader/2, it changes the OS/2 Desktop to the flowed-icon format. This means that the icons are arranged so that the Home key moves the selector to the first object, the End key moves it to the last object, and the arrow keys move it in the corresponding directions.

RESTORING THE ORIGINAL DESKTOP:

If you prefer to use the Desktop that was installed with OS/2, follow these steps:

  1. At an OS/2 command prompt, type cd \srd22 and press ENTER to switch to the Screen Reader/2 subdirectory.
  2. Type os2desk and press ENTER.
  3. Use CHORD 7 8 THEN C to display the Desktop pop-up menu, then select Shut down.
  4. Reboot your computer.

NOTE: If you have a non-IBM computer, this procedure may not work for you. You should use the Window List to open the Desktop. Then press CTRL + \ to make sure no object is selected. Press SHIFT + F10 to display the Desktop pop-up menu, then select Shut down.

When you start your computer again, the OS/2 Desktop will be restored and will be in the background, full-screen, and without a title. However, it will remain in a flowed format.

RESTORING THE SCREEN READER/2 DESKTOP:

Having tried the original OS/2 Desktop, you may decide that Screen Reader/2's desktop is better after all. To restore it, follow these steps:

  1. At an OS/2 command prompt, type cd \srd22 and press ENTER.
  2. Type srd2desk and press ENTER.
  3. Use CHORD 7 8 THEN C to display the Desktop pop-up menu, then select Shut down.
  4. Reboot your computer.

NOTE: If you have a non-IBM computer, this procedure may not work for you. You should use the Window List to open the Desktop. Then press CTRL + \ to make sure no object is selected. Press SHIFT + F10 to display the Desktop pop-up menu, then select Shut down.

When you start your computer again, the Screen Reader/2 desktop will be displayed.

USING PRESENTATION MANAGER

Presentation Manager (PM) is the visual component of OS/2 that presents, in windows, a graphics-based interface to programs installed and running in OS/2.

Whenever the Presentation Manager active window changes, the Screen Reader/2 view changes and Screen Reader/2 announces the new window title, selector, or static text. Static text is text associated with a control (such as an entry field) or a group of controls. If a selector, or highlighted item, moves, Screen Reader/2 announces the contents of the new selector. When Screen Reader/2 detects other Presentation Manager focus changes, it announces them. For example, Screen Reader/2 reads an entry field and its prompt, whether a check box is checked or not, and any changes in spin button values.

PRESENTATION MANAGER KEY SEQUENCES:

NOTE: Below, and throughout the entire library of online Screen Reader/2 books, each key sequence presented in a list is ended by a period. This is done to force the synthesizer to pause after the key sequence is spoken. Disregard this period if you hear it.

CHORD 7 8 THEN 8. The "Where Am I?" key sequence. Announces the window title and the program name. You hear the following:

  1. The title that is on the title bar of the application window.
  2. The name of the program that is running.
  3. The type of application that is running:
    P M (for Presentation Manager).
    DOS full screen (for DOS).
    OS/2 full screen (for OS/2).
    Text window (for OS/2 and DOS windows).
    Seamless (Windows program running on the Desktop).

For example, if you are running the system editor, you would hear:

"System editor E.EXE Presentation Manager." CHORD 7 9 THEN N. Sets up the Screen Reader/2 switch list by associating the current window with keypad key n. This is useful when you work with a particular window frequently and want to use an "accelerator" to switch to that window quickly.

NOTE: n can be any keypad key except Stop and Help. CHORD 7 9 THEN STOP cancels the switch; CHORD 7 9 THEN HELP clears all entries in the current switch list.

From this point on, for the sake of brevity, the STOP key will be referred to as the S key and the HELP key will be referred to as the H key.

CHORD 7 9 THEN H. Clears the switch list. You are asked to confirm that you want to clear the entries.
CHORD 8 9 THEN H. Announces the switch-list entries and their assigned keys.
CHORD 8 9 THEN N. Makes window n the foreground window.
CHORD 8 9 THEN N is used to switch to the window established by CHORD 7 9 THEN N.
CHORD 7 8 THEN 7. Announces the window type and type of control at the current Screen Reader/2 pointer position.
C THEN C. Announces the cursor line or selector.
CHORD 7 8 THEN S. Reads static text (text associated with a control or group of controls).
CHORD 7 8 THEN 9. Displays a list of windows in the current application.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 4. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the Desktop.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 5. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the view.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 6. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the viewport.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 7. Changes the view up one level to the parent window or the Desktop.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 8. Resets the view to the focus window.
CHORD 1 2 THEN 9. Changes the view down one level to a child window.
CHORD 1 2 THEN C. Changes the view to the next sibling window.
CHORD 1 2 THEN *. Changes the view to the next OS/2 text window.
CHORD 1 2 THEN A. Announces vertical scroll-bar information. The scroll-bar information that you hear depends on the program you are using. For example, for some programs Screen Reader/2 announces the percentage of the scroll bar that remains to be scrolled.
CHORD 1 2 THEN B. Announces horizontal scroll-bar information.
CHORD 1 2 THEN H. Reads the description for the highlighted setting in the DOS Settings or Win-OS/2 Settings Notebook.
CHORD 7 8 THEN D. Toggles drawing noise On or Off.

(Drawing noise is heard when activity is taking place on the screen, such as when a window is being maximized or minimized.) The default is Off.

CHORD 7 8 THEN C. Displays the Desktop context menu.

Autospeaks in the Presentation Manager profile:

Announce the new title, plus static text or the system menu title, when a view changes.

Announce when the selector changes.

Announce, in menus, format shortcut keys and if there is a submenu associated with the menu item (indicated by a right arrow). When a menu item is not selectable, you will hear a beep.

Speak the entry field and prompt.

Announce whether check boxes or radio buttons are checked or not.

Announce changes in the entry field of a spin button.

Announce changes in the entry field of a combo box.

Read the description of the highlighted setting in the DOS Settings or Win-OS/2 Settings Notebook.

When you are using a menu and Screen Reader/2 is set for quiet talking level, Screen Reader/2 does not announce shortcut keys information for menu items. Shortcut keys information is announced for chatty and moderate talking levels. In addition, when a selector is highlighted while in chatty mode, you will hear three beeps. If the selector is not highlighted, no beeps will be heard.

NOTE: If you are a user of the previous version of Screen Reader/2, you should refer to "Changes to Screen Reader/2, Version 1.0".

WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT

With OS/2 2.1, you can run OS/2, DOS, and Windows programs on the same desktop, without being concerned about what type of application it is or how it is being accessed.

OS/2 2.1 enables you to run Windows applications on the OS/2 Desktop or on a separate desktop. This ability to run Windows programs alongside OS/2 and DOS windowed programs on the same desktop is known as "seamless Windows."

Screen Reader/2 provides access to Windows applications that are running seamlessly on the OS/2 Desktop. In the Windows environment, as in the OS/2 environment, Screen Reader/2 reads entry fields, selectors, action bars, highlights, pushbuttons, menus, and screen prompts automatically.

Windows applications can be accessed by Screen Reader/2 in the following ways:

1. You can run one Windows program at a time by entering start /win program name at the command prompt in an OS/2 window or full-screen command prompt. Don't forget to substitute the real program name for program name.

NOTE: This method works only if no other Windows programs are running.

2. Within Windows Program Manager, you can select Run, then type in the drive and filename of the program. This method enables you to run more than one Windows program at a time. (If you use Windows regularly, you might prefer this method.)

3. You can migrate your applications to the Windows Programs folder or the WIN-OS/2 Groups folder. Windows applications can be migrated either when you install OS/2 or after installation. This method also enables you to open more than one Windows application at a time.

NOTES:

1. The procedure for migrating Windows applications is described below.

2. Screen Reader/2 does not provide access to Windows programs in a WIN-OS/2 full screen.

MIGRATING WINDOWS APPLICATIONS

You can migrate your Windows applications to the OS/2 Desktop and launch them from there so that Screen Reader/2 is able to read the applications.

NOTE: Screen Reader/2 has no access to Win-OS/2 Full Screen sessions. Do not start your Windows programs using a Win-OS/2 Full Screen session.

The OS/2 Migrate Applications utility searches your computer drives for all Windows applications. It then creates a Desktop object which you can select to start your Windows application.

If your Windows programs are part of either the Windows Main or Windows Accessories group, OS/2 will migrate them to the Windows Accessories folder. If they are in the Windows Program Manager or any other Windows application, OS/2 will migrate them to the Windows Programs folder on the OS/2 Desktop.

To migrate your Windows applications, do the following:

1. Select the OS/2 System icon. 2. Select the System Setup icon. 3. Select the Migrate Applications icon. The Find Programs menu is displayed. This menu appears with the Windows programs option already selected. (The menu can also have DOS and OS/2 applications selected; you might want to deselect these two, using the SPACEBAR, if you do not need them.) 4. Select the Find button. The Migrate Programs window appears. This window contains all of the Windows applications that OS/2 found. 5. Using the SPACEBAR, deselect any program that you don't want to migrate. 6. Select the Migrate button. OS/2 migrates the applications to the OS/2 Desktop in a folder called Windows programs.

You can now select any of your Windows applications from this folder.

NOTE: Do not change the system colors through the windows control panel because you might impact Screen Reader/2's ability to recognize what it is supposed to read.

AUTOSPEAKS, VIEWPORTS, AND COLUMN VIEWER

In the tutorial, you learned how to use autospeaks to tell Screen Reader/2 to monitor areas of a text-based, full-screen or windowed session, and to announce when a change in that area occurs.

The tutorial also introduced you to viewports. You learned that a viewport is a specific part of a Screen Reader/2 view within which the program confines its reading. The viewport can be, for example, the entire screen or a portion of the screen. You can specify that the viewport be read automatically when you start using it.

Column viewer is another important Screen Reader/2 feature. The column-viewer facility enables you to read text or data in columnar format with one key sequence. Column viewer makes it easy to use spreadsheets and other applications that contain a lot of columnar information.

The viewport concept is similar to the column-viewer concept in that both enable you to set boundaries within which Screen Reader/2 confines its reading. However, there are two major differences between viewports and the column viewer. First, a viewport uses specific row and column coordinates as its boundaries, whereas column-viewer boundaries are determined by character strings (the default is two spaces). Second, a viewport restricts all reading commands to the limits of the viewport boundaries, whereas a column view is read with a special set of key sequences and does not prevent you from reading information outside of the column view with other Screen Reader/2 key sequences.

Once you have set up a column, the column viewer automatically sets the boundaries of the column. A set of simple key sequences enables you to read and navigate the column and move from one column to another.

The following sections provide additional information about using viewports, autospeaks, and column viewer.

AUTOSPEAKS AND VIEWPORTS FOR TEXT SCREENS

In a text-based session, you can define viewports using key sequences that start with B. You can use the viewports and autospeaks that you define any time during the session in which you defined them.

To use the definitions in future sessions, use key sequence B THEN * to save them.

NOTE: You may want to reuse viewport and autospeak numbers in order to discard old ones and create new ones.

VIEWAUTO KEY SEQUENCES:

B THEN A. Defines viewport 1 through 9.
B THEN B THEN N. Makes viewport n the active viewport (n can be any number from 1 to 9).
B THEN B THEN B. Sets the viewport to the full view.
B THEN C. Sets the bottom-right corner of the viewport.
B THEN 0. Defines autospeaks 1 through 9.
B THEN # THEN N. Announces the screen coordinates of viewport n or autospeak n.
B THEN *. Saves all viewport definitions and autospeak definitions.
B THEN D THEN N. Toggles user-defined autospeak n On or Off (n can be any number from 1 to 9).
B THEN D THEN B. Turns off all active autospeaks.

COLUMN VIEWER

It is easy to define columns and read them using the column-viewer feature. To start reading columns with the column viewer, move the pointer or cursor to any data in the column you want to read and press CHORD B A. The column viewer looks on either side of this data for the edges of the column. It defines the edge of a column as either the edge of the screen or as two blank spaces. The default of two blanks can be changed to any character string you like, using the Customization menu.

In manual mode, the vertical boundaries of the column are defined simply as the top and bottom of the screen. However, it is fairly difficult for the column viewer to define the top and bottom of a column in automatic mode. There are two methods for determining these boundaries in automatic mode.

METHOD 1

If non-blank characters are used for the left and right boundaries, the column viewer looks for the first row that does not have those characters in the same horizontal positions as the starting row. The column viewer stops just before the row that does not contain the boundary characters in those horizontal positions or at the edge of the screen, whichever comes first. You can move beyond this point with CHORD B 2 or CHORD B 8, but the column viewer beeps as you do so. You can adjust the edge positions to the new boundary conditions with CHORD B A.

METHOD 2

If blanks are used as the left and right boundary markers, it is much harder for the column viewer to determine when it has reached the top or bottom of a column. It tries to divide blocks of information on a page into separate columns, based on an "appropriate" amount of blank space around the information. There might be times when the column viewer is not accurate, but these errors will be on the conservative side, meaning that the column viewer will stop short rather than go too far.

MOVING AROUND IN COLUMNS

The only column-viewer reading functions that stop at the vertical boundaries of a column are: read from top, go to top, read to bottom, and go to bottom. You can move the column viewer past the top boundary with CHORD B 2 and below the bottom boundary with CHORD B 8. When you move the column viewer past a boundary, it will beep at you. If the left and right boundary characters are non-blanks, you can move back into the column view with CHORD B 2 or CHORD B 8 and it will stop beeping at you.

However, if you move beyond a vertical boundary and the horizontal boundary characters are blanks, the column viewer will only beep when you first cross the boundary because it will redefine the vertical boundaries based on the new position. In this case, CHORD B 2 or CHORD B 8 may not take you back to where you were. CHORD B * is provided to help you retrace your steps if you want to return to the previous column view.

As you move around the screen, up and down the columns and from one column to another, you will hear beeps that help you understand how much the column viewer is moving. If you are in pointer mode, the pointer follows the column viewer as you navigate through the columns.

NOTE: The column-viewer feature only works in full-screen or window text sessions; you cannot use it with Presentation Manager or Windows applications.

COLUMN-VIEWER KEY SEQUENCES

The column viewer uses the following key sequences:

B THEN 8. Announces the location of the column viewer and how many columns there are. B THEN 7. Announces the position of the left edge of the column viewer. B THEN 9. Announces the position of the right edge of the column viewer.

CHORD B A. Defines a column and says the current entry. CHORD B 0. Brings up the Customization menu. CHORD B 1. Reads from the top of the column to the current column-viewer position. CHORD B 5. Reads the current column entry. CHORD B 7. Reads from the current column-viewer position down to the bottom of the column. CHORD B 2. Moves the column viewer up one line and reads the column entry. CHORD B 8. Moves the column viewer down one line and reads the column entry. CHORD B 4. Moves the column viewer left one column and reads the column entry, or sets the left edge manually, depending on auto/manual mode setting. CHORD B 6. Moves the column viewer right one column and reads the column entry, or sets the right edge manually, depending on auto/manual mode setting. CHORD B 3. Moves the column viewer to the top of the column. CHORD B 9. Moves the column viewer to the bottom of the column. CHORD B *. Moves the column viewer to the previous position. Press this chord twice to go back 2 positions. B THEN CHORD B 1. Moves to column 1. B THEN CHORD B 2. Moves to column 2. B THEN CHORD B 3. Moves to column 3. B THEN CHORD B 4. Moves to column 4. B THEN CHORD B 5. Moves to column 5. B THEN CHORD B 6. Moves to column 6. B THEN CHORD B 7. Moves to column 7. B THEN CHORD B 8. Moves to column 8. B THEN CHORD B 9. Moves to column 9. B THEN CHORD B A N. Reassigns a column number. For example, if you find that you frequently use the eleventh column on a screen, you might find it convenient to assign the eleventh column to B THEN CHORD B 6 for ease of use. To reassign this column, move the pointer to any word in the eleventh text column and press B THEN CHORD B A. You will be prompted to press a number between 1 and 9. Press 6. You can now use B THEN CHORD B 6 to jump to column 11.

NOTE: Key sequences B THEN CHORD B 1 through B THEN CHORD B 9 are the go-to keys. If you want to reset the go-to keys to their default functions, use CHORD B 0 to hear the Customization menu, then choose option 4.

CUSTOMIZATION MENU

When you are working with complex screen formats, you might not be satisfied with the columns established automatically with the column viewer. Therefore, the column viewer provides a manual mode that enables you to define the left and right edges of your column view at specific positions.

Press CHORD B 0 to use the Customization menu. This menu has four options:

1. Cycle auto and manual modes. 2. Define left and right edge strings. 3. Report the status of options 1 and 2. 4. Reset the go-to keys to their defaults.

When you are in manual mode, CHORD B A is the only key sequence that automatically selects column boundaries. When you press CHORD B A in manual mode, a prompt asks if you want to use the current edge-string definitions. If you press key 2 for "No," you are prompted to define the characters on the left and right edges. In manual mode, CHORD B 4 and CHORD B 6 are used to define the left and right edges, respectively. (In automatic mode, these chords are used to move the column viewer left and right.)

The position of these edges will not change under any circumstance while moving the column view up and down. Also, you cannot move the column view left or right in manual mode.

The top and bottom of the screen define the top and bottom of the column while in manual mode.

The last option on the Customization menu is used to reset all of the column assignments you made with key sequence B THEN CHORD B A.

NOTE: For detailed information on the column-viewer feature, refer to the "User Interface" section of the SMARTCOL.KPD file in the \SRD22 directory.

EDIT FACILITY

The edit facility enables Screen Reader/2 to announce text automatically, based on cursor movements. It has two main functions, browsing and echoing, each with several modes. In addition, there are several related options and switches.

Browsing is used primarily for reading. The browse modes, Line Browse and Column Browse, enable you to hear the character, word, or line at the cursor, depending on how the cursor has moved and which mode is active. Only one browse mode may be active at a time.

Echoing is used primarily for writing. The echo modes announce what you just typed, character by character, one word at a time, or line by line. Multiple echo modes may be active simultaneously.

NOTE: Only Character Echo is available while typing or moving the cursor outside the viewport; all other browse and echo modes remain inactive until the cursor returns inside the viewport.

Several edit switches and options are also available. These options enable you to do the following:

1. Stop unwanted verbalization.

2. Add margin alerts.

3. Modify the response to the BACKSPACE and DELETE keys.

4. Modify the delete look-ahead feature.

5. Turn function-key processing On or Off.

6. Set the browse talking level.

7. Disable or enable the edit facility for individual controls.

8. Hear the current selection of active edit functions.

9. Toggle the current edit selection On or Off.

10. Turn on edit defaults.

All edit facility functions start with the D key or with a chord containing the D key.

NOTE: The edit facility is not available in DOS full-screen sessions.

BROWSES

This section discusses the Line Browse and Column Browse key sequences and functions.

LINE BROWSE

D THEN *. Toggles Line Browse On or Off.

Each time you move the cursor when Line Browse is on, Screen Reader/2 reads the character, the word, or the line at the cursor, depending on which direction you move the cursor.

If you move the cursor horizontally character by character, Screen Reader/2 reads the new character at the cursor after each movement.

If an application allows you to move horizontally a word at a time (for example, using CTRL+RIGHT ARROW or CTRL+LEFT ARROW), Screen Reader/2 reads the new word at the cursor after each movement.

If you move the cursor vertically or diagonally, Screen Reader/2 reads the new cursor line after each movement. If the cursor movement causes the text to scroll vertically, you may experience a slight delay before Line Browse reads the new line to you.

Line Browse responds also to character deletions using the BACKSPACE and DELETE keys.

NOTE: When Line Browse is activated, Column Browse is automatically turned off.

COLUMN BROWSE

D THEN 0. Toggles Column Browse On or Off.

Column Browse is almost identical to Line Browse except that if you move vertically or diagonally, instead of reading lines, it reads the word or the partial word, starting at the cursor position. This feature was designed primarily for text that is formatted in columns. Column Browse works best with monospaced fonts.

If the cursor movement causes the text to scroll vertically, you may experience a slight delay before Column Browse reads the new word to you.

NOTE: When Column Browse is activated, Line Browse is automatically turned off.

ECHOES

This section discusses the echo functions: Character, Word, and Line.

CHARACTER ECHO

D THEN 7. Toggles Character Echo On or Off.

With Character Echo On, Screen Reader/2 announces each printable character immediately after you type it. Screen Reader/2 does not announce non-printable characters such as TAB or ENTER.

Character Echo also responds to character deletions using the BACKSPACE and DELETE keys.

WORD ECHO

D THEN 8. Toggles Word Echo On or Off.

With Word Echo On, Screen Reader/2 announces a complete word. Screen Reader/2 uses a press of any of these keys: SPACEBAR, TAB, ENTER or any of the directional arrow keys to delimit a word.

Word Echo also responds to character deletions using the BACKSPACE and DELETE keys.

LINE ECHO

D THEN 9. Toggles Line Echo On or Off.

With Line Echo On, Screen Reader/2 reads the line just typed as soon as the cursor moves to a different line.

EDIT SWITCHES AND OPTIONS

This section discusses the switches and options available with the edit facility:

Flush. Edit Status. Edit Selection. Edit Defaults. Margin Alerts.

Edit Status. Character-Deletion Feedback. Function Keys On or Off. Toggle Edit for Controls. Browse Talking Level.

FLUSH

D THEN B. Toggles Flush On or Off.

When you move the cursor with Flush On, the text being spoken is stopped as soon as the movement is complete and immediately before Screen Reader/2 verbalizes the text at the new position. Flush is active only when a browse or echo mode is turned on.

For example, if you are browsing a document for a certain line, you may peruse the text line by line, using the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys with Line Browse turned on. When Flush is Off, each time you move down one line, you must listen to the entire line before you can listen to the next one. With Flush On, when you recognize that the line is not the one you want, you can move the cursor to the next line. Screen Reader/2 immediately stops reading the previous line so you may hear the current line without delay. The default is Flush Off.

EDIT STATUS

D THEN C. Announces the currently active browse and echo modes, as well as the status of related switches.

EDIT SELECTION ON OR OFF

D THEN #. Toggles current selections.

Turns On or Off all current browse and echo modes.

EDIT DEFAULTS

D THEN D. Switches to the default edit facility, turning Line Browse On, echoes Off, and Flush On.

MARGIN ALERTS

You can monitor the progress of the cursor across the text-editing area with a variety of edit facility beeps and verbal cues. This section discusses how to select a margin alert and how to set the boundary or starting position.

NOTE: This feature is available only if browse mode or echo mode is turned on.

Alert Types

CHORD D 8. Cycles through alert types:

Simple alert: A single beep when the threshold position is crossed.

Multiple alerts: A beep when the threshold position is crossed and every five characters to the right of it. Beeps are more frequent if there are less than twenty characters left from the threshold position to the end of the line. The edit facility will attempt to beep at least five times per line.

Composite alerts: A beep and a verbal cue when the threshold position is crossed and every five characters to the right of it. The verbal cue announces the current cursor position. Alerts are more frequent if there are less than twenty characters left from the margin to the end of the line. The edit facility will attempt to issue an alert at least five times per line.

No alerts.

NOTE: The default is no alerts. The default alert margin is at the 60th character position.

Move Margin Alert to the Left

CHORD D 7. Shifts the margin alert to the left by one character. For example, if the margin alert is at its default setting of the 60th character, pressing this key sequence resets it to the 59th character.

Move Margin Alert to the Right

CHORD D 9. Shifts the margin alert to the right by one character. For example, if the margin alert is at its default setting of the 60th character, pressing this key sequence resets it to the 61st character.

CHARACTER-DELETION FEEDBACK

Echo modes respond to character deletions by echoing characters, partial words, or complete words. This section discusses how to use and customize this feature.

Deletion-Feedback Types

CHORD D C THEN 7. Cycles through deletion-feedback types.

When you use the DELETE key or the destructive BACKSPACE key in conjunction with echoes, you can choose one of the following three types of feedback:

The DELETE key echoes the new character at the cursor position. The destructive BACKSPACE key echoes the character being removed.

The DELETE key echoes a partial word starting at the cursor position. The destructive BACKSPACE key echoes the character being removed.

The DELETE and destructive BACKSPACE keys echo the whole word at the cursor.

The default is for the DELETE key to echo the new character at the cursor and for the destructive BACKSPACE key to echo the character being removed.

NOTE: Deletion feedback is not available if Line Echo is the only active echo mode and no browses are active.

Cycle Length of Deletion Look-Ahead

CHORD D C THEN 9. Cycles through lengths of the deletion look-ahead (3 through 20).

If a line contains repeating characters and you delete several, Screen Reader/2 may not be able to detect that characters were deleted, because the character at the cursor position does not change. For example, if a line contains nine asterisks and you delete five, the character at the cursor position is still an asterisk. However, Screen Reader/2 provides a deletion look-ahead feature. You can set the number of characters that you want Screen Reader/2 to look ahead. This number can be from 3 to 20; the default length of the deletion look-ahead is 3. When you set the look-ahead size, Screen Reader/2 looks ahead that number of characters to see if text has changed. Thus, it can detect that characters were deleted.

Announce Length of Deletion Look-Ahead

CHORD D C THEN 8. Announces the length of the deletion look-ahead.

FUNCTION KEYS ON OR OFF

CHORD D C THEN C. Toggles function-keys processing On or Off.

By using this feature, you can decide whether browse modes ignore function-key combinations or process them like other keys. When function-keys processing is turned Off, the edit facility ignores cursor movements caused by function-key combinations. When it is on, the edit facility processes cursor movements caused by function-key presses. Screen Reader/2 will speak according to the rules of echo and browse modes. The default is Off.

TOGGLE EDIT FOR CONTROLS

CHORD D C THEN O. Enables and disables the edit facility for controls.

If you are navigating menus, notebooks, and other controls with a browse mode turned on, you might encounter a situation in which both the Presentation Manager profile and the edit facility are talking at the same time. To avoid this, place the cursor at the location where the duplicate verbalization is occurring and press CHORD D C THEN 0. This toggles the edit facility off for that control only.

If, on the other hand, you find that the edit facility is quiet when you would expect it to work, place the cursor on the control in question and press CHORD D C THEN 0. This activates the edit facility for that control and the control will now be read whenever the cursor travels over it.

You can have a maximum of 128 controls active at one time. If you try to add more than that, Screen Reader/2 announces that the list is full, removes the last control from the list, and adds the current one.

BROWSE TALKING LEVEL

CHORD D C THEN D. Toggles the browse talking level.

There are two talking levels available in browse modes: moderate and chatty. Moderate is the default.

When the browse talking level is set to moderate, Screen Reader/2 reads text only when a cursor movement is directly caused by a key press. As a result, when a single key press causes a series of cursor movements, Screen Reader/2 might not read the line the cursor is on at the end of the process. For example, when you press ENTER in a 3270 terminal-emulation session, the cursor can move through a number of screen refreshes before it finally comes to rest. In the moderate browse talking level, Screen Reader/2 will read the result of the first cursor movement, which may be a blank, but nothing after that.

When the browse talking level is set to chatty, verbalization is triggered by all cursor movements, even when these are not directly caused by a key press. You may find chatty browse level especially helpful in a 3270 terminal-emulation session.

SAVING YOUR SETTINGS

You can use the edit facility settings that you define any time during the session in which you defined them. However, if you end the session or turn off your computer, the definitions are erased.

To save your edit facility settings for use at another time, use key sequence B THEN *. Refer to the section "Saving Your Screen Reader/2 Settings" for more information on this topic.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

Screen Reader/2 provides you with many convenient and helpful features. The tutorial introduced you to the primary functions; the following sections discuss functions that will help you to work more productively. You may not need these functions when you first start using Screen Reader/2, but they can be useful as you become more proficient in using the system.

ADVANCED READING KEY SEQUENCES

The following sections discuss key sequences that make Screen Reader/2 read the screen for you:

Characters. First, Middle, and Last Word. Rest of a Word. Rest of a Line. Sentences. Current Paragraph. Read Fields. Format Shortcuts.

CHARACTERS

0 THEN 7. Reads the character in the line above the current cursor or pointer location. 0 THEN 9. Reads the character in the line below the current cursor or pointer location.

FIRST, MIDDLE, AND LAST WORD

B THEN 1. Reads the first word of the current line. B THEN 2. Reads the middle word of the current line. B THEN 3. Reads the last word of the current line.

THE REST OF A WORD

Screen Reader/2 enables you to read the rest of the current word, as well as the rest of the word directly above and below it. This function is useful when you work with columns of information.

B THEN 4. Reads the rest of the word above the current cursor or pointer location. B THEN 5. Reads the rest of the word at the current cursor or pointer location.

B THEN 6. Reads the rest of the word below the current cursor or pointer location.

THE REST OF A LINE

0 THEN C. Reads from the current cursor or pointer location to the end of the line.

SENTENCES

You can read complete sentences with Screen Reader/2. The definition of a Screen Reader/2 sentence is:

It ends with a period, question mark, or exclamation mark, and can be preceded and followed by a single or double quote.

It must be preceded by another complete sentence, a blank line, or the top of the viewport. It also must be followed by another sentence, a blank line, or the bottom of the viewport.

Its ending punctuation is followed by either one or two spaces, as defined with key sequence CHORD D 2. (Screen Reader/2 treats multiple spaces in Presentation Manager applications as single spaces).

D THEN 1. Reads the previous sentence. D THEN 2. Reads the current sentence. D THEN 3. Reads the next sentence. CHORD D 2. Toggles between one and two spaces as part of the definition of the end of a sentence. The default is two spaces.

NOTE: A blank line, the screen top, or the screen bottom also signal the beginning or ending of a sentence.

CURRENT PARAGRAPH

A paragraph is any text between two blank lines or between a window boundary (top or bottom) and a blank line.

D THEN A. Reads the current paragraph.

READ FIELDS

A field is a contiguous area of the display with the same attributes. An attribute determines how an item appears on the screen, such as color, font, underlining, blinking, and so forth. Therefore, a field can be one character, several characters, a line, several lines, or an entire screen.

Using Screen Reader/2, you can read the previous, current, and next fields, and the rest of the current field. You can also specify the characteristics that Screen Reader/2 uses to determine a field. The first four key sequences, * THEN 1, * THEN 2, * THEN 3, and * THEN A, are useful, for example, for reading menus that ask for input into highlighted fields.

Use key sequences * THEN H and CHORD * H to change the way Screen Reader/2 defines a field. You can specify that Screen Reader/2 uses only the background color, only the foreground color, both foreground and background colors, or no color when it determines a field. (You should specify no color if you only want to use font information.)

For example, if an application has a menu on which the choices all appear with the same background color, but the first letter of each choice is a different color, you can set the field definition to background. In this case, Screen Reader/2 reads the entire word as a field rather than considering the first letter and the rest of the word as separate fields.

You can also ask Screen Reader/2 to include font changes in the field definition. A font is the style of letters used to display information. Usually, a document will be displayed all in one font, such as Helvetica, Courier, or Bookman. A different font might be used within a document to draw attention to a particular character or word.

The default field definition is the mixture of attributes (foreground and background) with font changes ignored.

The previous, current, and next fields are relative to the cursor or pointer location for the following key sequences:

  • THEN 1. Reads the previous field.
  • THEN 2. Reads the current field.
  • THEN 3. Reads the next field.
  • THEN A. Reads the rest of the current field.
  • THEN H. Cycles through the field definitions:

foreground, background, both, or neither. CHORD * A. Announces the font definition of the current character. CHORD * H. Toggles between font changes not defining a new field (the default) and defining a new field.

FORMAT SHORTCUTS

The following key sequences are reading shortcuts. They save time because you do not have to switch from your active format to the spell or phonetic format and then switch back; Screen Reader/2 does it for you automatically.

For example, if you are using text format to read, pressing * THEN 5 spells the word at the current pointer or cursor position, then Screen Reader/2 switches back to text format.

SPELLING SHORTCUTS

The following key sequences enable you to spell words quickly:

  • THEN 4. Spells the previous word.
  • THEN 5. Spells the current word.
  • THEN 6. Spells the next word.
  • THEN B. Spells the current word with capital letters announced.

PHONETIC SHORTCUTS

When you have trouble understanding a particular character or word, you can use the phonetic shortcut keys to help you determine what the synthesizer is saying.

The phonetic alphabet uses a word beginning with the same letter to represent each character in our regular alphabet.

PHONETIC ALPHABET

Alpha        | Bravo        | Charlie      | Delta
Echo         | Foxtrot      | Golf         | Hotel
India        | Juliet       | Kilo         | Lima
Mike         | November     | Oscar        | Papa
Quebec       | Romeo        | Sierra       | Tango
Uniform      | Victor       | Whiskey      | X-ray
Yankee       | Zulu

You can use key sequence * THEN D to switch to the phonetic format, or use the following key sequences to hear a phonetic representation of just the previous, current, and next characters.

  • THEN 7. Spells the previous character using the phonetic alphabet.
  • THEN 8. Spells the current character using the phonetic alphabet.
  • THEN 9. Spells the next character using the phonetic alphabet.

ANNOUNCING VALUES

This section discusses key sequences that announce the following values:

ASCII Character Value. Color of Character. Icons. Text Attributes.

ASCII CHARACTER VALUE

  • THEN C. Announces the ASCII value of the current

character.

COLOR OF CHARACTER

0 THEN 8. Announces the color of the character at the current cursor or pointer location.

Screen Reader/2 tells you the foreground color, then the background color of the current character. For example, Screen Reader/2 might say, "White on black."

ICONS

You can choose the way Screen Reader/2 announces icons which are the pictures that represent the items you want to work with, such as application programs, data files, and printers. This function is called Icon Scanning.

You can set Icon Scanning to read all icons, the icons it knows (or recognizes), or no icons. You may also change the name of an icon or give an unknown icon a name.

The following key sequences are used to change the way that icons on your screen are announced:

CHORD D *. Toggles the announcing of icons to All, Known, or Not Speaking Icons. If set to All, and an icon is not known by Screen Reader/2, you hear only "icon." If set to Known, and an icon is recognized by Screen Reader/2 you hear the icon name. If set to Not Speaking Icons, and an icon is not known by Screen Reader/2, you hear only "blank." CHORD D 0. Announces the current status of icon speaking (All, Known, or Not Speaking Icons). CHORD D #. Associates a text string with the current icon to identify it.

TEXT ATTRIBUTES

Screen Reader/2 can announce the appearance of text as it is reading the screen. It can describe capitalization, color, and font information.

Screen Reader/2 announces capitalization when you turn Caps Scan On with CHORD A 4. Here's how it works. If Caps Scan is On, Screen Reader/2 announces capital letters or mixed case as it reads. For example, if a word contains one capital letter, Screen Reader/2 announces "Caps" followed by the word. If a word contains a combination of capital and lower-case letters Screen Reader/2 announces "Mixed" followed by the word. The default for Caps Scan is Off.

Screen Reader/2 can announce colors as it is reading the screen. For example, many editors use white on dark blue as the default. If you set Color Scan On, by using CHORD 0 8, you hear those colors announced if they are changed. You can set Color Scan Off to stop hearing the colors announced. You can move the cursor or pointer (depending on which mode you are in) to a place on the screen where the default color is displayed and press CHORD 0 7. This key sequence sets the default color. The next time you highlight text, such as with bold or underline, the editor will (for most programs) change the color of the highlighted text and announce the new color. The default for Color Scan is Off.

Screen Reader/2 announces font changes when you turn Font Scan On with CHORD 0 2. Here's how it works. If Font Scan is On, Screen Reader/2 scans for font changes in Presentation Manager and Windows applications. If you change a font or type style, Screen Reader/2 announces that change. If you change a point size you hear the point size of each character. The default for Font Scan is Off.

Key sequences used for scanning:

CHORD 0 7. Toggles setting and clearing the default color. CHORD 0 8. Toggles Color Scan On or Off. CHORD A 3. Announces the status for scan. CHORD A 4. Toggles Caps Scan On or Off. CHORD A 7. Cycles through mixed case handling: Says cap before each capital letter. Says mixed and cap. Says cap only to separate words. Says mixed only (default) CHORD * 2. Toggles Font Scan On or Off.

IGNORING CHARACTERS

You can instruct Screen Reader/2 to ignore characters on the screen. Ignoring characters is useful, for example, when a program uses a line of equals signs as a boundary between sections. An ignored character is treated as a blank.

  1. THEN H. Starts ignoring characters you specify.

CHORD # H. Stops ignoring characters you specify. CHORD # S. Stops ignoring all characters previously specified.

After pressing key sequence # THEN H or CHORD # H, type the characters (without any spaces between them) that you want Screen Reader/2 to start or stop ignoring, and then press ENTER.

MOUSE SIMULATION

Screen Reader/2 can simulate the actions of a mouse, and announce the status of mouse toggles and the window containing the mouse pointer.

Key sequences used for mouse movement are:

CHORD 2 3 THEN 1. Toggles moving the mouse to follow the Screen Reader/2 pointer On or Off. CHORD 2 3 THEN 3. Toggles mouse tracking On or Off (described following this list). CHORD 2 3 THEN 4. Simulates a single click on mouse button 1. CHORD 2 3 THEN 5. Simulates a double click on mouse button 1. CHORD 2 3 THEN 6. Simulates a single click on mouse button 2. CHORD 2 3 THEN 8. Announces the window containing the mouse pointer. CHORD 2 3 THEN A. Moves the mouse pointer to the Screen Reader/2 pointer. CHORD 2 3 THEN C. Cycles through the following three mouse movements: Horizontal mouse movement only. Vertical mouse movement only. Both vertical and horizontal mouse movement. (This is the default.) CHORD 2 3 THEN H. Announces the status of mouse settings (mouse movement with pointer, mouse tracking, and mouse movement settings).

When mouse tracking is On, speech occurs when the mouse pointer moves to new text, over an icon for a minimized application, or over a title. The click-key sequences of

the mouse button perform the action where the mouse pointer is located. If mouse tracking is Off, the mouse pointer moves to the Screen Reader/2 pointer and the clicking action is performed. The mouse-tracking default is Off.

When mouse movement with the Screen Reader/2 pointer is On, the mouse pointer moves to the location of what you are hearing when the pointer changes. The default is Off.

NOTE: You must have a mouse installed to use the mouse key sequences.

MOVING THE POINTER

In the tutorial, you learned to move the pointer by reading characters, words, and lines; by moving the pointer to the cursor; and by reading specific lines. Three ways to move the pointer directly to specific areas of the view follow:

0 THEN D. Moves the pointer to the right edge of the view at the current line. 0 THEN #. Moves the pointer to the bottom-left corner of the view. 0 THEN *. Moves the pointer to the top-left corner of the view.

SEARCHING BACKWARDS

In the tutorial, you learned how to search forward for a string of characters from the top of the view by using key sequences # THEN 1, # THEN 2, and # THEN 3. You can also search backward for a string from the bottom of the view by using the following chords.

CHORD # 1. Searches backward for a string from the bottom of the view. You are prompted to enter the string to be found. CHORD # 2. Continues backward search. CHORD # 3. Searches backward for the same string from the bottom of the view. (If you have changed pages, this chord searches from the bottom of the new view.)

SETTING SWITCHES

Screen Reader/2 contains several "switches" that you can turn On or Off for the following features:

A THEN 4. Caps. A THEN 5. Spaces. A THEN 6. Dictionary.

A THEN 7. Pause. A THEN 8. Wrap. A THEN 9. Numbering. A THEN 0. ForceSpell. A THEN B. Graphics. A THEN #. Status of switches (On or Off). A THEN *. KeyEcho.

  • THEN B. Spell current word with capitals.
  1. THEN B. Keyboard lock-key status.

CHORD A 0. SpellCaps. CHORD A 6. Trailing.

CAPS

A THEN 4. Toggles Caps On or Off.

The Caps switch setting tells Screen Reader/2 what to do when it spells a word containing capital letters. With Caps On, capital letters are preceded by the word cap. Caps Off is the default; all characters are treated as lowercase.

SPACES

A THEN 5. Toggles Spaces On or Off.

The Spaces switch setting tells Screen Reader/2 whether or not to announce spaces when you are in spell, phonetic, or pronounce formats.

The default number of spaces to be announced between words is one or more. You can change this default by using CHORD A 5 THEN N. n is the number of spaces that you want Screen Reader/2 to announce between words. Fewer than n are not announced. Refer to the description of Trailing in this section.

Spaces Off is the default.

DICTIONARY

A THEN 6. Toggles Dictionary On or Off.

If you would like certain words to be read differently from the way the synthesizer currently says them, you can add, to the Screen Reader/2 dictionary, these words and the replacement words that you want Screen Reader/2 to read. With Dictionary On in text or pronounce formats, Screen Reader/2 looks in the dictionary for alphabetic parts of words. If it finds a word, it sends the dictionary-replacement word to the synthesizer.

For example, OS (for Operating System) is included in your dictionary list of words. Because your synthesizer might read it as "OZ," the replacement word "O S" provides the correct pronunciation to be used.

You can add your own words to the list, delete words, or change them by using the Screen Reader/2 Message Settings notebook.

Dictionary On is the default.

GRAPHICS

A THEN B. Toggles Graphics On or Off.

The Graphics switch tells Screen Reader/2 how to treat box characters.

When Graphics is On and text (including box characters) is spoken, Screen Reader/2 announces the name of the box character.

Graphics Off is the default.

PAUSE

A THEN 7. Toggles Pause On or Off.

The Pause switch setting tells Screen Reader/2 whether or not to hesitate between words.

Pause Off is the default.

WRAP

A THEN 8. Toggles Wrap On or Off.

When the Wrap switch is On, Screen Reader/2 does not recognize the right edge of the viewport as the end of a line. Instead, it reads from the current position (cursor or pointer) to the bottom of the viewport.

Wrap Off is the default.

NUMBERING

A THEN 9. Toggles Numbering On or Off.

When Numbering is on, Screen Reader/2 announces the line number as each line is spoken for the remainder of the viewport.

Numbering Off is the default.

FORCESPELL

A THEN 0. Toggles ForceSpell On or Off.

The ForceSpell setting causes Screen Reader/2 to either spell or pronounce a word that has no vowels. When ForceSpell is On, Screen Reader/2 spells any word without a vowel. When ForceSpell is Off, these words are spoken.

This switch is important when your synthesizer is reading numbers or abbreviations. For example, you may want ForceSpell Off if your synthesizer announces numbers such as 9600 as ninety-six hundred instead of nine six zero zero, or if it announces abbreviations such as Mr. as "mister" instead of "m r dot."

ForceSpell On is the default.

Screen Reader/2 spells the word at the current cursor or pointer location. When Screen Reader/2 encounters a capital letter, it prefaces that letter with the word cap.

SPELLCAPS

CHORD A 0. Toggles SpellCaps On or Off.

With SpellCaps On, words with all capital letters are spelled instead of pronounced.

SpellCaps Off is the default.

TRAILING

CHORD A 6. Toggles Trailing On or Off.

The Trailing switch setting tells Screen Reader/2 whether or not it should read the characters trailing the end of a word or line. Spaces must be On and your format must be pronounce, spell, or phonetic.

For example, if you request that the OS/2 [C:\] prompt be read--with Spaces and Trailing On and in spell format--you hear "left bracket C colon backslash right bracket awe 75 spaces."

The word-definition setting determines what is considered "trailing".

Trailing Off is the default.

NOTE: The word awe signals that a character is repeated three or more times in succession. Awe was chosen because it is a short word and a word that you probably will not encounter often. The need for a word such as awe to denote repetitive characters can be demonstrated using the "75 spaces" example. "75 spaces," the text spoken by your synthesizer, could literally be on the screen. When you hear the word awe preceding it, you know that Screen Reader/2 counted the occurrences of the repetitive character and is telling you the number. The word awe precedes all character repetitions of three or more, not just when the Trailing switch is On.

KEY ECHO

A THEN *. Toggles Key Echo On or Off.

The Key Echo switch setting tells Screen Reader/2 whether or not it should echo the key that is pressed.

Key Echo Off is the default.

NOTE: Key Echo is not available in DOS full-screen sessions.

STATUS OF SWITCHES

A THEN #. Announces the status of switches.

Screen Reader/2 tells you which switches are not at their default settings.

WORD-DEFINITION SETTINGS

A THEN C. Cycles through the following word definitions:

Alphabetic. Alphanumeric. Nonblank.

In Screen Reader/2, the default definition of a word is a nonblank string followed by trailing blanks.

To save your Screen Reader/2 switch settings, use B THEN

  • . Refer to Saving Screen Reader/2 Settings for more

information on this topic.

STATUS INFORMATION

Using a keypad key sequence, you can request the status of the keyboard lock keys and some Screen Reader/2 modes, formats, cursor and pointer positions, and viewport boundaries.

LOCK KEYS

  1. THEN 4. Announces the status of the following keys:

Caps Lock. Num Lock. Scroll Lock.

  1. THEN B. Toggles the announcing of lock status On or

Off.

NOTE: This feature is not available in full-screen sessions.

CURRENT FORMAT

  1. THEN 5. Announces the current format (text, pronounce,

spell, phonetic).

CURRENT VIEWPORT BOUNDARIES

  1. THEN 6. Announces the current viewport boundaries.

When you are in a text view, you hear the top, left, bottom, and right row and column settings, in that order. When you are in a Presentation Manager or seamless Windows view, you hear bottom, left, top, and right pixel settings, in that order.

CURRENT MODE AND POSITION

  1. THEN 9. Announces the current mode (cursor or pointer).

In cursor mode, you hear the location of the cursor; in pointer mode, you hear the location of the pointer.

CURSOR/POINTER LOCATION

  1. THEN C. Announces the cursor location (line and

column).

  1. THEN 8. Announces the pointer location (line and

column).

POP-UP KEYPAD

With the advent of laptop computers, you can take your work with you when you leave the office. Now, you can also take Screen Reader/2 with you! Screen Reader/2 enables you to set up a pop-up keypad so you can enter all of the keypad key sequences on your keyboard.

The pop-up keypad is a block of sixteen keys on the keyboard that corresponds to the Screen Reader/2 keypad. The pop-up keypad is set up to work on the left side of your keyboard, but you can set up the keys on the right side of your keyboard, if you prefer. Refer to the section "Arranging the Pop-Up Keypad Keys" for more information.

NOTE: The Screen Reader/2 keypad is always active and is not affected by the pop-up keypad.

You can also redefine pop-up keypad keys to other keyboard keys. This enables you to set up your pop-up keypad anywhere on your keyboard. For example, you might prefer your keypad to be defined on the numeric keypad.

NOTE: The pop-up keypad is not available in DOS full-screen sessions and some error panels. Therefore, if you are using DOS applications, you should run them only in a DOS window.

USING THE POP-UP KEYPAD

When the pop-up keypad is active on the keyboard, you can work in one of two modes: 1) you can read with Screen Reader/2 or, 2) you can work with an application. The two modes are mutually exclusive. For example, when you use WordPerfect to create a document, there are various function keys that perform actions such as moving blocks of text, highlighting text, and so on. When the pop-up keypad is active, these function keys are disabled. Therefore, you must toggle between the pop-up keypad and the regular keyboard to work with the document.

To use the pop-up keypad, press CHORD A 1 THEN B to toggle the Hot key on. (The Hot key is the keyboard key sequence used to enable or disable the pop-up keypad.) Then press and release ALT+SHIFT together to make the pop-up keypad active. To re-enable the normal keyboard functions, press and release ALT+SHIFT again.

POP-UP KEYPAD DEFAULTS

Unless you specify otherwise, the pop-up keypad has the following defaults:

The pop-up keypad is active on the left side of the keyboard.

The Hot key is ALT+SHIFT; the Stop key is CTRL.

The default for the Hot key and the Stop key is Off.

When you activate the pop-up keypad using the Hot key, you hear "Pop-up." When you deactivate the pop-up keypad, you hear "Pop-down."

Each time you press a key on the pop-up keypad, you hear a low-pitched beep.

When the pop-up keypad is active, pressing any other keyboard key causes a high-pitched beep, which indicates an error.

The typing area of the keyboard is disabled while the pop-up keypad is active.

CHANGING THE KEYPAD DEFAULTS

You can change some of the pop-up keypad defaults by using the following key sequences:

CHORD A 1 THEN 0. Announces the values from the last key pressed (flag byte, scan code, and character code in decimal). Refer to the PAL Reference, "System Statements", for details about these values. CHORD A 1 THEN 1. Toggles between the pop-up keypad being active on the left side or the right side of the keyboard. CHORD A 1 THEN 2. Cycles through Hot key and Stop key choices. (This key sequence is provided to help you avoid conflict with your applications. For example, if the application you are running uses the ALT key to jump to the action bar, you cannot use the ALT key for the Stop key, because the application takes precedence over the Screen Reader/2 key assignment.)

The choices are: 1. CTRL+SHIFT for Hot key; ALT for Stop key.

2. ALT+CTRL for Hot key; SHIFT for Stop key. 3. ALT+SHIFT for Hot key; CTRL for Stop key.

NOTE: In Presentation Manager application programs, do not use choice 1, CTRL+SHIFT for Hot key; ALT for Stop key. The reason is all PM application programs use the ALT key for menu operations. Screen Reader/2 cannot recognize the ALT key. This causes a situation where it seems to Screen Reader/2 that the Stop key is held down and any key sequence you try subsequently is recognized as a chord with the Stop key.

CHORD A 1 THEN 3. Toggles between audible feedback when you are using the pop-up keys (the default) or no feedback. The feedback includes what you hear when you use the Hot key ("pop-up" or "pop-down"), when you use the pop-up keypad keys (a low-pitched beep), and when you press a keyboard key that is not on the pop-up keypad (a high-pitched beep). CHORD A 1 THEN 4. Toggles between disabling only the keyboard keys of the pop-up keypad or the entire typing area of the keyboard while the pop-up keypad is active (the default). This means that while the pop-up keypad is active, the default is that nothing you type will be displayed on the screen. CHORD A 1 THEN 5. Announces the status of the pop-up keypad settings. The status tells you the following: 1. Whether the pop-up keypad is active or inactive. 2. Whether the Hot key is enabled or disabled. 3. The keys you are using for the Hot key and the Stop key. 4. Whether the location of the pop-up keypad is left, right, or user-defined. 5. Whether just the keyboard keys of the pop-up keypad are disabled or whether the entire typing area of the keyboard is disabled.

6. Whether audible feedback will be heard when the pop-up keypad is active. CHORD A 1 THEN B. Toggles the Hot key On or Off. (The default is Off.) CHORD A 2 THEN N. Redefines pop-up keypad key n to another keyboard key. CHORD A 2 THEN S. Stops redefining pop-up keypad key n.

NOTE: If you hear "undefined" when you press a key sequence that you know is defined, you may have inadvertently pressed either ALT+ESC, CTRL+ESC, or SHIFT+ESC while the pop-up keypad was active. These keyboard key sequences should not be used when you are using the pop-up keypad.

To correct the problem, press each ALT, CTRL, and SHIFT key on your keyboard once to reset it.

ARRANGING POP-UP KEYPAD KEYS

Screen Reader/2 enables you to use either the left or right side of the keyboard for the pop-up keypad. The default is for the pop-up keypad to be on the left side.

The keypad keys on the left side of the keyboard have this arrangement:

The keyboard keys 1, 2, 3, and 4 correspond to keypad keys 1, 2, 3, and A. The keyboard keys Q, W, E, and R correspond to keypad keys 4, 5, 6, and B. The keyboard keys A, S, D, and F correspond to keypad keys 7, 8, 9, and C. The keyboard keys Z, X, C, and V correspond to keypad keys *, 0, #, and D. The keyboard key TAB corresponds to the keypad key HELP. The keyboard key CTRL corresponds to the keypad key STOP.

If you prefer to set up the keypad keys on the right side of the keyboard, you can select the following arrangement using CHORD A 1 THEN 1:

The keyboard keys 7, 8, 9, and 0 correspond to keypad keys 1, 2, 3, and A. The keyboard keys U, I, O, and P correspond to keypad keys 4, 5, 6, and B. The keyboard keys J, K, L, and ; correspond to keypad keys 7, 8, 9, and C. The keyboard keys M, ,, ., and / correspond to keypad keys *, 0, #, and D. The keyboard key ENTER corresponds to the keypad key HELP.

The keyboard key CTRL corresponds to the keypad key STOP.

If you prefer to set up the keypad keys in another location (such as the numeric keypad), use key sequence CHORD A 2 THEN N.

ACTIVATING THE POP-UP KEYPAD AUTOMATICALLY

If you want the pop-up keypad to be active when you start Screen Reader/2, you need to follow these steps with the keypad attached:

1. Press CHORD A 1 THEN B to activate the Hot key.

2. Specify your pop-up keypad preferences (where you want your keypad located on your keyboard, the key you want to use for the Hot key, and so forth).

3. If you want the pop-up keypad available as you start Screen Reader/2, press key sequence B THEN * to save your current settings.

NOTE:

1. If the keypad is not attached to your system the next time you start your computer, an error message will be displayed requiring you to press ENTER to continue the startup process. Depending on how you plan to use your system, there are two ways to deal with this error.

The first method is recommended if you plan to use the keypad only occasionally. To avoid having to press ENTER during the startup process, you can add the following statement to the beginning of the CONFIG.SYS file:

pauseonerror=no

The second method is recommended if you plan to use the pop-up keypad exclusively. You can add the word rem to the beginning of the line that reads:

x:\srd22\keypad.sys

x is the drive on which Screen Reader/2 is installed.

2. If the keypad is not attached to your system the next time you start Screen Reader/2, you will hear a warning message. However, Screen Reader/2 will still start. If you do not want the warning message to be spoken, change the

Keypad option to No in the Message Settings Notebook.

ALTERNATIVE METHOD

There is an alternative way to start the pop-up keypad. You can remove the two dashes (-- --) from the line of the KEYPAD.KPD file that reads:

-- -- keypad_enable:= true;

After saving the modified KEYPAD.KPD file, type PAL SRD2 at the SRD22 directory prompt. Then restart Screen Reader/2. Now the pop-up keypad is active when you start Screen Reader/2.

LEVELS OF TALKING

You can set the level, or amount, of talking that you want Screen Reader/2 to do when you are using many of the application profiles. When you set the level to chatty, Screen Reader/2 reads the most information, provides the fullest explanations, and gives the most feedback when changes occur. Chatty talking level is provided especially for new users.

When you set the level to moderate, Screen Reader/2 reads less information. Moderate level is the default.

When you set the level to quiet, Screen Reader/2 reads the least information. Quiet level is provided for users who are familiar with an application and who require little feedback.

For example, when you use the WordPerfect profile, chatty talking level reads the entire help window, the menu list, and the selected menu item. Moderate talking level reads the entire help window and the selected menu item. Quiet talking level reads only the help title and the selected menu item.

Explanations of what the different talking levels do for particular profiles are provided in the profile descriptions.

You can use CHORD A S to cycle through the three talking levels.

PROFILES

A profile is an ASCII text file used to control the key definitions and autospeaks for Screen Reader/2. A profile must be compiled and loaded into memory to be activated.

In Screen Reader/2, profiles are loaded into memory on a tier, which is a stack of profiles. The profile tier can change, depending on which program or process is running in the foreground. When a profile is loaded into memory on a tier, its key definitions take precedence over any other key definitions in the tier to which it is added.

In addition to the base profile, Screen Reader/2 provides profiles for a variety of software programs. These programs run under the following OS/2 2.1 environments:

DOS text. Presentation Manager. OS/2 text. Windows.

The profiles provided here were written for many popular programs. These profiles work with specific versions of the programs. We do not guarantee that the profiles will work with earlier or later versions of the programs. In addition, we may not provide profiles for earlier or later versions of the programs.

NOTE: You may be able to use a profile as the base for writing other profiles of a similar category or nature. For example, you may be able to use the Lotus 1 2 3 profile as a base for another program that would be considered a spreadsheet as well.

ADDING AND REMOVING PROFILES

You load application-specific profiles to control key sequences and autospeaks for the application started in each session. Application-specific profiles are added to the current profile tier in one of two ways:

1. Screen Reader/2 automatically adds a profile to the current tier as required for most base and extended OS/2 applications. In addition, Screen Reader/2 adds OS/2, DOS, and Windows application-specific profiles to the profile tier for applications listed in this User's Guide.

2. You can use key sequence # THEN A to add a profile to the profile tier. You can use CHORD # A to remove

the last profile from the tier. CHORD # B tells you which profiles are currently active. The first one spoken is the last one on the tier.

You can use the profiles that are provided with Screen Reader/2 as they are or you can modify them. In addition, you can create your own profiles. Use the Profile Access Language (PAL) to do this. (Refer to the PAL Reference for more information.)

LIST OF SCREEN READER/2 PROFILES

The following is an alphabetical list of all the profiles provided with Screen Reader/2. These profiles are for Presentation Manager, OS/2 text session, DOS session, or Windows programs. Each program type is noted next to the program name.

AmiPro (Windows). Base Screen Reader/2. Activities List (P M). Alarms (P M). BookManager Read/2 (P M). BookManager Read/DOS (DOS). Calculator (P M). Calculator (Windows). Calendar (P M). Command Prompt (DOS). Command Prompt (OS/2 text). Communications Manager (OS/2 text). Daily Planner (P M). DeScribe (P M). Enhanced Editor (P M). Hardware Error Pop-up (DOS). Hardware Error Pop-up (OS/2 text). Help for Windows (Windows). Installation Aid (OS/2 text). Lotus 1 2 3 (DOS). Lotus 1 2 3 (P M). Notepad (P M). Planner Archive (P M). PM Terminal (P M). Quicken (DOS). Quicken 2 (Windows). Spreadsheet (P M). Start Here (P M). System Editor (P M). To-Do List (P M). To-Do List Archive (P M). Word for Windows (Windows). WordPerfect (DOS). WordPerfect (Windows). WordScan Plus (Windows). View and Help Facility (P M). 3270 Emulation (OS/2 text). 5250 Emulation (OS/2 text).

BASE SCREEN READER/2

When Screen Reader/2 starts, the base Screen Reader/2 profile SRD2 is activated (unless you have specified otherwise). It includes all basic key sequences, and the icon, mouse, scan, and time functions.

The base Screen Reader/2 profile also includes the key sequences that you use for Presentation Manager screens, viewports, autospeaks, and column viewer, the pop-up keypad, and the edit facility.

There is a comprehensive listing of all base Screen Reader/2 key sequences in "Screen Reader/2 Key Sequences".

OS/2 2.1 PRESENTATION MANAGER APPLICATIONS

When you start any of the following Presentation Manager programs, Screen Reader/2 loads a corresponding profile. Under Presentation Manager, Screen Reader/2 automatically reads standard controls such as entry fields, pulldown menus, error messages, and the action bar.

The following Presentation Manager profiles are described in this section:

Activities List. Alarms. BookManager Read/2. Calculator. Calendar. Daily Planner. DeScribe. Enhanced Editor. Lotus 1 2 3. Notepad. Planner Archive. PM Terminal. Spreadsheet. Start Here. System Editor. To-Do List. To-Do List Archive. View and Help Facility.

ACTIVITIES LIST

The Activities List contains all your Daily Planner file entries. You use the Activities List for time-management tasks.

PROFILE NAME: PMDLIST

C THEN 2. Announces heading and activity entry information.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Key sequence C THEN 2 causes the heading information to be read. When you press key sequence C THEN 2, chatty reads the entry headings and expands on some. For example, it says "Alarm minutes before start time" and speaks the three activity types (Out of Office, Personal Holiday, and National Holiday). It also reads the information you entered and tells you entry columns that are blank. Moderate reads the entry headings but without expanding on them. For example, it says only "Alarm" and "Activity type." It also reads the information you entered. Quiet reads only the information you entered.

ALARMS

The Alarms program enables you to set alarms to go off during the day at the time you specify. You can also specify a screen message to be displayed.

PROFILE NAME: PMDALARM

C THEN 2. Reads alarm entry information.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 announces the static text for the spin-button entries when you are setting alarms.

When you press key sequence C THEN 2, the heading information is read. Chatty reads the entry headings and expands on some. For example, it says "Alarm time is set for" and "Source of information is." Moderate reads the entry headings but without expanding on them. For example, it says only "Alarm time" and "Source." Quiet reads just the information that appears in the selector.

BOOKMANAGER READ/2

The BookManager Read/2 program, version 1.2, displays online books.

PROFILE NAME: BOOKMGR2

C THEN A. Reads current screen. C THEN B. Toggles Page Browse On or Off.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 reads the page when Page Browse is On. Otherwise, it reads only the current window title. If there is a plus or minus next to an entry in a Table of

Contents, Screen Reader/2 says, "Plus to expand" or "Minus to collapse."

For chatty and moderate, Page Browse is On. For quiet, Page Browse is Off.

CALCULATOR

The Calculator program is like a hand-held calculator, enabling you to perform mathematical operations.

PROFILE NAME: PMDCALC

C THEN 1. Reads error information. C THEN 2. Announces the contents of the calculator memory. C THEN C. Reads the current value.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 announces changes in the memory area of the calculator. If Character Echo is On (the default), Screen Reader/2 says numbers as you type them. NumLock is turned on when the calculator program starts and whenever the focus is on the calculator. It will also speak any error messages, such as "Divide by 0." Screen Reader/2 announces the results after the EQUAL key is pressed.

Talking levels do not affect this profile.

CALENDAR

The Calendar program is part of the Daily Planner program. It displays a calendar into which you have entered appointments and meetings. You can choose to see details for any day.

PROFILE NAME: PMDCALEN

C THEN 1. Announces the day of the week, the day, the month, and the year.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 announces the new date when the day, month, or year changes:

   When the month or year changes, chatty announces the

day of the week (for example, Monday), as well as the day, month, and year. Moderate announces the day, month, and year. Quiet announces the day and month.

   When the day changes, chatty announces the day and

month. Moderate and quiet announce only the day,

unless you are on a day which is actually in the previous or next month. In that case, the day and month are announced.

DAILY PLANNER

The Daily Planner program enables you to keep a log of your past or future activities. With the planner, you can set an accompanying alarm for a future activity, mark an activity as completed, and archive the activity for future reference.

PROFILE NAME: PMDDIARY

C THEN 1. Announces the date. C THEN 2. Reads the current Daily Planner entry information. C THEN 3. Reads the activity type and completion status for the current entry. C THEN 5. Reads the column title and contents for the current entry.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 announces the date and Insert/Replace status. It also reads the new column title and contents when the cursor is under a new column header or when you scroll screen text.

When the date is announced, chatty says the new date, including the Julian date. (The Julian calendar counts days sequentially, not by months. For example, April 13, 1993 would be written 93103 in Julian format: 93 is the year; 103 is the number of days that have passed since the beginning of the year.) Moderate says only the day of the week and date. Quiet says only the month and day; for example, April 13.

When the new column title and contents are spoken or when you have scrolled text on the screen, chatty causes the column-header information to be treated like a help mode, telling you what is expected as input. Moderate reads the column information as it appears on the screen. Quiet reads just the contents of the entry for the current column.

DESCRIBE

The DeScribe word-processor program (version 4.0) enables you to create documents. You can merge text and graphics information, as well as create tables. You can also


(3) DeScribe is a registered trademark of DeScribe, Inc.

import files created with other word-processing programs, such as Microsoft Works.

PROFILE NAME: DESCRIBE

C THEN 1. Reads the font size. C THEN 2. Reads the font name. C THEN 3. Reads style information. C THEN 0. Reads the status line or message line.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

For chatty and moderate, Screen Reader/2 reads the help information automatically. For quiet, the help information is not read automatically.

ENHANCED EDITOR

The Enhanced Editor enables you to create and edit text files. You can also work with multiple files at the same time.

PROFILE NAME: EPM

C THEN 2. Reads the message line. C THEN 3. Reads the status line. C THEN A. Reads the text page.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 announces Insert/Replace status and the top and bottom of the file.

If you use the frame-control option for prompting, Screen Reader/2 reads the prompt information as you use the Enhanced Editor menu items.

LOTUS 1 2 3 FOR OS/2

The Lotus 1 2 3 application program is a spreadsheet that enables you to analyze data in many ways.

This profile is for Lotus 1 2 3 , Release 2.0.

PROFILE NAME: 123OS2

C THEN 4. Announces the current cell name.


(4) Works is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

(5) Lotus and 1-2-3 are registered trademarks of Lotus Development Corporation.

C THEN 6. Announces the current status (menu, error, help, and so forth). C THEN B. Toggles Cell Browse On or Off. C THEN 5. Reads the contents of the cell. C THEN D. Toggles the cell-name autospeak On or Off. CHORD C H. Reads the contents of the help box.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 announces the following:

The mode. Help or error boxes. Changes in the status indicators (Scroll Lock, Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Insert/Replace). Ranges while you are copying or moving cells.

Screen Reader/2 also reads the following:

All help topics displayed after you press F1 and the help options as you browse through them using the cursor keys. Each cell as you move to it, if you have set Cell Browse On using key sequence C B.

Chatty talking level automatically turns on Cell Browse (the default is Off). Quiet reads only the help title instead of the entire help page.

NOTEPAD

The Notepad program simulates a paper notepad on your desk. Instead of writing notes on paper, you type them using the Notepad.

PROFILE NAME: PMDNOTE

C THEN 1 THEN N. Announces the title of notepad page n. C THEN A. Reads the current notepad page.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 reads the title of the new note and announces Insert/Replace status.

Talking levels do not affect this profile.

PLANNER ARCHIVE

The Planner Archive program enables you to store your completed activity data for future reference and retrieval.

PROFILE NAME: PMDDARC

C THEN 2. Reads planner-archive entry information.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Chatty reads the entry headings and expands on some. For example, it says "Alarm minutes before start time" and speaks the three activity types (Out of Office, Personal Holiday, and National Holiday). It also reads the information you entered and tells you entry columns that are blank. Moderate reads the entry headings but without expanding on them. For example, it says only "Alarm" and "Activity type." It also reads the information you entered. Quiet reads only the information you entered.

P M TERMINAL

The P M Terminal program enables your personal computer to communicate with other computer systems by doing the following:

1. Emulating any of the supported terminals.

2. Transferring data (uploading and downloading) between your personal computer and other computer systems.

PROFILE NAME: SOFTERM

C THEN 4. Reads the cursor line minus 4. C THEN 5. Reads the cursor line minus 3. C THEN 6. Reads the cursor line minus 2. C THEN B. Reads the cursor line minus 1. CHORD C *. Switches between views of the status window, the P M Terminal text window, and the Presentation Manager window. CHORD C 4. Toggles P M Terminal text-window-monitor autospeak On or Off.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 automatically reads new information in the PM Terminal text window.

NOTE: This autospeak will only work when the view has been changed to the text-window view by using the chord C *.

Chatty and moderate cause Screen Reader/2 to read all of the information between prompts, or the entire screen if the previous prompt has scrolled off the screen. For quiet, only the current prompt line is read.

SPREADSHEET

The Spreadsheet program enables you to prepare budgets and simple reports, and to analyze data in many ways.

PROFILE NAME: PMSPREAD

C THEN 2. Reads formula field. C THEN B. Toggles Cell Browse On or Off. C THEN 3. Reads cell contents. C THEN D. Toggles cell-name autospeak On or Off.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 announces Insert/Replace status. It also announces, conditionally, the contents and name of the cell. The conditions are as follows:

1. If you turn on Cell Browse, C B, Screen Reader/2 reads the contents of the cell. 2. If you turn on cell-name, C D, Screen Reader/2 reads the cell name. 3. If you turn on Cell Browse, using C B, and the cell-name autospeak, using C D, Screen Reader/2 reads the cell name and cell contents.

NOTE: You will have to use the key sequences to turn on the cell-browse and the cell-name autospeaks because both are initially set to Off.

For chatty talking level, Cell Browse is automatically turned On.

START HERE

The Start Here program gives basic information about OS/2 in a document format.

PROFILE NAME: STHR

C THEN A. Reads current window. C THEN B. Toggles Page Browse On or Off.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

If Page Browse is On, the profile automatically reads the current page of information as it is displayed. If Page Browse is Off, the current page is not automatically read.

For chatty and moderate, Page Browse is automatically On. For quiet, Page Browse is Off.

SYSTEM EDITOR

The OS/2 System Editor is a text editor. You can use it to create and edit your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT system files. You can also use it as a convenient tool to display text files or perform basic editing tasks.

PROFILE NAME: SE

C THEN A. Reads only the text portion of the window.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 announces Insert/Replace status and the top and bottom of the file.

Talking levels do not affect this profile.

TO-DO LIST

The To-Do List program enables you to list tasks that you need or want to do. You can sort the tasks by priority, date, or description.

PROFILE NAME: PMDTODO

C THEN 1. Announces the number of entries for each status type. C THEN 2. Reads to-do list line-entry information. C THEN 3. Announces completion status for the current entry. C THEN 5. Reads the column title and contents for the current entry.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 reads the new column title and contents when the cursor is either under a new column header or when you scroll text on the screen. It also announces Insert/Replace status.

When the new column title and contents are spoken, chatty causes the column-header information to be treated like the help mode, telling you what is expected as input. Moderate gives the column title and entry information as it appears on the screen. Quiet tells you only the contents of the entry for the current column.

TO-DO LIST ARCHIVE

The To-Do List Archive stores information that you entered using the To-Do List program, and enables you to review and retrieve the information.

PROFILE NAME: PMDTARC

C THEN 2. Announces archived entry information for the to-do list.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Chatty explains the contents of the activity entry most fully. Moderate provides less of an explanation of the contents of the activity entry. Quiet just reads the information as it appears in the selector.

VIEW AND HELP FACILITY

The View and Help Facility program displays online books and help in Presentation Manager applications.

PROFILE NAME: VIEWDOC

C THEN A. Reads the current page. C THEN B. Toggles Page Browse On or Off.

KEYBOARD KEYS:

CTRL + *. Expands all entries in the table of contents. F 7. Moves the focus to the pushbutton area of the display.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 reads the page when Page Browse is On (the default). Otherwise, it reads only the current window title.

If you are reading a section of the book or help that has more than one page, Screen Reader/2 will read the page and announce "more."

If a plus or minus sign is in front of a topic in the Table of Contents, Screen Reader/2 says, "Plus to expand" or "Minus to collapse."

For chatty and moderate, Page Browse is On. For quiet, Screen Reader/2 automatically turns off Page Browse.

OS/2 2.1 TEXT APPLICATIONS

If you start any of the text-based applications in this list, Screen Reader/2 automatically loads a corresponding profile. These profiles, described in the following sections, are:

Command Prompt. Communications Manager. Hardware Error Pop-up for Full-Screen Sessions. Installation Aid. 3270 Emulation. 5250 Emulation.

COMMAND PROMPT

The Command Prompt profile reads lines on the screen that you specify and also speaks output or messages from commonly used commands. The Command Prompt profile is loaded automatically for an OS/2 full-screen or window session.

NOTE: This profile is sensitive to the Prompt command. If you have altered the default appearance of the command prompt, most of the automatic speaking will not work.

PROFILE NAME: CP

C THEN 4. Reads the cursor line minus 4. C THEN 5. Reads the cursor line minus 3. C THEN 6. Reads the cursor line minus 2. C THEN B. Reads the cursor line minus 1. C THEN C. Reads the cursor line. C THEN H. Reads information between command prompts or the entire screen if the previous command prompt has scrolled off the screen.

NOTE: You can use this key sequence to read help information about a command. For example, if you type DIR /? on the command line and press ENTER, the command syntax with all possible parameters and their descriptions is displayed. Press key sequence C THEN H to hear this information.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 announces output messages from commonly used commands. For example, the new subdirectory is announced when you use the Change Directory command. It also announces error information.

Chatty reads information between command prompts or the entire screen if the previous command prompt has scrolled off the screen. Moderate announces output messages from commonly used commands and error information. Quiet announces only error information.

COMMUNICATIONS MANAGER

The full-screen Communications Manager setup program enables you to start and stop your emulator sessions, configure them, upload and download files, and change keyboard key functions.

PROFILE NAME: COMMGR

C THEN 1. Reads the action panel to enable you to remap your keyboard and read previous key information. C THEN C. Reads the line the cursor or selector is on. CHORD C S. Toggles between the full-screen and current box viewport.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 reads error and help information, titles, entry fields, and selectors.

For chatty and moderate, autospeaks are active. For quiet, only the titles of the help information are spoken.

HARDWARE ERROR POP-UP FOR FULL-SCREEN SESSIONS

This program displays hardware error information, such as a bad disk drive or diskette, or if you neglected to insert a diskette when trying to obtain a directory listing.

NOTE: The profile applies only to full-screen sessions.

PROFILE NAME: HARDERR

C THEN A. Reads error information.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 reads error and help information, and announces the currently selected action.

Talking levels do not affect this profile.

INSTALLATION AID

The Installation Aid program is an OS/2 full-screen program used for installing programs such as the IBM Assembler or C Compiler.

PROFILE NAME: INSTAIDE

C THEN C. Reads the cursor line or selector.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 reads error and help information, and the title and page of a help screen. It also announces the screen title and selector, if there is one, on an installation screen.

Chatty and moderate read the entire page of help. Quiet reads only the title of the help page.

3270 EMULATION

The 3270 Emulation profile can be used for several 3270 terminal-emulation programs. These programs are Communication Manager's 3270, TCP/IP's 3270, and the IBM ELEP2.

PROFILE NAME: 3270

C THEN 1. Sets up the error line for XEDIT. C THEN 2. Sets up the command line for XEDIT. C THEN 4. Toggles the autospeak for announcing the error line On or Off. C THEN 0. Announces system status. C THEN C. Reads the line the cursor is on, which is usually the command line. C THEN D. Announces the file name in XEDIT. C THEN #. Announces the position in the file in XEDIT. CHORD C 4. Toggles the autospeak for the VM screen On or Off. CHORD C 0. Announces the status view. CHORD C B. Announces status of Insert/Replace mode. CHORD C S. Reads error information. CHORD C *. Toggles between status view and main view. CHORD D S. Finds the status view.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 reads the XEDIT command prompt and error line, and announces changed status (such as VM READ, RUNNING), Insert/Replace status and KeyLock status, and new information that appears on a VM screen.

Talking levels do not affect this profile.

5250 EMULATION

The 5250 Emulation profile is used with Communication Manager's 5250 emulation program. This profile is not automatically added to the profile tier. Use key sequence # THEN A to load this profile.

PROFILE NAME: 5250

C THEN C. Announces the cursor line. C THEN #. Reads the status line.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 announces a changed session, system availability, message waiting, keyboard shift, Insert/Replace status, keystroke buffering, and inhibited input. When input is inhibited, your cursor is on a part of the VM screen where you cannot enter information.

Talking levels do not affect this profile.

OS/2 2.1 DOS SESSION APPLICATIONS

When you start any of the following DOS-session applications in a window, Screen Reader/2 automatically loads a corresponding profile if the window title is exactly the same as the title selected when the applications were migrated.

The next sections describe these OS/2 2.1 DOS session profiles:

BookManager Read/DOS. Command Prompt. Hardware Error Pop-up for Full-Screen Sessions (DOS). Lotus 1 2 3. Quicken. WordPerfect.

NOTE: The DOS programs are initially migrated as full-screen sessions. In order to fully utilize the Screen Reader/2 functions, we suggest that you change them to DOS window sessions by doing the following:

1. Bring up the pop-up menu for the program object that you want to change.

2. Press RIGHT ARROW to open the settings notebook. Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook.

3. On the second page, cursor down to the DOS Window auto-radio button.

4. Close the settings notebook. The program will now be in a DOS window session.

BOOKMANAGER READ/DOS

The BookManager Read/DOS program, version 1.2, displays online books.

PROFILE NAME: BOOKMGR

C THEN A. Reads the currently active screen. C THEN B. Toggles Page Browse On or Off. C THEN C. Reads the cursor line or selector. C THEN #. Announces the cursor or selector location. C THEN 0. Announces status information. C THEN D. Announces context information about the screen you are in currently (for example, text window, action bar, pull-down menu, or help). C THEN H. Announces function-key help. C THEN 6. Announces general help. C THEN 7. Cycles through selector response types: Says selector. Says rest of line. Says selector and rest of line. Says entire line. C THEN 1. Finds the hit word from the top. C THEN 2. Finds the next occurrence of the hit word.

NOTE: The hit word is the word for which you are searching. If you are using key sequences C THEN 1 and C THEN 2 to search for a hit word, you need to press C THEN 1, then C THEN 2 each time you change the page. Otherwise, Screen Reader/2 announces there is no occurrence of the hit word on the new page.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

The default is Screen Reader/2 reads new selectors and new pages when you move around in a document.

By using C THEN 7, you can change what Screen Reader/2 reads when the selector changes.

If Page Browse is set to Off or if the talking level is set to quiet, new pages are not read automatically.

COMMAND PROMPT

The Command Prompt profile reads lines on the screen that you specify and also speaks output or messages from commonly used commands.

PROFILE NAME: CP

C THEN 4. Reads the cursor line minus 4. C THEN 5. Reads the cursor line minus 3. C THEN 6. Reads the cursor line minus 2. C THEN B. Reads the cursor line minus 1. C THEN C. Reads the cursor line. C THEN H. Reads information between command prompts or the entire screen if the previous command prompt has scrolled off the screen. You can use this key sequence to read help information about a command. For example, if you type DIR /? on the command line and press ENTER, you hear the command syntax with all possible parameters and their descriptions.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 announces output messages from commonly used commands. For example, the new subdirectory is announced when you use the Change Directory command. It also announces error information.

Chatty reads information between command prompts or the entire screen if the previous command prompt has scrolled off the screen. Moderate announces output messages from commonly used commands and error information. Quiet announces only error information.

HARDWARE ERROR POP-UP FOR FULL-SCREEN SESSIONS

This program displays hardware error information, such as a bad disk drive or diskette, or if you neglected to insert a diskette when trying to obtain a directory listing.

NOTE: The profile applies only to DOS full-screen sessions.

PROFILE NAME: HARDERR

C THEN A. Reads error information.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 reads error and help information, and announces the currently selected action.

Talking levels do not affect this profile.

LOTUS 1 2 3

The Lotus 1 2 3 application program is a spreadsheet that enables you to analyze data in many ways.

The Screen Reader/2 profile for Lotus 1 2 3, version 2.4, is built so that you can take advantage of Lotus 1 2 3 features. It includes a special autospeak called Cell Browse so you can hear the contents of a cell when you highlight it.

When you install the Lotus 1 2 3 program, specify CGA as the video type and do not install WYSIWYG. This prevents the graphics mode from being installed; therefore, Screen Reader/2 can read the information that is displayed.

NOTE: This profile works only in a DOS window session. If you migrate this application to the Desktop, ensure that the session selection in the application's settings notebook is DOS window and not DOS full screen. Also, ensure that you don't change the title from Lotus 123 R2.4.

PROFILE NAME: 1 2 3

C THEN 1. Reads line 1. C THEN 2. Reads line 2. C THEN 3. Reads line 3. C THEN A. Reads the error box. C THEN 4. Announces the current cell name. C THEN 5. Announces the message in pointer mode. C THEN 6. Announces the current status (menu, error, help, and so forth). C THEN B. Toggles Cell Browse On or Off. C THEN C. Reads the contents of the cell. C THEN D. Toggles the cell-name autospeak On or Off. CHORD C 5. Reads the highlighted menu option. CHORD C 6. Reads the rest of the line that contains the highlighted help option in the help box. CHORD C H. Reads the contents of the help box.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 announces the following:

Entrance into Lotus 1 2 3. The mode (and then sets appropriate viewports). The contents of the menu or file-list selector. Help or error boxes. Changes in the status indicators (Scroll Lock, Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Insert/Replace status). Ranges while copying or moving cells.

Screen Reader/2 also reads the following:

All help topics displayed after you press F1 and the help options as you browse through them using the cursor keys.

Each cell as you move to it, if you have set Cell Browse On using key sequence C THEN B.

Highlighted menu items as you browse through them.

Chatty automatically turns on Cell Browse (the default is Off). Quiet reads only the help title instead of the entire help page.

QUICKEN

Quicken is a personal financial program that helps you balance your checkbook, pay bills, and track investments.

NOTE: This profile works only for Quicken version 6.0. However, it does not work in a DOS full-screen session. If you migrate this application to the Desktop, ensure that the session selection in the application's settings notebook is DOS window and not DOS full screen. Also, ensure that you don't change the title from Quicken.

The only color combination that you should select when using Quicken is the default of navy on azure.

PROFILE NAME: Q

C THEN 1. Reads the help line associated with the highlighted menu option. C THEN 2. Reads the contents of a box (for example, the help box). C THEN C. Reads the menu item, entry field, or line the cursor is on.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 reads the highlighted menu option; the current checkbook field; information, help, and tutorial boxes; the highlighted item in a pull-down menu; and the transaction settings. It also announces entry fields as they appear.

Talking levels do not affect this profile.


(6) Quicken is a registered trademarks of Intuit Inc.

WORDPERFECT

WordPerfect is a word-processing program used to create documents. This profile is for WordPerfect version 5.1.

NOTE: Ensure that you don't change the profile title from WordPerfect.

This profile works for the two sets of default colors in WordPerfect 5.1. If colors have changed, go back to the default colors. The two sets of default colors are:

DEFAULT COLORS SET 1

1. Normal Text (dark grey on dark blue). 2. Bold (white on dark blue). 3. Underlined (dark blue on dark grey). 4. Bold and Underlined (white on dark grey). 5. Block On (dark grey on dark red).

DEFAULT COLORS SET 2

1. Normal Text (dark grey on dark blue). 2. Bold (dark cyan on dark blue). 3. Underlined (white on dark blue). 4. Underlined (dark blue on dark grey). 5. Bold and Underlined (black on dark grey). 6. Block On (dark grey on dark red).

PROFILE NAME: WP

C THEN 1 THEN 1. Begins a search for a highlighted block from the top. C THEN 1 THEN 2. Begins a search for a bold word from the top. C THEN 1 THEN 3. Begins a search for an underlined word from the top. C THEN 1 THEN A. Begins a search for a bold, underlined word from the top. C THEN 2. Continues C1 search from current pointer position. C THEN 3. Continues C1 search from the top. C THEN 4. Toggles reveal-code autospeak On or Off. C THEN 5. Reads the sentence with the misspelled word. C THEN 6. Reads general help. C THEN 0. Reads the status line. C THEN B. Moves to the top of the menu, spelling items, or thesaurus items. C THEN C. Reads the cursor line or selector. C THEN D. Announces the mode (spell, edit, menu, etc.)


(7) WordPerfect is a registered trademark of WordPerfect Corporation.

C THEN H. Reads specific help. C THEN #. Announces the cursor position in editing mode. CHORD * 4. Reads the previous menu, spelling, or thesaurus item. CHORD * 5. Reads the current menu, spelling, or thesaurus item. CHORD * 6. Reads the next menu, spelling, or thesaurus item.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 does the following:

It monitors the top, bottom, and cursor lines, and triggers other autospeaks when these change.

It announces a directory name and the name of the file at the current selector.

It announces selector changes and reads the currently highlighted item.

It announces the following codes for text characteristics:

Normal text. Bold. Underlined. Bold and underlined. Block on.

It detects the thesaurus screen and reads the word you specified.

It detects the spell-checker screen and reads the misspelled word.

It reads the help screen.

It announces the Keys Help Index if it appears.

It reads the menus at the bottom of the screen and the current entry in a menu, and announces if a field containing the default or current settings for the entry exists.

It announces the document number.

It reads the highlighted pull-down menu item.

Chatty reads the entire help window, the menu list, and the menu. Moderate reads the entire help window and the menu. Quiet reads only the help title.

WINDOWS APPLICATIONS

When you start any of the following Windows programs, Screen Reader/2 loads a corresponding profile. Under Windows, Screen Reader/2 automatically reads standard controls such as entry fields, pulldown menus, error messages, and the action bar.

You must have a mouse installed on your system for the mouse actions to work in Windows programs.

Descriptions of the following profiles are discussed in this section:

AmiPro. Calculator for Windows. Help for Windows. Quicken 2 for Windows. Word for Windows. WordPerfect for Windows. WordScan Plus for Windows.

AMIPRO

AmiPro is a word-processing tool. This profile is for AmiPro, version 3.01. You must have a mouse installed on your system for AmiPro to work properly with Screen Reader/2.

PROFILE NAME: AMIPRO

C THEN 1. Announces the paragraph style. C THEN 2. Announces the font face name. C THEN 3. Announces the font point size. C THEN 4. Reads the highlighted portion in grammar checking. C THEN 5. Reads the line with the misspelled word. C THEN 6. Reads the suggestion in the grammar checker. C THEN H. Reads the general help. C THEN 0. Reads the status line. C THEN A. Reads a text page.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 spells the misspelled word when you use AmiPro's spell checking tool.

In the chatty talking level, the explanation for the currently highlighted menu item is read.


(8) AmiPro is a trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.

CALCULATOR

The Windows Calculator program can be used to perform simple operations or to solve scientific mathematical problems.

PROFILE NAME: CALC

C THEN 1. Announces the calculator type (scientific or standard calculator). C THEN 2. Reads the result. C THEN 3. Announces the calculator mode (hex, decimal, octal, binary, and so on).

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 echoes the key presses as they apply to the functions in the calculator.

Talking levels have no effect on this profile.

HELP FOR WINDOWS

The Help for Windows program is used to display help information for programs running under Windows.

PROFILE NAME: WINHELP

C THEN H. Reads general help.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

For chatty and moderate, Screen Reader/2 reads the help information. For quiet, the help information is not read automatically.

QUICKEN 2 FOR WINDOWS

Quicken 2 is a personal financial program that helps you balance your checkbook, pay bills, and track investments. This profile was written for Quicken for Windows, version 2.0.

PROFILE NAME: QW

C THEN A. Reads the current list item with the column titles. C THEN B. Reads the column title and entry. C THEN D. Reads information based on the column function.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

In chatty or moderate modes, the column titles are read as you enter information into checks or the registers with one-line settings. When you use reports, the

category name is read for the selected item. Also, when you change columns, the column title is read; when you change categories, the category name is read.

When you set up a budget, the category name is read along with the entry information. Also, when you change columns, the column title is read; when you change categories, the category name is read.

Quiet reads only the entry information without the column titles.

NOTE: When you use reports, if you have turned off the Use Color option, autospeaks are not heard.

WORD FOR WINDOWS

The Word for Windows program is a word-processing tool which can help you to create professional-looking documents. You can use Word in conjunction with the WordScan Plus program to scan in paper documents to edit on your computer with the Word program.

This profile is for Microsoft Word, version 2.0.

PROFILE NAME: MSWORD

C THEN 1. Announces the font style. C THEN 2. Announces the font name. C THEN 3. Announces the font point size. C THEN 4. Reads the highlighted portion in grammar checking. C THEN 5. Reads the line with the misspelled word. C THEN H. Reads general help. C THEN 0. Reads the status line. C THEN #. Announces the cursor position. C THEN A. Reads the text page.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 spells the misspelled word when using the spelling-checker tool.

With chatty, the explanation for the current highlighted menu item is read.

WORDPERFECT FOR WINDOWS

WordPerfect is a word-processing program used to create documents. This profile is for WordPerfect for Windows, version 5.2.

PROFILE NAME: WPWINFIL

C THEN 4. Toggles speaking reveal codes On or Off.

C THEN 5. Reads the line with the misspelled word. C THEN H. Reads general help. C THEN 0. Reads the status line. C THEN #. Announces the cursor position in editing mode.

WHAT YOU HEAR:

Screen Reader/2 reads the misspelled word when you are using the spelling-checker tool. It also reads messages generated by the spelling-checker and thesaurus. Screen Reader/2 reads the reveal code at the cursor position when the code changes, if it is on. The default is Off.

Chatty reads the description of the currently highlighted task. Moderate and quiet are not active in this profile.

LIMITATIONS: Screen Reader/2 cannot detect when a word is underlined, double underlined, or red-lined. This is due to the underlines being drawn rather than being part of the font of the character.

WORDSCAN PLUS FOR WINDOWS

The WordScan Plus program, version 1.1, is an optical-character-recognition program that works with a page scanner or FAX file to convert printed documents into text that you can edit on your computer. The Setup window has settings that can only be changed by using a mouse. Screen Reader/2 can perform mouse functions through key sequences. However, you must have a mouse installed on your system for the WordScan Plus key sequences to work.

PROFILE NAME: WORDSCAN

C THEN 1. Sets the program for what you want to capture from the document. C THEN 2. Sets the page orientation of the document. C THEN 3. Sets the type quality. C THEN A. Sets the source of the document image. C THEN 4. Automatically sets the brightness level to lighten or darken the source document. (This feature is available only if your scanner has an automatic brightness setting.) C THEN 5. Reads the status of WordScan Plus settings. (This key sequence will work without a mouse installed.) C THEN 7. Starts processing automatically. C THEN 8. Starts the processing preview.

WHAT YOU HEAR


(9) WordScan is a trademark of Calera Recognition Systems, Inc.

Screen Reader/2 reads the progress-monitor information so that you know how much of the document has been processed.

When using chatty, the Setup category is spoken when a setting is changed using the key sequences C THEN 1 through C THEN 8 and C THEN A described above.

SAVING YOUR SCREEN READER/2 SETTINGS

As you use a profile, you might find that it does not work exactly as you would like. For example, you might want to change the browse and echo settings in the edit facility profile. Using the information provided in the profile discussions earlier in this chapter, you can change various attributes to suit your needs.

If you want the revised profile to start automatically when you start Screen Reader/2, use key sequence B THEN * to save your changes. The next time you start Screen Reader/2, your customized profiles will be ready to use.

NOTE: If you have added a new profile to the tier and then saved your changes, that new profile must be present the next time you start Screen Reader/2. If the profile tier is not exactly as it was when you saved your changes, the changes you saved will not be active. When the profile tier is restored to the way it was when you saved changes, they will be active.

Settings are saved in a file with a name based on the current program name and the extension .STO; for example, BOOKMGR.STO. These settings are saved in this file in the Screen Reader/2 directory to be recalled the next time you use that program.

Key sequence B THEN * is also used to save the following Screen Reader/2 settings:

BLANK           Bottom.
CAPS.           Dictionary.
FORCESPELL.     Format.
GRAPHICS.       Icons.
IGNORE.         Left.
LOCKSTATUS.     Mode.
NOISE           Numbering.
PAUSE.          Pitch.
POINTER.        Rate.
RIGHT.          Spaces.
SPELLCAPS.      Stopping
TABLE.          Top.
TRAILING.       Trap
VIEW.           Viewport.
VOLUME.         Word definitions.
WRAP.

Refer to the Set command in the PAL Reference online book for a description of each of these settings.

NOTE: Refer to the section "Screen Reader/2 Notebooks" for information about saving settings in your Screen Reader/2 Settings, Synthesizer Settings, and Message Settings notebooks.

STARTING SCREEN READER/2

The Screen Reader/2 installation program sets up Screen Reader/2 to start automatically when you turn on your system.

However, you may want to restart Screen Reader/2 to change the default profile tier or to activate changes you have made to the default tier. You can restart it by following these steps:

  1. Open the Independence Series folder on your OS/2 Desktop.
  2. Open the Screen Reader/2 program object in the Independence Series folder.
  3. If Screen Reader/2 is running, you will be asked if you are sure you want to stop Screen Reader/2 and restart it. Press ENTER to restart the system.

You should hear a message telling you that Screen Reader/2 started (up to 30 seconds after you perform these two steps). If you hear three short beeps instead, your synthesizer may be turned off. Turn on your synthesizer and press ENTER. Screen Reader/2 should now start.

If you hear three beeps when you would expect your synthesizer to start talking (for example, when you start your computer), verify that the synthesizer is turned on and that the cables are all connected. Then press ENTER. If you resolved the problem, speech should begin shortly. If not, you will hear three beeps again. If you press ENTER, Screen Reader/2 will be stopped.

NOTE: For information about problems related to starting Screen Reader/2, refer to the "Problem Determination" section of the Getting Started manual (either in print or on cassette).

CHANGING THE WAY SCREEN READER/2 STARTS

When you install Screen Reader/2, the installation program creates a batch file called SRD2.CMD. This file starts Screen Reader/2 and loads the base profile automatically. The base profile contains the basic Screen Reader/2 key sequences and cannot be removed from the profile tier. However, you can specify additional profiles to be loaded at startup time by modifying the SRD2.CMD batch file.

The SRD2.CMD batch file contains the following line:

START SRD SRD2

The command START SRD starts the program; SRD2 is the base profile that is loaded for all sessions. To add other profiles to the batch file, type the profile name after the SRD2 profile name. The additional profiles will be loaded each time you start Screen Reader/2, and they will be on all tiers like Screen Reader/2. However, unlike the base profile, these additional profiles can be removed from the profile tier. Refer to the section "Adding and Removing Profiles" for more information.

SPECIFYING SYNTHESIZER SETTINGS

You can also specify synthesizer settings in the startup command file. Screen Reader/2 uses the synthesizer settings specified in SRD.TTS, unless you specify otherwise. (The extension .TTS stands for Text To Speech.) To use a different synthesizer settings (.TTS) file or more than one synthesizer, insert the following command in the SRD2.CMD batch file.

SRD [/s xxx.TTS] [profile name]

NOTE: xxx is a synthesizer settings file name. profile name is optional.

You can enter the command more than once in the SRD.CMD file. For example:

/s acc.tts /s pss.tts srd2 myprof

In this example, Screen Reader/2 can send output to either synthesizer specified in the synthesizer settings file. Unless you use a customized profile that uses the DEVICE command, Screen Reader/2 will send output to only the synthesizer indicated by the first parameter.

NOTE: Use /s only if you want to use a different file, or files, than the default file (SRD.TTS) that was created when you installed Screen Reader/2.

ADDING PROFILES WITH THE SETTINGS NOTEBOOK

If you want to add a profile to the base (for example, a profile you created that contains customized key sequences), you can either edit the SRD2.CMD file and add the profile name to the end of the command, or change the file using the Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook.

To change the file using the Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook, follow these steps:

  1. Open the Independence Series folder. It is on your OS/2 Desktop.
  2. Select the Screen Reader/2 program object in the Independence Series folder, but do not press ENTER.
  3. Press SHIFT+F10 to display the Screen Reader/2 pop-up menu. The first item on the pop-up menu is Open. It has an arrow to its right, indicating that there is a submenu.
  4. Press the RIGHT ARROW key to display the submenu.
  5. Select the first item, Settings, to display the Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook. The cursor is at the first character of an entry field containing the Screen Reader/2 parameters currently in SRD2.CMD.
  6. Type any additional parameters.
  7. Press ALT+F4 to save your changes and close the notebook.

SCREEN READER/2 NOTEBOOKS

Each object on the Desktop has a notebook attached to it. Notebooks are so called because they actually look like notebooks, with tabs separating the sections. Each tab relates to a topic contained in the notebook and each topic contains one or more pages. You can change values and settings on the pages.

The Screen Reader/2 object has three notebooks:

The Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook is used to change the starting parameters for Screen Reader/2.

The Synthesizer Settings notebook is used to change the values for your synthesizer.

The Message Settings notebook is used to change the way Screen Reader/2 speaks.

NOTE: If you are satisfied with the way your synthesizer is working, you should not change any of the settings in the Synthesizer Settings notebook.

DISPLAYING THE SCREEN READER/2 NOTEBOOKS

To display the Screen Reader/2 notebooks:

  1. Open the Independence Series folder. It is on your Desktop.
  2. Select the Screen Reader/2 object in the Independence Series folder. Do not press ENTER.
  3. Press SHIFT+F10 to display the Screen Reader/2 pop-up menu. The first item is Open. It has an arrow to its right, indicating that there is a submenu.
  4. Press the RIGHT ARROW key to display the submenu.

The items on the submenu are:

Settings.
Start/Restart.
Synthesizer Settings.
Message Settings.
About.

NOTE: The Start/Restart and ABOUT items are not notebooks.

START/RESTART enables you to start or restart Screen Reader/2.

ABOUT describes the Screen Reader/2 license and copyright.

5. Select the notebook with which you want to work:

Use the Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook to view and modify the parameters that are used to start Screen Reader/2 and to change the current icon and title.

Use the Synthesizer Settings notebook to change the settings for your synthesizer.

Use the Message Settings notebook to display and change the dictionary and to change the way Screen Reader/2 pronounces and spells words.

For more information about a notebook and how to change its values, press F1 while the notebook is open.

USING SCREEN READER/2 NOTEBOOKS

To scroll through the notebook pages from one section to another, use one of the following methods:

  1. Use the ALT+UP ARROW keys to move the cursor to the notebook tabs. Then use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to move the cursor to the tab you want and press ENTER. Use the ALT+DOWN ARROW keys to return to the notebook page.
  2. Use the ALT+PAGE DOWN and ALT+PAGE UP keys to move through the notebook pages. To move the cursor between the different window controls on a notebook page, use the TAB key. To move the cursor within a control group, use the directional arrow keys. The controls are:

CHECK BOXES. A check box is a two-part control consisting of a square box and text describing a choice you can make. A check box acts as a switch. You press the SPACEBAR to select a check box, which is then filled in with an X or check mark. Check boxes are used for settings such as acknowledge stop, always stop, and the Screen Reader/2 Stop key.

COMBINATION BOXES (COMBO BOX). A combination box is a control that combines the functions of a spin button and a list box. It contains a list of objects that you can scroll through and select from to complete the entry field.

ENTRY FIELD. An entry field is a two-part control consisting of text and a rectangular box. You can type either one or more lines in this box, depending on whether it is a single-line entry field or a multiple-line entry field. When an entry field is first displayed, it is either blank or contains a default value. To change the value, type a new value and press ENTER, or TAB to the next control. Screen Reader/2 uses entry fields for stop delay, search strings, notes, dictionary words and replacements, remarks, key delay, and code page.

LIST BOXES. A list box is a rectangular box with scroll bars that usually contains a scrollable list of choices from which you can select one choice. Screen Reader/2 uses list boxes for such functions as saving your changes to a file.

MENU BAR. The action bar is the area at the top of the primary window. It contains actions that are available in this window. The action bar is on line 2 of the Screen Reader/2 notebooks. The Synthesizer Settings notebook has only one choice: File. The Message Settings notebook has two choices: File and Utility. When you choose either, a pull-down menu is displayed.

PUSHBUTTONS. A pushbutton is rectangular with rounded corners. It contains text that shows the actions in dialog boxes, secondary windows, and message boxes. When you select a pushbutton, the action indicated by the text occurs immediately. Pushbuttons are near the bottom of each notebook page and each dialog window. The functions performed by pushbuttons include Undo, Search, Help, and Cancel. Use the TAB key and the directional arrow keys to move the cursor to a pushbutton, then press ENTER to perform the function.

RADIO BUTTONS. Radio buttons are round buttons on the screen with text beside them. You can select only one in a group of radio buttons. Auto-radio buttons are automatically selected when you move to them. You use radio buttons when setting up your Desktop and when setting such Screen Reader/2 options as Indexing.

SCROLLABLE LISTS. A scrollable list is a vertical listing of values. Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to move through a scrollable list. If the window containing the values is not wide enough to display all of the information in one column, you can also use RIGHT ARROW and LEFT ARROW to hear the rest of the information. The HOME

key moves the cursor to the top of the list and the END key moves the cursor to the bottom of the list.

To change a value (such as a spelling-table entry or a synthesizer code) in a scrollable list, press ENTER while the cursor is on the correct value to display an edit box containing the text value. After changing the text, press ENTER to confirm the change. To return to the scrollable list without changing the value, press ESCAPE. Screen Reader/2 uses scrollable lists for synthesizer codes and values, ASCII set conversion table, announcements, spelling tables, and the dictionary.

SPIN BUTTONS. Spin buttons are controls that enable you to choose an entry from a list of choices. Only one choice is displayed at a time. Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to cycle through these choices. Spin buttons are used for all the COM port parameters, the synthesizer codes, the ASCII character set, and buffer management parameters.

SCREEN READER/2 SETTINGS NOTEBOOK

The Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook enables you to change Screen Reader/2 characteristics and edit the SRD2.CMD file to change the way Screen Reader/2 starts.

Select Settings on the Screen Reader/2 Open submenu to display the Screen Reader/2 Settings notebook which has the following tabs:

PARAMETERS. This page enables you to view and modify the parameters that are used to start Screen Reader/2. These parameters are used by the the SRD2.CMD file.

At the bottom of the notebook page are three pushbuttons:

UNDO. Choose this pushbutton to reset any changes to the values that were read when you opened the Settings notebook.

DEFAULT. Choose this button to change the parameter to the default: SRD2.

HELP. Choose this button to display general help for the entire page.

GENERAL. This page enables you to change the name of the Screen Reader/2 object, or icon, that represents the program. You change the name by typing a new name in the Title

field. You can change the icon that represents this object by using the CREATE ANOTHER, EDIT, or FIND pushbuttons.

Press F1 for more information about how to make a selection or for technical information about your current choices. F1 displays a contextual help window. If you need information about the help window, press F1 while you use the help facility.

After making your changes, press ALT+F4. Your changes will be saved automatically and the notebook is closed.

SYNTHESIZER SETTINGS NOTEBOOK

Select Synthesizer Settings on the Screen Reader/2 Open submenu and press ENTER. The first page of the Synthesizer Settings notebook is displayed for you to make your changes.

Synthesizer settings are contained in .TTS files. The Synthesizer Settings notebook has the following tabs:

SYNTHESIZER CODES. This page enables you to change the following synthesizer codes:

CONTROL. Control codes direct speech output to the synthesizer. The codes include starting and stopping speech, initializing the synthesizer, and sending and receiving index markers.

PITCH. Pitch is the tone, or frequency, of the synthesizer's voice. It can range from low to high.

RATE. Rate is the speed of speech.

VOLUME. Volume is the loudness of speech.

SPECIAL. Special codes are synthesizer-specific and can be set up for such features as changing voices and languages. After setting the code, you can use a keypad key sequence to send it. To activate a special code, press key sequence A THEN A THEN N; n represents the number (1 to 9) assigned to the special code.

COM PORT. On this page, you can change six synthesizer communications parameters:

COMMUNICATIONS (SERIAL) PORT. The serial connector to which your synthesizer is connected.

BAUD RATE. The speed (bits per second) at which your computer and synthesizer send data to each other.

WORD LENGTH. The size of the data packet that your synthesizer and computer use to communicate.

PARITY. The method that the synthesizer and computer use to detect transmission errors.

NUMBER OF STOP BITS. Signals that are sent to the computer or the synthesizer to indicate the end of the data packet.

HANDSHAKING. Another word for protocol (such as XON/XOFF).

OTHER. On this page, the settings are:

INDEXING. The capability of some synthesizers to send markers back through the asynchronous communications channel after each word is spoken. This capability enables the Screen Reader/2 pointer to move to the beginning of each word as it is spoken. This setting is checked if your synthesizer supports this feature.

TYPE. The Serial setting is checked, indicating that your synthesizer is connected externally to a serial port. You should change the setting to Internal only if you have been told by your synthesizer manufacturer to do so.

COMMENTS. Usually contains the name of the synthesizer(s) associated with this file.

(This is a freeform field so you can type in any data you want.)

STOP. On this page, the settings are:

DELAY. The time Screen Reader/2 waits to send more text after it sends a Stop command.

ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. This setting is checked if your synthesizer returns a code after having processed the Stop command.

ALWAYS STOP. This setting is checked if your synthesizer can handle a Stop command independent of the state of the protocol.

ASCII SET. This option enables you to specify your synthesizer's ASCII character-set support. You can select LOWER (128 characters), FULL (256 characters), or CONVERT (256 characters with conversion). LOWER means the synthesizer can speak characters only in the lower half of the character set. FULL means the synthesizer can speak the entire character set. CONVERT is a Screen Reader/2 process that allows some synthesizers to speak the full table.

If you are using an InfoVox VoxBox synthesizer or Braille device, you will probably select Convert. With this choice, you also specify the code page your system uses, and you type the string to send to the synthesizer for each ASCII character.

BUFFER MANAGEMENT. On this page, you specify whether or not to activate Screen Reader/2's buffer management or Smart Talk features.

Check the BUFFER MANAGEMENT check box if your synthesizer will not accept any commands while its buffer is full (indicated by a slow response to a Stop command).

If you have buffer management set to On, you select the number of characters to wait before Screen Reader/2 searches for a good breaking point to start and stop speech output. You also specify the string to send when Screen Reader/2 detects that the synthesizer buffer is full and the string that the synthesizer returns when its buffer is empty.

Check the SMART TALK check box if your synthesizer waits until it receives all data from a request before beginning to speak. Smart Talk causes Screen Reader/2 to send a Talk command to the synthesizer before Screen Reader/2 reads all the text. Most synthesizers work well with Smart Talk active, although there may be extra pauses.

SAVING YOUR CHANGES

You can save changes you made to the synthesizer settings in either of two ways:

  1. You can save the changes in the same synthesizer file. To do this, press ALT+F4.
  2. You can save the changes in a different synthesizer file by doing the following:
    a. Select the File choice on the action bar and press ENTER.
    b. Select Save to file from the pull-down menu to display a Save as file-dialog window. In this window, you can type a full drive, directory, and file name, or just a file name, and then select a drive and directory from the scrollable lists.
    c. To confirm that you want to save the file, press ENTER or choose the SAVE pushbutton.

CHANGING SETTINGS IN OTHER FILES

To change synthesizer settings in files other than the one you are using, do the following:

  1. Open the Configuration - Screen Reader/2 object in your Independence Series folder. All Screen Reader/2-supported synthesizer files are displayed as data objects in this folder. These objects are identified by their file names. The default synthesizer file that Screen Reader/2 uses is SRD.TTS. Screen Reader/2 may also be using additional (or different) .TTS files if you changed the way Screen Reader/2 starts.
  2. Select the synthesizer settings file you want, then press ENTER.
  3. When the Synthesizer Settings notebook is displayed, make your changes, then press F10 to display the File pull-down menu.
  4. Select Save to file to save the changes you just made.

NOTE: If you have added or removed a .TTS file and the change is not reflected in the Configuration - Screen Reader/2 folder, you should select the Refresh Contents object. When this object is selected, it closes the Configuration - Screen Reader/2 folder and takes you back to the Independence Series folder. When you open the Configuration - Screen Reader/2 folder again, the .TTS file list will be updated.

MESSAGE SETTINGS NOTEBOOK

You use the Message Settings notebook to work with spelling tables, Screen Reader/2 messages, and the dictionary.

Select Message Settings on the Screen Reader/2 Open submenu to display the Message Settings notebook.

The Message Settings notebook has the following tabs:

SPELLING TABLES. On this page, you can change the ASCII strings Screen Reader/2 sends to the synthesizer for each entry in Screen Reader/2's five spelling tables. Each spelling table has 256 entries. The spelling tables and their functions are:

DEFAULT. Tells Screen Reader/2 what to send to the synthesizer for characters on the display when Screen Reader/2 spells characters or words.

PHONETIC. Same as the default table, but all letters have phonetic names.

COLOR. Tells Screen Reader/2 what to send to the synthesizer for 64 color attributes.

STANDARD KEYS. Contains the description of the standard keyboard key for each ASCII code.

EXTENDED KEYS. Contains the description of extended keys such as function keys and cursor movement keys.

NOTE: The Standard Keys and Extended Keys tables are used for the key-echo function.

OTHER. On this page, the settings are:

KEY DELAY. The amount of time Screen Reader/2 waits for a second key press before canceling a key sequence.

KEYPAD. If this setting is checked, you will hear a warning message if a keypad is not attached.

STOP. If checked, Screen Reader/2 sends the Stop command each time a key is pressed on the keypad.

CODE PAGE. Enables you to specify the code page that should be used with this file. Unless you are creating a file for another set of characters, this number should be identical to that of the code page you are currently using.

COMMENTS. Contains information about the current code page.

ANNOUNCEMENTS. On this page, you can change what your synthesizer says for the following types of announcements: Screen Reader/2 formats and modes. Keypad and help messages. Viewport messages. Error messages and information messages.

DICTIONARY. On this page, you can tell Screen Reader/2 how the synthesizer should pronounce certain words which it might otherwise mispronounce, if following the normal rules of pronunciation. You tell Screen Reader/2 how to pronounce words by spelling them like they sound.

For example, OS (for Operating System) is included in your dictionary list of words. Because your synthesizer might read it as "OZ," the replacement letters "O S" provide the correct pronunciation to be used.

USING THE DICTIONARY AND SPELLING TABLES

If you select the Utility choice on the action bar in the Message Settings notebook and press ENTER, a pull-down menu with the following choices appears:

Import dictionary file. Export dictionary file. Import spelling table. Export spelling table.

Use this pull-down menu to import or export dictionary or spelling-table ASCII files. When you choose any of these menu items, a dialog window appears that has a filename entry field. Type the name of the file containing your ASCII spelling table or dictionary. If you are exporting a spelling-table ASCII file, you must select the spelling-table name from a scrollable list. To perform the import or export action, press ENTER.

SAVING YOUR CHANGES

You can change the message settings that you are currently using. The changes take effect immediately and remain in effect only until you turn off Screen Reader/2. However, you can choose to save these settings for future use, and you can also change them in other files for future use.

You can save changes you made to the message settings in either of two ways:

1. You can save the changes in the same message-settings file. To do this, press ALT+F4.

2. You can save the changes in a different message-settings file. To do this:

a. Select the File choice on the action bar and press ENTER.

b. Select Save to file from the pull-down menu to display a Save as file-dialog window. In this window, you can type a full drive, directory, and file name, or just a file name, and then select a drive and directory from the scrollable lists.

c. To confirm that you want to save the file, press ENTER or choose the SAVE pushbutton.

CHANGING SETTINGS IN OTHER FILES

To change Screen Reader/2 messages in files other than the one you are using:

1. Open the Configuration - Screen Reader/2 object in your Independence Series folder.

All Screen Reader/2-supported message files are displayed as data objects in this folder. These objects are identified by their file names. Message files have the extension .CNF. The default message file that Screen Reader/2 uses is SRD.CNF.

2. To open a notebook to change the Screen Reader/2 messages and dictionary file, select the SRD.CNF file and press ENTER. The first page of the Screen Reader/2 Message Settings notebook is displayed.

3. Make the changes you want, then press F10 to move the cursor to the File option on the action bar of the Message Settings notebook.

4. Press ENTER to display the pull-down menu.

5. Press ENTER to select the Save to file option.

6. The Save CNF File window is displayed. In this window, you can type a full drive, directory, and file name, or just a file name, and then select a drive and directory from the scrollable lists.

7. To confirm that you want to save the file, press ENTER or choose the SAVE pushbutton.

SYNTHESIZERS

This section contains technical data about the Screen Reader/2-supported synthesizers. Included are the default Screen Reader/2 settings for each synthesizer and the required switch settings, if any.

NOTE: To use a synthesizer not listed in this User's Guide, contact either your synthesizer manufacturer or the place where you purchased Screen Reader/2 to determine support and setup procedures.

ACCENT BY AICOM

SOFTWARE SETTINGS

The following values for the Accent synthesizer are in the ACC.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.

COM PORT.        COM1.
BAUD RATE.       9600.
PARITY.          None.
LENGTH.          7 bits.
STOP BITS.       1 stop bit.
RATE.            Active.
VOLUME.          Active.
PITCH.           Active.
SPECIAL.         Active for voices 1 to 9.
STOP DELAY.      0.
ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. No.
ALWAYS STOP.     Yes.
PROTOCOL.        Clear to Send.
INDEXING.        Yes.
CHARACTER SET.   Lower.

HARDWARE SETTINGS

Switches 4 and 8 are On; all others are Off.

NOTE: If you turn off the Accent synthesizer during a session, you should restart Screen Reader/2 after you turn the Accent on again. Otherwise, you might experience sluggish response.

(10) Accent and Aicom are registered trademarks of Aicom Corporation.

APOLLO BY DOLPHIN SYSTEMS

SOFTWARE SETTINGS

The following values for the Apollo synthesizer are in the APOLLO.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.

COM PORT. COM1. BAUD RATE. 9600. PARITY. None. LENGTH. 8 bits. STOP BITS. 1 stop bit. RATE. Active. VOLUME. 1 to 6 active for changing voices. PITCH. Active. SPECIAL. 1 to 8 active for changing languages. STOP DELAY. 0. ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. No. ALWAYS STOP. Yes. PROTOCOL. Clear to Send. INDEXING. Yes. CHARACTER SET. Full.

NOTES:

1. The Apollo synthesizer changes baud rate by using different cables. When the synthesizer is shipped, the baud rate in the .TTS file is set to 9600. If you have a cable that is different from 9600 baud, change the .TTS file to match your cable.

2. This synthesizer supports several languages. A different language ROM chip is required for each language. Make sure that you have the correct ROM chip for the language you want.

3. On this synthesizer, an On/Off knob controls volume.

AUDAPTER BY PERSONAL DATA SYSTEMS

SOFTWARE SETTINGS

The following values for the Audapter synthesizer are in the AUD.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.

COM PORT. COM1. BAUD RATE. 9600. PARITY. None.


(11) Apollo is a trademark of Dolphin Systems.

(12) Audapter is a trademark of Personal Data Systems.

LENGTH. 8 bits. STOP BITS. 1 stop bit. RATE. Active. VOLUME. Active. PITCH. Active. SPECIAL. 1 to 9 active for changing voices from high (1) to low (9). STOP DELAY. 0. ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. No. ALWAYS STOP. Yes. PROTOCOL. Clear to Send. INDEXING. Yes. CHARACTER SET. Lower.

BRAILLE 'N SPEAK AND BRAILLE BLAZER BY BLAZIE ENGINEERING

SOFTWARE SETTINGS

The following values for the Braille Blazer and Braille 'n Speak products are in the BLAZIE.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.

COM PORT. COM1. BAUD RATE. 9600. PARITY. None. LENGTH. 8 bits. STOP BITS. 1 stop bit. RATE. 1 and 9 active. VOLUME. Active. PITCH. Active. SPECIAL. Not active. STOP DELAY. 0. ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. No. ALWAYS STOP. Yes. PROTOCOL. XON/XOFF. INDEXING. Yes. CHARACTER SET. Lower.

CALLTEXT 5050/5010 AND PROSE 2020 BY CENTIGRAM COMMUNICATIONS CORP.

NOTE: The manufacturer of these synthesizers was formerly Speech Plus Corporation.

SOFTWARE SETTINGS


(13) Braille Blazer and Braille 'n Speak are trademarks of Blaize Engineering.

The following values for the CallText 5050 and Prose 2020 synthesizers are in the SP.TTS file. Note that these values are the same for the CallText 5050 and Prose 2020. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.

COM PORT. COM1. BAUD RATE. 9600. PARITY. None. LENGTH. 8 bits. STOP BITS. 1 stop bit. RATE. Active. VOLUME. Active. PITCH. Active. SPECIAL. Not active. STOP DELAY. 0. ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. Yes. ALWAYS STOP. Yes. PROTOCOL. XON/XOFF. INDEXING. Yes. CHARACTER SET. Lower.

DECTALK BY DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION

SOFTWARE SETTINGS

The following values for the DECtalk synthesizer are in the DEC1.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change these values.

COM PORT. COM1. BAUD RATE. 1200. PARITY. None. LENGTH. 8 bits. STOP BITS. 1 stop bit. RATE. Active. VOLUME. Volume is controlled by a thumb-wheel on the unit. PITCH. 1 to 9 active. SPECIAL. 1 to 9 active for changing voices (refer to note). STOP DELAY. 0. ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. No. ALWAYS STOP. Yes. PROTOCOL. XON/XOFF. INDEXING. Yes. CHARACTER SET. Lower. BUFFER MANAGEMENT. Yes.

(14) CallText 5050/5010 is a trademark and Prose 2020 is a registered trademark of Centigram Communications Corporation.

(15) DECtalk is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.

NOTE: The DEC1.TTS file is set with Special 1 to 9 active for changing voices. These are the voices:

1. Perfect Paul. 2. Beautiful Betty. 3. Huge Harry. 4. Doctor Dennis. 5. Kit the Kid. 6. Rough Rita. 7. Uppity Ursula. 8. Frail Frank. 9. Whispering Wendy.

HARDWARE SETTINGS

A thumb-wheel on the back of the synthesizer controls volume.

NOTE: You might notice halting speech or pauses you do not expect. If you want to smooth that speech (at the expense of responsive Stop), toggle Buffer Management and Smart Talk to No.

ECHO BY ECHO CORPORATION.

NOTE: The manufacturer of this synthesizer was formerly Street Electronics.

SOFTWARE SETTINGS

The following values for the ECHO synthesizer are in the ECHO.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.

COM PORT. COM1. BAUD RATE. 9600. PARITY. None. LENGTH. 8 bits. STOP BITS. 1 stop bit. RATE. 1 and 9 active. VOLUME. Active. PITCH. Active. SPECIAL. Not active. STOP DELAY. 0. ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. No. ALWAYS STOP. Yes. PROTOCOL. Clear to Send. INDEXING. No. CHARACTER SET. Lower.

(16) ECHO is a trademark of Echo Corporation.

ECHO-PC BY ECHO CORPORATION

NOTE: The manufacturer of this synthesizer was formerly Street Electronics.

SOFTWARE SETTINGS

The following values for the ECHO-PC synthesizer are in the ECHOPC.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.

COM PORT. COM1. BAUD RATE. 9600. PARITY. None. LENGTH. 8 bits. STOP BITS. 1 stop bit. RATE. Active. VOLUME. Active. PITCH. Active. SPECIAL. Not Active. STOP DELAY. 0. ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. No. ALWAYS STOP. Yes. PROTOCOL. XON/XOFF INDEXING. Yes. CHARACTER SET. Lower. BUFFER MANAGEMENT. No.

KEYNOTE GOLD BY PULSE DATA INTERNATIONAL, LTD.

SOFTWARE SETTINGS

The following values for the Keynote Gold synthesizer are in the GOLD.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.

COM PORT. COM1. BAUD RATE. 9600. PARITY. None. LENGTH. 8 bits. STOP BITS. 1 stop bit. RATE. Active. VOLUME. Not active. PITCH. Active. SPECIAL. Active (refer to notes). STOP DELAY. 0. ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. No. ALWAYS STOP. Yes. PROTOCOL. XON/XOFF INDEXING. Yes.

(17) ECHO-PC is a trademark of Echo Corporation.

(18) Keynote Gold is a trademark of Pulse Data International, Ltd.

CHARACTER SET. Full.

NOTES
  1. The GOLD.TTS file is set with Special 1 to 4 for different languages (if they are

installed). The languages are:

  1. English.
  2. Spanish.
  3. French.
  4. German.
Special 5 is not set.
Special 6 to 9 are set to control the intonation as follows:

6. Reverse intonation. 7. Normal intonation. 8. Emphatic intonation. 9. Very emphatic intonation.

2. The Keynote Gold synthesizer requires a special EPROM in order to work with Screen Reader/2. Please contact the manufacturer or the local dealer.

3. If you bought your synthesizer before March, 1993, use the GOLD.TTS file.

4. If you bought your synthesizer after March, 1993, use the GOLD2.TTS file.

PERSONAL SPEECH SYSTEM BY VYSION INCORPORATED

NOTE: The manufacturer of this synthesizer was formerly Votrax Incorporated.

SOFTWARE SETTINGS

The following values for the Personal Speech System synthesizer are in the PSS.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.

COM PORT. COM1. BAUD RATE. 2400. PARITY. Odd. LENGTH. 7 bits, parity ignored. STOP BITS. 1 stop bit. RATE. 1, 2, 3, 5, 9 active.

(19) Votrax is a registered trademark of Votrax Incorporated.

VOLUME. Active. PITCH. 1, 2, 5, 9 active. SPECIAL. Not active. STOP DELAY. 4. ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. No. ALWAYS STOP. Yes. PROTOCOL. Clear to Send. INDEXING. Yes. CHARACTER SET. Lower.

HARDWARE SETTINGS

The communication switch is set for parallel. You must change this switch from parallel to serial communications. Also ensure that the switch settings on your synthesizer are set to 2400 baud.

SWITCH-BANK LOCATION

One switch bank for the Personal Speech System is located inside the unit. The switches are accessible through a slot in the back-right corner of the unit. Use a ballpoint pen or a similar tool to set the switches.

SWITCH SETTINGS

For serial communications and 2400 baud, set all switches Down except switch 2. That switch should be in the Up position.

PORTABLE DECTALK BY DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION AND MULTIVOICE BY INSTITUTE ON APPLIED TECHNOLOGY

SOFTWARE SETTINGS

The following values for the Portable DECtalk and MultiVoice synthesizers are in the DEC2.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.

COM PORT. COM1. BAUD RATE. 9600. PARITY. None. LENGTH. 8 bits. STOP BITS. 1 stop bit. RATE. Active. VOLUME. 1, 2, 3, 4 reduce the volume (1=maximum reduction, 4=slight reduction). 6, 7, 8, 9 increase the volume (6=slight increase, 9=maximum increase).

(20) MultiVoice is a trademark of Institute on Applied Technology.

PITCH. 1 to 9 active. SPECIAL. 1 to 9 active for changing voices (refer to note). STOP DELAY. 0. ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. No. ALWAYS STOP. Yes. PROTOCOL. XON/XOFF. INDEXING. Yes. CHARACTER SET. Lower. BUFFER MANAGEMENT. Yes.

NOTE: The DEC2.TTS file is set with Special 1 to 9 active for changing voices. These are the voices:

  1. Perfect Paul.
  2. Beautiful Betty.
  3. Huge Harry.
  4. Doctor Dennis.
  5. Kit the Kid.
  6. Rough Rita.
  7. Uppity Ursula.
  8. Frail Frank.
  9. Whispering Wendy.

HARDWARE SETTINGS

The On/Off knob in the front of the MultiVoice unit also controls the volume.

NOTE: You might notice halting speech or pauses you do not expect. If you want to smooth that speech (at the expense of responsive Stop), toggle Buffer Management and Smart Talk to No.

READING EDGE BY XEROX IMAGING SYSTEMS

SOFTWARE SETTINGS

The following values for the Reading Edge scanner are in the XEROX.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.

COM PORT. COM1. BAUD RATE. 9600. PARITY. None. LENGTH. 8 bits. STOP BITS. 1 stop bit. RATE. Active. VOLUME. Active (refer to notes). PITCH. Active. SPECIAL. Active (refer to notes). STOP DELAY. 0.

(21) Reading Edge is a trademark of XEROX Imaging Systems.

ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. No. ALWAYS STOP. Yes. PROTOCOL. XON/XOFF INDEXING. Yes. CHARACTER SET. Lower. BUFFER MANAGEMENT. Yes.

NOTES:

1. The XEROX.TTS file is set with Volume 3 to 7 for levels of intonation as follows:

Volume 1 and 2 are not active.

Volume 3 to 7 are set to control the intonation as follows:

3. Intonation is 0% of normal. 4. Intonation is 50% of normal. 5. Normal intonation. 6. Intonation is 150% of normal. 7. Intonation is 200% of normal.

Volume 8 and 9 are not active.

2. The XEROX.TTS file is set with Special 1 through 9 to control voices as follows:

1. Perfect Paul. 2. Beautiful Betty. 3. Huge Harry. 4. Frail Frank. 5. Kit the Kid. 6. Rough Rita. 7. Uppity Ursula. 8. Doctor Dennis. 9. Whispering Wendy.

3. You might notice halting speech or pauses you do not expect. If you want to smooth that speech (at the expense of responsive Stop), toggle Buffer Management and Smart Talk to No.

VOXBOX BY INFOVOX

SOFTWARE SETTINGS

The following values for the VoxBox synthesizer are in the VOX.TTS file. You can use the Screen Reader/2 Synthesizer Settings notebook to change them.

COM PORT. COM1.

(22) VoxBox is a trademark of InfoVox.

BAUD RATE. 4800. PARITY. None. LENGTH. 8 bits. STOP BITS. 1 stop bit. RATE. Active. VOLUME. Active. PITCH. Active. SPECIAL. 1 to 9 active for changing languages and response modes (refer to note). STOP DELAY. 0. ACKNOWLEDGE STOP. No. ALWAYS STOP. Yes. PROTOCOL. XON/XOFF. INDEXING. Yes. CHARACTER SET. Convert.

NOTE: The Special settings for the InfoVox are as follows:

1. The language in ROM slot 1. 2. The language in ROM slot 2. 3. The language in ROM slot 3. 4. The language in ROM slot 4. 5. The language in ROM slot 5. 6. The language in ROM slot 6. 7. The language in ROM slot 7. 8. Changes to the normal response mode; improves prosody. 9. Changes to the fast response mode; default.

HARDWARE SETTINGS

You must set some of the InfoVox switches for it to work with Screen Reader/2.

SWITCH-BANKS LOCATIONS

The unit contains three switch banks. These are located, if the back of the synthesizer is facing you, in the lower mid-section of the panel and to the right of the parallel and serial connectors.

Use a ballpoint pen or other similar tool to set the switches. If the switches are pushed toward the bottom of the synthesizer, they are On. If they are positioned toward the top of the synthesizer, they are Off.

SWITCH SETTINGS

The settings for the three banks follow:

For Bank 1 (left):

Switch 1 is On. Switch 2 is Off. Switches 3 to 7 are On. Switch 8 is Off.

For Bank 2 (middle):

Switch 1 is On. Switch 2 is Off. Switches 3 to 7 are On. Switch 8 is Off.

For Bank 3 (right):

Switches 1 to 7 are Off. Switch 8 is On.

NOTE: Ensure that you have the correct cable and that you connect the synthesizer cable to the computer correctly. The correct cable has female connectors on both ends. Connect the cable to the host-computer connector on the synthesizer (the male connector leftmost at the back of the synthesizer unit, if it is facing you) and to the serial connector on your computer.

Other Considerations

The following sections address Screen Reader/2 features that you need to know about, but are not likely to use often:

"Changes to Screen Reader/2 1.0".
"Help for Error Messages".
"Recalling Screen Reader/2 Settings".
"Migrating Windows Applications".

CHANGES TO SCREEN READER/2

There are several things that have changed since Screen Reader/2 version 1.0. This section outlines these changes so that you will be able to use the new Screen Reader/2 quickly and efficiently.

PRESENTATION MANAGER KEY SEQUENCES

Some P M key sequences that started with C in the previous version of Screen Reader/2 have been changed to leave the C key sequences available for application-specific profiles. (CHORD B S has also been changed.)

The list below includes each former key sequence, the key sequence to which it has been changed, and the function.

C then H has changed to chord 7 8 then S. Chord 7 8 then S will read static text.

Chord B S has changed to chord 7 8 then C. Chord 7 8 then C will display the Desktop context menu.

Chord C 9 then n has changed to chord 7 9 then n. Chord 7 9 then n will set up the Screen Reader/2 switch list by associating the current window with keypad key n.

C then 9 then n has changed to chord 8 9 then n. Chord 8 9 then n will make window n the foreground window.

C then 0 has changed to chord 7 8 then 7. Chord 7 8 then 7 will announce the window type and type of control at the current Screen Reader/2 pointer position.

C then 8 has changed to chord 7 8 then 8. Chord 7 8 then 8 will announce the program name and window title.

Chord C 8 has changed to chord 7 8 then 9. Chord 7 8 then 9 will display a list of windows in the current application.

NOTE: Key sequence C THEN C still announces the cursor line or selector.

AUTOMATIC STARTUP

In the previous version, you could run the DESK program after you installed Screen Reader/2 to change the way the desktop was organized. In the new version, the installation program does this for you automatically.

NOTE: If you did not run DESK in the previous version, you may prefer to use the original desktop layout. Refer to "OS/2 Desktop" for information on restoring the original desktop.

DESKTOP FOLDER FOR SCREEN READER/2

In the previous version, you started Screen Reader/2 from the Screen Reader/2 Folder. This folder contained the following objects:

  • Screen Reader/2.
  • OS/2 Keys.
  • User's Guide.
  • PAL Reference.
  • Configuration File.

In the new version, you start Screen Reader/2 by opening the Independence Series folder. This folder contains the following objects:

  • On-Line Books -- Screen Reader/2.
  • Configuration File -- Screen Reader/2.
  • Screen Reader/2.

NOTE: If you have other Independence Series software installed, it may also contain other objects.

CHANGES TO SCREEN READER/2 1.1

There are several things that have changed since the previous version of Screen Reader/2. Refer to the Screen Reader/2 version 1.2 Installation Guide for these changes. The information is available in print and on cassette.

This new release of Screen Reader/2 enables users to have ScreenReader/2 version 1.2 and Screen Magnifier/2 on a system and to have them work together.

This release also includes the following updates:

1. More profiles

We have included three new sample profiles:

LOTUS 1-2-3 FOR OS/2 This profile makes it easier to use Lotus 1-2-3 release 2.0 for OS/2 with Screen Reader/2. You can find its description with the Presentation Manager profiles in this Screen Reader/2 User's Guide. AMIPRO FOR WINDOWS This sample profile enables you to use the word processor AmiPro version 3.01 with Screen Reader/2. Its description is listed with the Windows profiles in this User's Guide.

2. DOS profiles now loaded automatically

Now, whenever you start a DOS program listed in this User's Guide, a profile for that program will be automatically added to the profile tier.

3. Indexing supported for Blazie Engineering products

If you use the Braille Blazer or the Braille'n Speak, you will find that indexing works. We updated the synthesizer section of this User's Guide to reflect this change. The synthesizer sections in the printed and cassette versions of Getting Started remain unchanged.

4. Updated help and error messages

We have reworked Screen Reader/2 error messages to be more understandable and useful. In addition, we enhanced help for the Screen Reader/2 notebooks.

HELP FOR ERROR MESSAGES

If an error message is displayed, you can obtain more information about the cause of the error and how to correct it. At an OS/2 command prompt, type help, followed by the number of the error that you encountered. For example, if you encounter an error with the identifying number ERR1234, you would type help ERR1234. Screen Reader/2 will display information about the error.

RECALLING SCREEN READER/2 SETTINGS

If you think you saved your Screen Reader/2 state settings but they were not active the next time you used the program, it may be because you have changed the profile tier in which the settings were saved. The profile tier must be exactly as it was when you saved the settings. If you change the current profile tier to be identical to the one in which you saved your settings, the settings will be restored automatically.

SCREEN READER/2 KEY SEQUENCES

This appendix contains a complete listing of all base Screen Reader/2 key sequences. The first section lists the Screen Reader/2 core keys sequentially. For example, all of the key sequences that start with A, then those that start with B, and so on.

The second section lists the key sequences by function. For example, all of the reading keys, then the spelling keys, and so on.

BASE KEYS

The Screen Reader/2 base keys read information on the screen, announce format changes, and turn switches On or Off.

Basic Keys:

1. Reads the previous line. 2. Reads the current line. 3. Reads the next line. 4. Reads the previous word. 5. Reads the current word. 6. Reads the next word. 7. Reads the previous character. 8. Reads the current character. 9. Reads the next character. HELP. Toggles Help mode On or Off. STOP. Stops speech.

Key sequences that start with 0 are:

001 TO 009. Reads lines 1 through 9. 010 TO 019. Reads lines 10 through 19. 020 TO 029. Reads lines 20 through 29. 030 TO 039. Reads lines 30 through 39. 040 TO 049. Reads lines 40 through 49. 050 TO 059. Reads lines 50 through 59. 060 TO 069. Reads lines 60 through 69. CHORD 0 1. Reads the rest of the screen from the line above the current position. CHORD 0 2. Reads the rest of the screen from the current position. CHORD 0 3. Reads the rest of the screen from the line below the current position. 0 7. Reads the character above. 0 8. Announces the color of the current character. 0 9. Reads the character below. 0 A. Reads the entire screen.

0 B. Reads the rest of the screen from the current position. 0 C. Reads the rest of the line. 0 D. Moves the pointer to the right edge of the viewport. 0 #. Moves the pointer to the bottom left of the viewport. 0 *. Moves the pointer to the top left of the viewport. 0 H. Announces the time. CHORD 0 7. Toggles setting and clearing the default color. CHORD 0 8. Toggles Color Scan On or Off. CHORD 0 H. Announces the date. CHORD 0 S. Toggles the time autospeak On or Off.

Key sequences that start with * are:

  • 1. Reads the previous field.
  • 2. Reads the current field.
  • 3. Reads the next field.
  • 4. Spells the previous word.
  • 5. Spells the current word.
  • 6. Spells the next word.
  • 7. Spells the previous character using the phonetic alphabet.
  • 8. Spells the current character using the phonetic alphabet.
  • 9. Spells the next character using the phonetic alphabet.
  • 0. Switches to pronounce format.
  • A. Reads the rest of the current field.
  • B. Spells the current word with capitals.
  • C. Announces the ASCII value of the current character.
  • D. Switches to phonetic format.
  • H. Sets the field definition for foreground or background color, or a mixture of both.
  • *. Switches to text format.
  • #. Switches to spell format.

CHORD * 2. Toggles Font Scan On or Off. CHORD * A. Announces the font of the current character. CHORD * H. Toggles between inclusion and exclusion of font changes in field definitions.

Key sequences that start with # are:

  1. 1. Searches for a string you specify from the top.
  2. 2. Continues forward search.
  3. 3. Searches for the current string from the top.
  4. 4. Announces the keyboard lock-key status.
  5. 5. Announces current format.
  6. 6. Announces the current viewport status.
  7. 8. Announces the pointer position.
  8. 9. Announces the current mode and position status.
  1. 0. Turns on pointer mode.
  2. A. Adds a profile to the tier.
  3. B. Toggles reporting keyboard lock-key status On or Off.
  4. C. Announces the cursor position.
  5. D. Turns on cursor mode.
  6. H. Starts ignoring one or more characters.
  7. #. Moves the pointer to the cursor or selector.
  8. *. Moves the cursor to the pointer. (This key sequence may not work on non-IBM machines.)

CHORD # 1. Searches backwards from the bottom for a string you specify. CHORD # 2. Continues backward search. CHORD # 3. Searches backward from the bottom for the previous string. CHORD # A. Removes a profile from the tier. CHORD # B. Announces the Screen Reader/2 version and the active profiles for the current session. CHORD # H. Stops ignoring one or more characters. CHORD # S. Resets ignore.

Key sequences that start with A are:

A 1 N. Sets pitch (1 to 9). A 2 N. Sets rate (1 to 9). A 3 N. Sets volume (1 to 9). A 4. Toggles Caps On or Off. A 5. Toggles Spaces On or Off. A 6. Toggles Dictionary On or Off. A 7. Toggles Pause On or Off. A 8. Toggles Wrap On or Off. A 9. Toggles line Numbering On or Off. A 0. Toggles ForceSpell On or Off. A A N. Sets Special Codes (1 to 9). A B. Toggles Graphics On or Off. A C. Cycles through word-definition settings (alphabetic, alphanumeric, and nonblank). A #. Announces the status of switches and the talking level in effect. A *. Toggles Key Echo On or Off. CHORD A 3. Announces the status for scan. CHORD A 4. Toggles Caps Scan On or Off. CHORD A 6. Toggles Trailing characters On or Off. CHORD A 7. Cycles through mixed-case handling. CHORD A 0. Toggles SpellCaps On or Off. CHORD A S. Sets the amount of talking (chatty, moderate, or quiet level) . CHORD A 1 THEN 0. Announces values from last event key pressed (flag byte, scan code, character code in decimal). CHORD A 1 THEN 1. Toggles between having the pop-up keypad active on the right or left. CHORD A 1 THEN 2. Sets up the pop-up keypad Hot key and Stop key.

CHORD A 1 THEN 3. Toggles between the keyboard beeping or not beeping. CHORD A 1 THEN 4. Toggles between disabling only the keyboard keys of the pop-up keypad or the entire typing area of the keyboard while the pop-up keypad is active. CHORD A 1 THEN 5. Announces the status of the pop-up keypad settings. CHORD A 1 THEN B. Toggles the pop-up keypad Hot key and the Stop key On or Off. CHORD A 2 THEN N. Redefines the pop-up keypad key n to another keyboard key. CHORD A 2 THEN S. Stops redefining pop-up keypad key n. CHORD A 5 THEN N. Sets the number of spaces that you want Screen Reader/2 to announce between words. (n can be any number from 1 to 9; the default is 2.)

Key sequences that start with B are:

B 1. Reads the first word of the current line. B 2. Reads the middle word of the current line. B 3. Reads the last word of the current line. B 4. Reads the rest of the word above. B 5. Reads the rest of the current word. B 6. Reads the rest of the word below. B 7. Announces the position of the left edge of the column viewer. B 8. Announces the location of the column viewer and how many columns there are. B 9. Announces the position of the right edge of the column viewer. B A. Defines viewport 1 through 9. B B N. Makes viewport n the active viewport (n can be any number from 1 to 9). B B B. Sets the viewport to the full view. B C. Sets the bottom-right corner of the viewport. B D. Toggles user-defined autospeaks On or Off. B D B. Turns off all active autospeaks. B *. Saves all Screen Reader/2 settings. B # N. Announces the screen coordinates of viewport n or autospeak n. B 0. Defines autospeaks 1 through 9. CHORD B 1. Reads from the top of the column to the current column-viewer position. CHORD B 2. Moves the column viewer up one line and reads the column entry. CHORD B 3. Moves the column viewer to the top of column. CHORD B 4. Moves the column viewer left one column and reads the column entry, or sets the left edge manually. CHORD B 5. Reads the current column entry.

CHORD B 6. Moves the column viewer right one column and reads the column entry, or sets the right edge manually. CHORD B 7. Reads from the current column-viewer position down to the bottom of the column. CHORD B 8. Moves the column viewer down one line and reads the column entry. CHORD B 9. Moves the column viewer to the bottom of the column. CHORD B 0. Displays the Customization menu. CHORD B A. Defines a column. CHORD B *. Moves the column viewer to the previous position. Press this chord twice to go back two positions. CHORD B H. Starts the tutorial. B CHORD B 1.Moves to column 1. B CHORD B 2. Moves to column 2. B CHORD B 3. Moves to column 3. B CHORD B 4. Moves to column 4. B CHORD B 5. Moves to column 5. B CHORD B 6. Moves to column 6. B CHORD B 7. Moves to column 7. B CHORD B 8. Moves to column 8. B CHORD B 9. Moves to column 9. B CHORD B A N. Reassigns a column number.

Key sequences that start with C are reserved for application profiles, except:

C C. Announces the cursor line or selector in Presentation Manager.

Key sequences that start with D are:

D 1. Reads previous sentence. D 2. Reads current sentence. D 3. Reads next sentence. D 7. Toggles Character Echo On or Off. D 8. Toggles Word Echo On or Off. D 9. Toggles Line Echo On or Off. D 0. Toggles Column Browse On or Off. D A. Reads current paragraph. D B. Toggles the flush of text being spoken On or Off. D C. Announces the currently active browse and echo modes. D D. Switches to default edit facility, turning Line Browse On, echoes Off, and flush On. D #. Toggles current edit facility selections. D *. Toggles Line Browse On or Off. CHORD D 2. Toggles between one-space and two-space sentence termination. CHORD D 7. Shifts the margin alert to the left by one character. CHORD D 8. Cycles through margin alert types.

CHORD D 9. Shifts the margin alert to the right by one character. CHORD D 0. Announces the current status of icon speaking (All, Known, or Not Speaking Icons) CHORD D #. Associates a text string with the current icon to identify it. CHORD D *. Toggles the announcing of icons to All, Known, or Not Speaking Icons. CHORD D C THEN 7. Cycles through deletion feedback and destructive backspace types. CHORD D C THEN 8. Announces the length of the deletion look-ahead. CHORD D C THEN 9. Cycles through lengths of the deletion look-ahead (3 through 20). CHORD D C THEN C. Toggles function-keys processing On or Off. CHORD D C THEN 0. Enables and disables edit facility for controls. CHORD D C THEN D. Toggles the browse talking level between chatty and moderate.

Key sequences that start with 1 are:

CHORD 1 2 THEN 4. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the Desktop. CHORD 1 2 THEN 5. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the view. CHORD 1 2 THEN 6. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the viewport. CHORD 1 2 THEN 7. Changes the view up one level to the parent window or the Desktop. CHORD 1 2 THEN 8. Resets the view to the focus window. CHORD 1 2 THEN 9. Changes the view down one level to a child window. CHORD 1 2 THEN *. Changes the view to the next OS/2 text window. CHORD 1 2 THEN A. Announces vertical scroll-bar information. CHORD 1 2 THEN B. Announces horizontal scroll-bar information. CHORD 1 2 THEN C. Changes the view to the next sibling window. CHORD 1 2 THEN H. Reads the description for the highlighted setting in the DOS Settings or Win-OS/2 Settings Notebook.

Key sequences that start with 2 are:

CHORD 2 3 THEN 1. Toggles moving the mouse to follow the Screen Reader/2 pointer On or Off. CHORD 2 3 THEN 3. Toggles mouse tracking On or Off. CHORD 2 3 THEN 4. Simulates a single click on mouse button 1.

CHORD 2 3 THEN 5. Simulates a double click on mouse button 1. CHORD 2 3 THEN 6. Simulates a single click on mouse button 2. CHORD 2 3 THEN 8. Announces the window containing the mouse pointer. CHORD 2 3 THEN A. Moves the mouse pointer to the Screen Reader/2 pointer. CHORD 2 3 THEN B. Simulates a double click on mouse button 2. CHORD 2 3 THEN C. Cycles through the mouse-movement types: Horizontal only. Vertical only. Horizontal and vertical (the default). CHORD 2 3 THEN H. Announces the status of mouse settings (mouse movement with pointer, mouse tracking, and mouse-movement settings).

Key sequences that start with 7 are:

CHORD 7 8 THEN 7. Announces the window type and type of control at the current Screen Reader/2 pointer position. CHORD 7 8 THEN 8. Announces the program name and window title. CHORD 7 8 THEN 9. Displays a list of windows in the current application. CHORD 7 8 THEN S. Reads static text. CHORD 7 8 THEN C. Displays the Desktop context menu. (This key sequence may not work on non-IBM machines.) CHORD 7 8 THEN D. Toggles drawing noise On or Off. CHORD 7 9 THEN N. Sets up the Screen Reader/2 switch list by associating the current window with keypad key n. CHORD 7 9 THEN H. Clears the switch list.

Key sequences that start with 8 are:

CHORD 8 9 THEN N. Makes window n the foreground window. CHORD 8 9 THEN N is used to switch to the window established by CHORD 7 9 THEN N. CHORD 8 9 THEN H. Announces the switch-list entries and their assigned keys.

KEY SEQUENCES BY FUNCTION

This section lists all of the Screen Reader/2 key sequences according to the function for which they are used.

ANNOUNCE KEYS

0 8. Announces the color of the current character.

  • C. Announces the ASCII value of the current character.

CHORD * A. Announces the font of the current character.

  1. 4. Announces the keyboard lock-key status.
  2. 5. Announces the current format.
  3. 6. Announces the current viewport status.
  4. 8. Announces the pointer position.
  5. 9. Announces the current mode and position status.
  6. C. Announces the cursor position.

CHORD # B. Announces the Screen Reader/2 version and the active profiles for the current session. A #. Announces the status of switches and the talking level in effect. CHORD A 1 THEN 5. Announces the status of the pop-up keypad settings. B # N. Announces the screen coordinates of viewport n or autospeak n. D C. Announces the currently active browse and echo functions. CHORD D C THEN 8. Announces the length of the deletion look-ahead check.

COLUMN-VIEWER KEYS

CHORD B A. Defines a column. CHORD B 0. Displays the Customization menu. B 8. Announces the location of the column viewer and how many columns there are. B 7. Announces the position of the left edge of the column viewer. B 9. Announces the position of the right edge of the column viewer. CHORD B 1. Reads from the top of the column to the current column-viewer position. CHORD B 5. Reads the current column entry. CHORD B 7. Reads from the current column-viewer position down to the bottom of the column. CHORD B 2. Moves the column viewer up one line and reads the column entry. CHORD B 8. Moves the column viewer down one line and reads the column entry.

CHORD B 4. Moves column viewer left one column and reads the column entry, or sets the left edge manually. CHORD B 6. Moves column viewer right one column and reads the column entry, or sets the right edge manually. CHORD B 3. Moves the column viewer to the top of the column. CHORD B 9. Moves the column viewer to the bottom of the column. CHORD B *. Moves the column viewer to the previous position. Press this chord twice to go back 2 positions. B CHORD B 1. Moves to column 1. B CHORD B 2. Moves to column 2. B CHORD B 3. Moves to column 3. B CHORD B 4. Moves to column 4. B CHORD B 5. Moves to column 5. B CHORD B 6. Moves to column 6. B CHORD B 7. Moves to column 7. B CHORD B 8. Moves to column 8. B CHORD B 9. Moves to column 9. B CHORD B A N. Reassigns a column number for ease of use.

CURSOR/POINTER KEYS

  1. 8. Announces the pointer position.
  2. 9. Announces the current mode and position status.
  3. 0. Turns on pointer mode.
  4. C. Announces the cursor position.
  5. D. Turns on cursor mode.
  6. #. Moves the pointer to the cursor or selector.
  7. *. Moves the cursor to the pointer. (This key sequence may not work with non-IBM machines.)

EDIT KEYS

D 7. Toggles Character Echo On or Off. D 8. Toggles Word Echo On or Off. D 9. Toggles Line Echo On or Off. D 0. Toggles Column Browse On or Off. D C. Announces the currently active browse and echo functions. D D. Switches to normal edit facility, turning Line Browse On, echoes Off, and flush On. D #. Toggles current selections. D *. Toggles Line Browse On or Off. CHORD D 2. Toggles between one-space and two-space sentence termination. CHORD D 7. Shifts the margin alert to the left by one character. CHORD D 8. Cycles through margin alerts.

CHORD D 9. Shifts the margin alert to the right by one character. CHORD D C THEN 7. Cycles through deletion feedback and destructive backspace types. CHORD D C THEN 8. Announces the length of the deletion look-ahead check. CHORD D C THEN 9. Changes the length of the deletion look-ahead check length. CHORD D C THEN C. Toggles function-key processing On or Off. CHORD D C THEN 0. Enables and disables edits for a particular type of view. CHORD D C THEN D. Defines the browse talking level.

FORMAT KEYS

  • *. Switches to text format.
  • #. Switches to spell format.
  • D. Switches to phonetic format.
  • 0. Switches to pronounce format.

ICON KEYS

CHORD D 0. Announces the current status of icon speaking (All, Known, or Not Speaking Icons). CHORD D #. Associates a text string with the current icon to identify it. CHORD D *. Toggles the announcing of icons to All, Known, or Not Speaking Icons.

LEVEL/VOLUME/RATE KEYS

A #. Announces the status of switches and the talking level in effect. CHORD A S. Sets the amount of talking (chatty, moderate, or quiet level). A 1 N. Sets pitch (1 to 9). A 2 N. Sets rate (1 to 9). A 3 N. Sets volume (1 to 9).

MISCELLANEOUS KEYS

  1. A. Adds a profile to the tier.

CHORD # A. Removes a profile from the tier. CHORD B H. Starts the tutorial.

MOUSE KEYS

CHORD 2 3 THEN 1. Toggles moving the mouse to follow the Screen Reader/2 pointer On or Off. CHORD 2 3 THEN 3. Toggles mouse tracking On or Off. CHORD 2 3 THEN 4. Simulates a single click on mouse button 1. CHORD 2 3 THEN 5. Simulates a double click on mouse button 1. CHORD 2 3 THEN 6. Simulates a single click on mouse button 2. CHORD 2 3 THEN 8. Announces the window containing the mouse pointer. CHORD 2 3 THEN A. Moves the mouse pointer to the Screen Reader/2 pointer. CHORD 2 3 THEN B. Sets mouse button 2 to respond to double clicks. CHORD 2 3 THEN C. Cycles through the following mouse movements: Horizontal only. Vertical only. Both vertical and horizontal. (This is the default.) CHORD 2 3 THEN H. Announces the status of mouse settings (mouse movement with pointer, mouse tracking, and mouse-movement settings).

MOVE KEYS

0 D. Moves the pointer to the right edge of the viewport. 0 #. Moves the pointer to the bottom left of the viewport. 0 *. Moves the pointer to the top left of the viewport.

  1. #. Moves the pointer to the cursor or selector.
  2. *. Moves the cursor to the pointer. (This key sequence may not work on non-IBM machines.)

POP-UP KEYPAD KEYS

CHORD A 1 THEN 1. Toggles between having the pop-up keypad active on the right or the left. CHORD A 1 THEN 2. Sets up the Hot key and the Stop key for the pop-up keypad. CHORD A 1 THEN 3. Toggles between the keyboard beeping and not beeping. Audible feedback is the default. CHORD A 1 THEN 4. Toggles between disabling only the keyboard keys of the pop-up keypad or the entire typing area of the keyboard while the pop-up keypad is active. CHORD A 1 THEN 5. Announces the status of the pop-up keypad settings.

CHORD A 1 THEN B. Toggles the Hot key and Stop key On or Off. CHORD A 2 THEN N. Redefines pop-up keypad key n to another keyboard key. CHORD A 2 THEN S. Stops redefining pop-up keypad key n.

PRESENTATION MANAGER KEY SEQUENCES

CHORD 7 8 THEN 8. Announces the program name and window title. CHORD 7 9 THEN N. Sets up the Screen Reader/2 switch list by associating the current window with keypad key n. CHORD 7 9 THEN H. Clears the switch list. You are asked to confirm that you want to clear the entries. CHORD 8 9 THEN H. Announces the switch-list entries and their assigned keys. CHORD 8 9 THEN N. Makes window n the foreground window. CHORD 8 9 THEN N is used to switch to the window established by CHORD 7 9 THEN N. CHORD 7 8 THEN 7. Announces the window type and type of control at the current Screen Reader/2 pointer position. C C. Announces the cursor line or selector. CHORD 7 8 THEN S. Reads static text. CHORD 7 8 THEN 9. Displays a list of windows in the current application. CHORD 1 2 THEN 4. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the Desktop. CHORD 1 2 THEN 5. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the view. CHORD 1 2 THEN 6. Announces the pointer location in pixels relative to the viewport. CHORD 1 2 THEN 7. Changes the view up one level to the parent window or the Desktop. CHORD 1 2 THEN 8. Resets the view to the focus window. CHORD 1 2 THEN 9. Changes the view down one level to a child window. CHORD 1 2 THEN C. Changes the view to the next sibling window. CHORD 1 2 THEN *. Changes the view to the next OS/2 text window. CHORD 1 2 THEN A. Announces vertical scroll-bar information. CHORD 1 2 THEN B. Announces horizontal scroll-bar information. CHORD 1 2 THEN H. Reads the description for the highlighted setting in the DOS Settings or Win-OS/2 Settings Notebook. CHORD 7 8 THEN D. Toggles drawing noise On or Off.

CHORD 7 8 THEN C. Displays the Desktop context menu. (This key sequence may not work on non-IBM machines.)

READ KEYS

1. Reads the previous line. 2. Reads the current line. 3. Reads the next line. 4. Reads the previous word. 5. Reads the current word. 6. Reads the next word. 7. Reads the previous character. 8. Reads the current character. 9. Reads the next character. 001 TO 009. Reads lines 1 through 9. 010 TO 019. Reads lines 10 through 19. 020 TO 029. Reads lines 20 through 29. 030 TO 039. Reads lines 30 through 39. 040 TO 049. Reads lines 40 through 49. 050 TO 059. Reads lines 50 through 59. 060 TO 069. Reads lines 60 through 69. CHORD 0 1. Reads the rest of the screen from the line above the current position. CHORD 0 2. Reads the rest of the screen from the current position. CHORD 0 3. Reads the rest of the screen from the line below the current position. 0 7. Reads the character above. 0 9. Reads the character below. 0 A. Reads the entire screen. 0 B. Reads the rest of the screen from the current position. 0 C. Reads the rest of the line.

  • 1. Reads the previous field.
  • 2. Reads the current field.
  • 3. Reads the next field.
  • A. Reads the rest of the current field.

B 1. Reads the first word of the current line. B 2. Reads the middle word of the current line. B 3. Reads the last word of the current line. B 4. Reads the rest of the word above. B 5. Reads the rest of the current word. B 6. Reads the rest of the word below. D 1. Reads the previous sentence. D 2. Reads the current sentence. D 3. Reads the next sentence. D A. Reads the current paragraph. STOP. Stops speech.

SCAN KEYS

CHORD 0 7. Toggles setting and clearing the default color. CHORD 0 8. Toggles Color Scan On or Off. CHORD A 3. Announces the status for scan. CHORD A 4. Toggles Caps Scan On or Off. CHORD A 7. Cycles through mixed case handling: Says cap before each capital letter. Says mixed and cap. Says caps only to separate words. Says mixed only. CHORD * 2. Toggles Font Scan On or Off.

SEARCH KEYS

  1. 1. Searches for a string you specify from the top.
  2. 2. Continues forward search.
  3. 3. Searches for the current string from the top.

CHORD # 1. Searches backward from the bottom for a string you specify. CHORD # 2. Continues backward search. CHORD # 3. Searches backward from the bottom for the previous string.

SET DEFINITION KEYS

  • H. Sets the definition for foreground or background color, or a mixture of both.
  1. H. Starts ignoring one or more characters.

CHORD # H. Stops ignoring one or more characters. CHORD # S. Resets ignore.

  1. D. Turns on cursor mode.
  2. 0. Turns on pointer mode.

A 1 N. Sets pitch (n can be any number from 1 to 9). A 2 N. Sets rate (n can be any number from 1 to 9). A 3 N. Sets volume (n can be any number from 1 to 9). A A N. Sets Special Codes (n can be any number from 1 to 9). CHORD A 1 THEN 2. Sets up the Hot key and the Stop key. CHORD A 5 THEN N. Sets the number of spaces that you want Screen Reader/2 to announce between words. (n can be any number from 1 to 9; the default is 2.) A C. Cycles through word-definition settings (alphabetic, alphanumeric, and nonblank). CHORD A S. Sets the amount of talking (chatty, moderate, or quiet). B C. Sets the bottom-right corner of the viewport.

B B B. Sets the viewport to the full view. B *. Saves all Screen Reader/2 settings.

SPELL KEYS

  • 4. Spells the previous word.
  • 5. Spells the current word.
  • 6. Spells the next word.
  • 7. Spells the previous character using the phonetic alphabet.
  • 8. Spells the current character using the phonetic alphabet.
  • 9. Spells the next character using the phonetic alphabet.
  • B. Spells the current word with capitals.

TIME KEYS

0 H. Announces the time. CHORD 0 H. Announces the date. CHORD 0 S. Toggles the time autospeak On or Off. The default is Off.

TOGGLE KEYS

HELP. Toggles Help mode On or Off. CHORD * 2. Toggles Font Scan On or Off. CHORD * H. Toggles between inclusion and exclusion of font changes in field definitions.

  1. B. Toggles reporting keyboard lock-key status On or Off.

A 4. Toggles Caps On or Off. A 5. Toggles Spaces On or Off. A 6. Toggles Dictionary On or Off. A 7. Toggles Pause On or Off. A 8. Toggles Wrap On or Off. A 9. Toggles Numbering On or Off. A 0. Toggles ForceSpell On or Off. A B. Toggles Graphics On or Off. A *. Toggles Key Echo On or Off. CHORD A 1 THEN 1. Toggles between having the pop-up keypad active on the right or the left. CHORD A 1 THEN 3. Toggles between the keyboard beeping or not beeping. CHORD A 1 THEN 4. Toggles between disabling only the keyboards keys of the pop-up keypad or the entire typing area of the keyboard while the pop-up keypad is active. CHORD A 1 THEN B. Toggles the Hot key and the Stop key On or Off. CHORD A 4. Toggles Caps Scan On or Off. CHORD A 6. Toggles Trailing Characters On or Off. CHORD A 0. Toggles SpellCaps On or Off.

B D. Toggles user-defined autospeaks On or Off. D 7. Toggles Character Echo On or Off. D 8. Toggles Word Echo On or Off. D 9. Toggles Line Echo On or Off. D 0. Toggles Column Browse On or Off. D B. Toggles the flush of text being spoken On or Off. D #. Toggles current selections. D *. Toggles Line Browse On or Off. CHORD D 2. Toggles between one-space and two-space sentence termination. CHORD D C THEN C. Toggles function-key processing On or Off. CHORD 0 8. Toggles Color Scan On or Off.

VIEWPORT AND AUTOSPEAK KEYS

B A. Defines viewport 1 through 9. B B N. Makes viewport n the active viewport (n can be any number from 1 to 9). B B B. Sets the viewport to the full view. B C. Sets the bottom-right corner of the viewport. B D. Toggles user-defined autospeaks On or Off. B D B. Turns off all active autospeaks. B 0. Defines autospeaks 1 through 9. B # N. Announces the screen coordinates of viewport n or autospeak n. 0 D. Moves the pointer to the right edge of the viewport. 0 #. Moves the pointer to the bottom left of the viewport. 0 *. Moves the pointer to the top left of the viewport.

Glossary

A

ACKNOWLEDGE STOP
In Screen Reader/2, a parameter that specifies if the synthesizer sends a control sequence back to Screen Reader/2 to indicate that it has received, and has acted upon, the Screen Reader/2 Stop sequence.
ALWAYS STOP
A Screen Reader/2 parameter that specifies if the synthesizer allows a Stop sequence to be sent even if Not Clear to Send or XOFF has been received.
APPLICATION PROGRAM
A program written for, or by, a user that applies to the user's work, such as a program that does inventory control or word processing.
NOTE: Screen Reader/2 contains profiles that define keypad key sequences customized for use with specific application programs.
ASCII
An acronym standing for American National Standard Code for Information Interchange. The ASCII code is a character set consisting of seven-bit coded characters (eight bits, including parity check). It is used for information interchange among data-processing systems, data-communication systems, and associated equipment.
The ASCII set consists of control characters and graphic characters.
NOTE: IBM has defined an extension to the ASCII code (characters 128-255).
ATTRIBUTE
Used here as a display attribute, it is a number that determines how an item should appear on the screen. For example, an attribute could be the color of a screen character or indicate that the Presentation Manager character is italic, bold, or underlined.
AUTOSPEAK
An autospeak monitors values or areas of the screen for change and then announces the change. It is a unique feature of Screen Reader/2 and the Profile Access Language.

B

BAUD RATE
The measure of the transmission rate between a computer and a synthesizer; it is approximately ten times the number of characters transmitted per second.
BROWSE
An edit function, browsing is used primarily for reading. It enables you to hear the character, word, or line the cursor is on, depending on where you move the cursor. If Page Browse is On, a page is read automatically.
BUFFER MANAGEMENT
A Screen Reader/2 synthesizer parameter that enables Screen Reader/2 to wait for a good breaking point in the text before sending a talk command and a "buffer full" string to the synthesizer, leaving room for the Stop command.

C

CHILD WINDOW
A window that is positioned relative to another window (either a main window or another child window). Contrast with parent window.
CHORD
A key sequence that consists of two keypad keys that are pressed at the same time and can be combined with other key presses. An example of a key sequence that includes a chord is CHORD 1 2 THEN B.
CLEAR TO SEND (CTS)
In data communications, a term meaning that the protocol between the computer and the communications device is based on hardware.
CODE PAGE
The character display you can select for your system based on the country code. A system can be enabled for two pages, typically 437 (English) and 850 (International). Screen Reader/2 needs to know the code pages to announce the characters correctly.
COLUMN VIEWER
A Screen Reader/2 feature that enables you to read columnar information quickly and easily.
COMMUNICATION PORT (COM PORT)
An access point for data entry or exit either to or from a communication device such as your speech synthesizer. A communications port is sometimes called a serial port or serial connector. (COM1, COM2, and COM3 are character-device names reserved for serial ports 1 through 3.)
CONTROL WINDOW
A class of window used to handle a specific kind of user interaction. Radio buttons and check boxes are examples.
CURSOR
A symbol displayed on the screen and associated with an input device. The cursor indicates where input from the device will be placed. Types of cursors include text cursors, graphics cursors, and selection cursors. Contrast with focus and pointer.

D

DEFAULT VALUE
A value used when no value is explicitly specified by the user. For example, the default value for synthesizer volume is 5.
DESKTOP
  1. In P M, a window that displays a list of groups of programs, each of which can be started or stopped.
  2. The window, corresponding to the physical device, against which all other types of windows are established.
DICTIONARY
A list of words and replacement strings. Screen Reader/2 uses the dictionary to read words differently from the way the synthesizer would speak them normally.
DIALOG BOX
A type of window that contains one or more controls for the formatted display and entry of data. Also known as a pop-up window.

E

ECHO
An edit function, echoing is used primarily for writing. It repeats (speaks) what you just typed, whether it is a character, word, or line.
ENTRY FIELD
An area on the screen, usually highlighted in some manner, in which users type information.
ENTRY-FIELD CONTROL
The means by which the application receives data entered by the user in an entry field. When it has the input focus, it displays a flashing pointer at the position where the next typed character will go.

F

FIELD
In Screen Reader/2, a contiguous area of the display with the same color or font. It can be one character, several characters, a line, several lines, or an entire window.
FOCUS
The point where keyboard actions will take effect. In OS/2, the focus is usually on the window or control where the cursor is located currently.
FONT
A particular size and style of typeface that contains definitions of character sets, marker sets, and pattern sets.
FORMAT
In Screen Reader/2, any one of five methods of reading information on the screen. These methods are text, pronounce, spell, phonetic, and ASCII.
FULL-SCREEN APPLICATION
An application program that occupies the whole screen.

G

GRAPHIC CHARACTER
In Screen Reader/2, a set of characters with ASCII values from 176 to 223 that are "box" characters-corners, vertical and horizontal lines, tees, crosses, and intersections.

H

HANDSHAKING
For communications with the synthesizer, either Clear to Send, a hardware protocol, or XON/XOFF, a software protocol. Handshaking tells Screen Reader/2 when it can transmit information to the synthesizer. Another word for handshaking is protocol.

I

ICON
A graphical representation of an object consisting of an image and its background. Icons can represent items (such as a document file) with which a user wants to work, and actions that the user wants to perform. In Presentation Manager, icons are used for data objects, system actions, and minimized programs.
INDEXING
The capability of some synthesizers to send markers back through the asynchronous communications channel after each word is spoken. This capability enables the Screen Reader/2 pointer to move to the beginning of each word as it is spoken.
INPUT FOCUS
The area of the screen that will receive input from an input device (typically, the keyboard).

K

KEYPAD
A rectangular piece of equipment with 18 keys that directs Screen Reader/2 to speak text from the screen.
The keypad can be attached to a mouse port or to a Screen Reader/2 adapter.

L

LENGTH
In asynchronous communication, the number of "transmit and receive" data bits.

N

NOTEBOOK
A graphical representation of a bound notebook that contains pages separated into sections by tabs. You can select a tab to turn to the section identified by the tab label. A section can contain one or more pages.
NOTEBOOK CONTROLS
A notebook control is used to make changes in an object's settings notebook. These changes take effect immediately. Screen Reader/2 notebook controls include: combination boxes, spin buttons, entry fields, menus, scroll bars, notebooks, buttons, list boxes, title bars, multiple-line entry fields, and static text.

P

PAL
Profile Access Language. A computer programming language that enables you to create or modify profiles for use with Screen Reader/2.
PARENT WINDOW
The window relative to which one or more child windows is positioned. Contrast with child window.
PARITY
In asynchronous communications, maintaining the same level or count. For example, the speech synthesizer and the computer keep the same number of computer ones to perform a check based on an even or odd number for all words.
PHONETIC ALPHABET
An alphabet that represents each character by a word beginning with the same letter. For example, e f g is echo, foxtrot, golf.
PITCH
The parameter that adjusts the frequency; that is, the high or low tone of the synthesizer's voice.
PIXEL
The smallest area of a display screen capable of being addressed and switched between visible and invisible states. Combined together, they constitute an image (as on a computer screen).
POINTER
  1. A Screen Reader/2-unique marking device that is invisible on the screen and moves along as speech commences. It provides a way to move around the screen that is not dependent on cursor movement, thereby allowing full access to the screen.
  2. The symbol displayed on the screen that is moved by a pointing device, such as a mouse. The pointer is used to point to items that users can select. Contrast with cursor.
POP-UP KEYPAD
A block of sixteen keys on the keyboard that emulates the main block of sixteen keys on the Screen Reader/2 keypad. The block is arranged four keys by four keys and can be set up on either the left or right side of a keyboard.
POP-UP WINDOW
A window that appears on top of another window in a dialog. Each pop-up window must be completed before returning to the underlying window.
PRESENTATION MANAGER (PM)
The visual component of OS/2 that presents, in windows, a graphics-based interface to applications and files installed and running in OS/2.
PROFILE
A file used to control the key definitions and autospeaks for Screen Reader/2. Processing of a profile includes creating, compiling, and loading it.
PROFILE TIER
A stack of profiles. The profile tier can change depending on which program or process is running in the foreground.
PROTOCOL
For communications with the synthesizer, either Clear to Send, a hardware protocol, or XON/XOFF, a software protocol. The protocol tells Screen Reader/2 when it can transmit information to the synthesizer. Another word for protocol is handshaking.

R

RATE
The speed at which a speech synthesizer speaks.
READ REQUEST
Any keypad key press that asks Screen Reader/2 to read information from the screen. These requests can take different forms; for example, read a line, word, or character, or spell a word.
REFRESH
To update a window, with changed information, to its current status.

S

SCROLL BAR
A control window, horizontally or vertically aligned, that allows the user to scroll additional data into an associated panel area.
SCROLLABLE ENTRY FIELD
An entry field larger than the visible field.
SELECTOR
A type of cursor used to indicate the choice or entry field with which a user wants to interact. It is represented by highlighting the item on which it is currently positioned.
SERIAL SYNTHESIZER
An external synthesizer that attaches to the computer through the serial connector (sometimes called COM port or communication port).
SIBLING PROCESSES
Child processes that have the same parent process.
SIBLING WINDOWS
Child windows that have the same parent window.
SLIDER
An area on the scroll bar that indicates the size and position of the visible information in a panel area in relation to the information available. Also known as thumb mark.
SMART TALK
A Screen Reader/2 feature that enables Screen Reader/2 to send a talk command to the synthesizer before the data has all been sent.
STATIC TEXT
Text associated with an OS/2 Presentation Manager control or a group of controls that describes what the control does.
STOP BITS
A signal to a receiving mechanism to wait for the next signal.
STOP DELAY
In Screen Reader/2, a parameter that specifies a delay after you press Stop on the keypad before normal transmission proceeds.
SWITCH
An action that moves the input focus from one area to another. This can be within the same window or from one window to another.
SWITCH LIST
A Screen Reader/2 feature that enables a user to access multiple windows. A keypad key number is assigned to a window, then that key is used to access that window.

T

TEXT WINDOW
Also known as the VIO (video input/output) window.
TIER
Refer to profile tier.

V

VIEW
In OS/2 Presentation Manager, a Screen Reader/2 view is a Presentation Manager window or a text window. In full screen, the Screen Reader/2 view is the screen. In Presentation Manager, the coordinates of a view are relative to the OS/2 Desktop.
VIEWPORT
A rectangular portion of a Screen Reader/2 view. A viewport's coordinates are relative to the current view.
VIO
Video Input/Output.
VOLUME
The loudness with which a speech synthesizer speaks.

W

WINDOW
An area of the screen with visible boundaries within which information is displayed. A window can be smaller than the screen or as large as the screen, and windows can overlap.
WINDOW LIST
The list of programs that are active. The list can be used to switch to a program and to stop programs.

X

XON/XOFF
In data communications, an abbreviation meaning "transmit On, transmit Off." This is a protocol determining how the computer and the device communicate and is based on software.